JP7461702B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to an amusement machine.

Conventionally, gaming machines include slot machines (reel type gaming machines), pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, and jankyu gaming machines, and among these types of gaming machines, there is a slot machine such as that shown in Patent Document 1.

JP 2017-144015 A

In conventional gaming machines, various innovations have been made to improve the gameplay and make the game more interesting, and to make the gameplay smoother, but there is still room for further improvement.

The present invention aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention has the following features. In the following description of the characteristic configuration, an example of the corresponding configuration in the embodiment described below is shown in parentheses.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present invention provides:
An image production means (e.g., an image display device 11) for producing a production using an image;
An abnormality detection means capable of detecting a plurality of types of abnormalities that impede control of a game,
the image presentation means is capable of executing a first presentation (e.g., a pseudo light guide plate presentation) using a first image (e.g., a pseudo light guide plate image) and a second presentation (e.g., a battle presentation) using a second image (e.g., a battle presentation image);
the first effect is performed by superimposing and displaying the first image on at least a part of the second image while the second effect is being performed;
The first image used in the first performance is an image having transparency that reduces the visibility of the second image over the entire area where the first image overlaps with the second image, and is composed of a first area (e.g., a non-transparent area PLC) that does not allow the second image to be viewed in the overlapping area with the second image, and a second area (e.g., a transparent area LP) that has transparency that allows the second image to be viewed in the overlapping area with the second image ,
The first area in the first image is configured to be located at a position that does not overlap with information about an advantageous game state displayed in the second image,
When a predetermined abnormality (e.g., a RAM error) is detected by the abnormality detection means during execution of the first effect, the image effect means displays a third image (e.g., an error message) corresponding to the detected abnormality by superimposing it on the first image and the second image;
The third image is characterized in that the third image is opaque to the display of the first image and the second image in an overlapping area with the first image and the second image.

A gaming machine with the above configuration can increase the enjoyment of the game.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to a first embodiment of the present invention. FIG. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing a schematic configuration of the slot machine. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the position where the start lever of the above-mentioned slot machine is turned on. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining an operation for changing a setting value in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the setting values displayed when the slot machine transitions to a setting change mode with the setting change switch turned ON. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the determination state of the setting values when the slot machine transitions to a setting change mode with the start lever turned ON. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the state when the slot machine transitions to a setting change mode with various switches turned ON. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration related to the state when the slot machine transitions to a setting change mode with various switches turned ON. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on the reels of the slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 1 in the above slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 2 in the above slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 3 in the above slot machine. A diagram showing symbol combination 4 in the above slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the bonus condition device, and (B) shows the winning re-play condition device (1). FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning re-play condition device (2) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning re-play condition device (3) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (4) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (5) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a winning replay condition device (6) in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the winning numbers assigned to each condition device in the slot machine. FIG. 2 is a block diagram conceptually showing the functions of the slot machine. A diagram showing the relationship between each RT state in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the relationship between each game mode in the slot machine. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing variables used in controlling the slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a figure showing the contents of the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone, (B) is a lottery for chance mode 1, (C) is a lottery for chance mode 2-1, (D) is a lottery for chance mode 2-2, and (E) is a figure showing the contents of the lottery for chance game 3. In the above slot machine, (A) is a chance game number lottery, (B) is a chance cycle lottery, (C) is an EX1 mode lottery, (D) is an EX2 mode lottery, (E) is an AT mode lottery-1, (F) is an AT mode lottery-2, and (G) is an AT mode lottery-3. In the above slot machine, (A) is the Seven 1 draw, (B) is the Seven 2 draw, (C) is the AT mode rewrite draw, (D) is the Seven Loop draw, (E) is the Gold Seven Loop draw, (F) is the Gold Seven Loop rewrite draw, and (G) is the content of the add-on mode draw. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the bell count change lottery, (B) is a Seven Stock 1 lottery, (C) is a Seven Stock 2 lottery, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of the performance lever weight lottery. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of AT cycle lottery-1, (B) is an AT cycle lottery-2, (C) is a drawing of pullback 1 lottery-1, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of pullback 1 lottery-2. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the pullback 1 lottery-3, (B) is a pullback 2 lottery, and (C) is a diagram showing the contents of the AT cycle preferential game number lottery. 1A is a diagram showing the contents of a seven table 1 drawing in the above slot machine, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of a seven table 2 drawing. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the lottery for bell number 1 -1, (B) is a lottery for bell number 1 -2, (C) is a lottery for bell number 2, and (D) is a lottery for bell number 3. In the above slot machine, (A) shows the corresponding relationship between the bonus condition device and the performance group A number, and (B) shows the corresponding relationship between the winning replay condition device and the performance group B number. A diagram showing the correspondence between the effect group number and the condition device group number in the above-mentioned slot machine. FIG. 2 is a plan view showing the appearance of a blocker in the slot machine. A figure showing the state in which the blocker in the above-mentioned slot machine is in a position where it cannot accept medals. 13 is a diagram showing a state in which the blocker in the above-mentioned slot machine is in a medal receiving position. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a schematic representation of chattering that occurs when a blocker is activated in the above slot machine. A diagram showing the installation position of a big prize device to which a modified example of the blocker operation in the above-mentioned slot machine is applied, on a pachinko machine. This is a diagram showing a schematic representation of chattering that occurs when the opening and closing member of the special prize device is operated in the above modified example. This is a diagram showing a schematic diagram of a structure for suppressing chattering that occurs when the opening and closing member of the large prize device moves in the above-mentioned modified example. 1A is a diagram showing the contents of symbol combination display 1, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of symbol combination display 2 in the above slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a figure showing the contents of suggested pattern 1, (B) is a figure showing the contents of suggested pattern 2, (C) is a figure showing the contents of suggested pattern 3, and (D) is a figure showing the contents of suggested pattern 4. 1A is a diagram showing the content of ending presentation 1, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the content of ending presentation 2 in the above slot machine. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the contents of ending presentation 3 and ending presentation 4, respectively, in the above slot machine. In the above slot machine, (A) is a diagram showing the contents of the lottery for ending performance 1, (B) is a lottery for ending performance 2, (C) is a lottery for ending performance 3, and (D) is a diagram showing the contents of the lottery for ending performance 4. A diagram showing the content of the game restart presentation in the above-mentioned slot machine. A diagram showing the content of the pseudo light guide plate presentation in the above-mentioned slot machine. A diagram showing the content of the pseudo light guide plate presentation in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a setting change process, a game progress control process, and a game start waiting process in the slot machine. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of an internal lottery process in the slot machine, and FIG. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of a group number setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of section type number management lever processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a further flow of the section type number management lever process. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flowchart showing the advantageous zone transition process, and (B) is a flowchart showing the chance game number lottery process. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of processing when an AT wins in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of the seven number correction process, the flow of the correction counter process, and the flow of the arrival flag process in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing when entering the AT in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of the loop CU rank set process, the seven loop lottery process, and the gold seven loop lottery correction process in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a bell number counter correction process in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a lever wait process in the slot machine. 13 is a flow chart showing the flow of the lever processing for the main game state number 1, the flow of the chance mode number determination processing, and the flow of the lever processing for the main game state numbers 2 and 5 in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing after AT winning in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 3 lever processing in the above slot machine, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing. In the above slot machine, (A) is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 4 lever processing, and (B) is a flow chart showing the flow of the AT period preferential game number lottery processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a standby effect process in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of section type number management game ending processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of an accumulation counter process in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main game state number 0 complete stop processing in the slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of the end processing after entering the AT in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the above-mentioned AT entry end processing. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 1 full stop processing, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main game state number 3 full stop processing in the above slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop processing. 13 is a flowchart showing another continuation of the main game state number 3 full stop processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of main game state number 4 full stop processing in the slot machine. 13A is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 6 full stop processing, and FIG. 13B is a flow chart showing the flow of the main game state number 7 full stop processing in the above slot machine. This is a flowchart showing the flow of the advantageous zone clear counter management process in the above-mentioned slot machine. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of a timer interrupt process in the slot machine. FIG. 11 is a front view of the stop switch unit according to the second embodiment. 13 is a diagram showing the lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp of the stop switch unit in normal state 1. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in a normal state 2. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing the lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in abnormal state 1. A diagram showing the lighting pattern of the stop switch lamp in abnormal state 2. 13 shows an AT notification display according to a third embodiment, in which (A) is a front view of the AT notification display, (B) is a diagram showing the arrangement of segment LEDs in a seven-segment display, and (C) is a diagram showing the lighting state of the seven-segment display. A figure showing an example of the operation of the AT notification display according to the progress of the game. A figure showing an example of the display content of the AT notification display device according to the progress of the game. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the display content according to the timing of power-off and power-recovery of the AT notification display device. FIG. A transition diagram of the game state in the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, (A) is a figure showing the charge suggestion mode lottery, and (B) is a figure showing the contents of the AT lottery. In the fourth embodiment, (A) is a figure showing the contents of the charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 1), (B) is a figure showing the contents of the charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 2), and (C) is a figure showing the contents of the charge suggestion occurrence lottery (when charge suggestion mode = 3). A figure showing an example of transition from an AT gaming state to an ending gaming state in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a game progress control process in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of lever processing for each game state in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing a flow of an AT sheet number counter update process in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state 5 lever processing in the fourth embodiment. A flowchart showing the flow of the favorable zone flag management complete stop processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of main game state 5 full stop processing in the fourth embodiment. 13 is a flowchart showing the flow of a limit determination process in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a first conversation production display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a second conversation production display in the fifth embodiment. 13A is a diagram showing another aspect of the range image in the dialogue display of the conversation production display in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an aspect in which the dialogue display of the conversation production display is displayed in an overlapping manner. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing another mode in which a dialogue display is superimposed on a conversation production display in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a mode in which an error notification display is superimposed on a conversation production display. In the fifth embodiment, (A) is a diagram showing a mode in which a conversation performance display is displayed while a press navigation performance display is being displayed, and (B) is a diagram showing another mode in which a conversation performance display is displayed while a press navigation performance display is being displayed. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a first subtitle effect display in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a second subtitle effect display. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing another aspect of the first subtitle effect display in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing another aspect of the second subtitle effect display. FIG. 13A shows an aspect of the fifth embodiment in which a background frame is added to the characters of the second subtitle effect display, and FIG. 13B shows an aspect in which an error notification display is displayed together with the second subtitle effect display. 13A shows a state in which a subtitle effect display is displayed while a press navigation effect display is being displayed in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B shows a state in which the characters in the subtitle effect display are displayed as garbled characters. A figure showing the expectation degree presentation display in the fifth embodiment. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing the display transitions when executing a GET performance in the fifth embodiment, in the order of (A) to (F). A timing chart showing the relationship between the timing of the third stop operation, the push navigation effect display, the awarding of game value, the GET effect sound, the GET effect display, and the subtitle effect display when executing the GET effect in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing a first scene change presentation in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a second scene change presentation. FIG. 13A is a diagram showing the display state of the image display unit just before a blackout effect is executed in the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the display state of the image display unit when a blackout effect is executed. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a blackout effect in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a TOTAL display in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a TOTAL display in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a TOTAL display in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a TOTAL display in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a TOTAL display in the fifth embodiment. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a TOTAL display in the fifth embodiment.

A slot machine (reel type gaming machine), which is a typical gaming machine, generally has a main control board (also called "main control means") that controls the progress of the game using reels (also called "reel") (for example, control of reel drive, control of determining roles (also called "role drawing"), control of inserting and paying out gaming media such as gaming medals, control of transition between multiple gaming states with different probability of determining roles, etc.), and a sub-control board (also called "sub-control means") that controls the execution of various effects (image effects using an image display device (also called "liquid crystal display device") and sound effects using a speaker device, etc.) aimed at increasing the interest of the game depending on the game situation, and information transmission (sending) between the two boards can only be done in one direction, from the main control board to the sub-control board.

In slot machines, a winning line is generally set by inserting a specified number of gaming media, and the player operates the reel rotation start lever (also called the "start lever" or "start switch") to perform a role determination process (also called the "role selection process" or "internal lottery") to determine a gaming role (also called simply a "role") or a miss, after which the multiple reels start to rotate. Once the multiple reels have started to rotate and reached a specified rotation speed, a reel rotation stop operation, such as pressing a stop switch, is enabled, and the player can perform the reel rotation stop operation for each reel individually, causing each reel to stop rotating in sequence.

Normally, the stopping of the reels is controlled based on the timing of the reel stop operation by the player and the determined winning combination. That is, each reel is controlled so that it can be stopped at any timing within a predetermined time (usually the time it takes for a maximum of five symbols to move) from the timing of the reel stop operation, so that the winning combination (also called "permissible winning combination") determined (also called "selected" or "winning") by the winning combination determination process is achieved as much as possible (the combination of symbols (also called "corresponding symbols") that make up the permissible winning combination is displayed as stopped on the winning line), and winning combinations that have not been determined by the winning combination determination process are not achieved (the corresponding symbols that make up roles other than the permissible winning combination are not displayed as stopped on the winning line). The symbol combination that is displayed as stopped is also called the "outcome".

In addition to the normal roles generally called replay roles and small roles, there are also special roles also called bonus roles. A replay role is a role that does not award (earn) game media (game value) even if it is established, but allows for replay (the player can play the next game without inserting new game media), and is also called a "replay role." A small role is a role that allows for the acquisition of a specified number of game media when established, and is also called a "winning role." A bonus role (special role) is a role that, when established, enables a special game state (also called a "special role," "special game," or "bonus game") to be activated (settable). A special game state is, for example, a game state in which the probability of determining a specific minor role (which may simply be called the "determination probability", or alternatively, the "role lottery probability" (which may simply be called the "lottery probability"), the "role selection probability" (which may simply be called the "selection probability"), or the "role winning probability" (which may simply be called the "winning probability")) is higher than normal.

In most cases, only a small number of the symbols that make up the special combination are arranged on each reel. For this reason, even if a special role is determined, it is difficult to achieve the special role unless the player can distinguish the symbols displayed while stopping the reels at the right timing to stop the corresponding symbols (such an operation is also called "eye-pressing"). However, if a special role is determined but cannot be achieved, the information indicating that the special role has been determined is carried over to the next game (also called "carrying over the winning of a special role" or "carrying over the winning of a special role"), so that even players who are not good at eye-pressing are guaranteed the opportunity to achieve the determined special role (there are some special roles that cannot be carried over).

In addition, conventional slot machines generally have multiple RT states (game states) with different probability of determining the replay role, and transition to another RT state occurs when a certain condition is met (for example, winning a special role based on the role determination process, displaying a symbol corresponding to the special role, ending a game related to the special role, or displaying a certain symbol combination). Such transitions between RT states are controlled by the main control board because they involve fluctuations in the probability of determining the role (replay role). The period during which the RT state in which the probability of determining the replay role is set to the highest is sometimes referred to as replay time.

On the other hand, a game period called AT (assist time) is set to notify the player of information that allows the player to play advantageously, and a predetermined notification effect (assist effect) is performed within this game period. Such an AT may be set during a period (replay time) in which the replay role is controlled to an RT state in which the probability of determining a role is set to the highest, and the AT during such a replay time is generally called ART (assist replay time). In reality, even if the replay role is not controlled to an RT state in which the probability of determining a role is set to the highest, a state in which it is determined to be controlled to such an RT state may be called ART (assist replay time). Known examples of assist effects that are performed during an AT include notifying the player when a minor role that makes it possible to acquire gaming media has been determined, and notifying the operation mode of the stop switch (such as the operation sequence (also called the "push sequence") indicating the order in which multiple stop switches should be operated, and the operation position (also called the "push position") indicating the rotational position at which the stop switch should be operated on the reel) required to realize the determined minor role (to stop and display the corresponding symbol on the pay line). Note that a game role (role determination result) in which different symbol combinations are displayed depending on the push sequence is also referred to as a "push sequence role". Also, a game in which an assist effect is performed during an AT is also referred to as an "assist game".

There are slot machines (also called "sub AT machines") that use the sub-control means to perform the above-mentioned AT-related control processing (also called "AT-related control processing"). However, there have been problems such as the AT being forcibly set by cheating on the sub-control means, so recently, there are many slot machines (also called "main AT machines") that perform part of the AT-related control processing using the main control means, which is more difficult to cheat than the sub-control means. For example, there are known main AT machines in which the main control means exclusively performs processing related to the setting of the AT and processing to determine the push order to be notified during the AT, and the sub-control means mainly performs processing to execute the notification (assist performance) of the push order determined by the main control means during the AT set by the main control means. In such main AT machines, various information related to the AT is managed by the main control means, and this information is appropriately transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means.

In general, slot machines allow game establishments to change the setting value for setting the probability of determining the winning combination result (which may be called the "winning combination lottery result" (or simply the "lottery result"), the "winning combination result" (or simply the "selection result"), or the "winning combination result" (or simply the "winning result") within a range of multiple stages. The difference in the winning combination probability (also called the "setting difference") affects the payout rate of the slot machine, so the setting value is of great interest to game establishments as an index for managing the payout rate, and to players as an index for acquiring more gaming media. Among the winning combination results (winning combinations), there are those for which the winning combination probability does not change regardless of the setting value (also called the "winning combination result without a setting difference"), and those for which the winning combination probability changes depending on the setting difference (also called the "winning combination result with a setting difference").

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the above drawings.
In the following explanation, "role determination process" refers to a selection action such as a lottery (also called "role determination") carried out using electronic devices, etc., in order to randomly select one or more role determination result numbers (winning items) from a number of pre-set role determination result numbers (consisting of one or more game roles or losses (except when losses are not set)). Here, the role determination result number specifies one or more game roles (also called "permitted roles" or "winning roles") or losses that are permitted to be established in the game in which the role determination result number is determined (selected). Note that role determination is also called "internal lottery" or "role lottery", and the "selection" in lottery or winning is also called "chosen" or "sen".

In addition, when describing "a game role is established" or "a game role is established", "establishment" is used as a concept indicating that the symbol combination (corresponding symbols) constituting the game role (whether it is a game role with a payout of game medals (small role) or a game role without a payout (replay role or special role)) corresponding to the determined role determination result number is displayed in a predetermined stopping mode (for example, a mode in which they are lined up on an effective line, which will be described later). However, the timing of establishment can be any appropriate timing, such as the time when a reel stop operation is performed at a timing when the corresponding symbols of the game role can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, the time when the corresponding symbols of the game role are stopped and displayed on the effective line, the time when the slot machine identifies that the corresponding symbols of the game role are stopped and displayed on the effective line, or the time when the identification result is stored in a memory area.

In the following description, the player's operation of inserting (maintaining) game medals into the medal insertion slot 21 (described later) and the operation of pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to use the specified number of credited (stored) game medals for playing a game are collectively referred to as betting operations. This betting operation, the player's operation of pressing the settlement switch 24 (described later), the operation of tilting the start lever (also called the "start switch") 25 (more specifically, the operation of tilting the shaft by moving the grip attached to the tip of the shaft), and the operation of pressing the stop switches (also called the "stop button") 26a, 26b, and 26c are collectively referred to as game operations. In general, the term "insertion" in slot machines can mean either "putting game medals into the slot machine" or "using game medals for playing a game." In the following explanation, we will generally use the word "input" to mean the former and the word "bet" to mean the latter.

The "number of medals paid out" (also called "number of medals paid out") refers to the number of medals awarded to a player in one game. The act of paying out medals includes the act of actually paying out medals from the slot machine to the outside (also called "actual payout") and the act of increasing the numerical value electromagnetically stored as medals stored in the slot machine (also called "stored additional payout").

The "number of medals acquired" (also referred to as "number of medals acquired") refers to a numerical value calculated as the total number of medals acquired by a player during a specified period (which can be set arbitrarily, for example, during the AT period or bonus period). The "difference in number of medals acquired" (also referred to as "difference number") refers to the value (which may be a negative value) obtained by subtracting the total number of medals bet from the total number of medals paid out during a specified period. The "number of medals acquired" and the "difference in number of medals acquired" can be used as different concepts, but below they will be treated as synonymous.

"Freeze" refers to a delay in the execution of a specific control process related to the progress of the game for a certain period of time. There are two types of freeze: a freeze that is set when the operation of the start lever 25 is accepted (also called a "reel spin start freeze"), and a freeze that is set after all reels have stopped spinning (also called a "reel spin stop freeze"). During the freeze period, the game is in a state where game operations by the player cannot be effectively accepted. During the freeze period, a reel effect (also called a "reel effect") may be performed. A reel effect is an effect in which reels 3a, 3b, and 3c (described below) are rotated and any symbol combination is stopped and displayed, regardless of the game operations by the player.

In the following explanation, "push navigation" refers to a process (action) that notifies the push order and push position to assist in the establishment of the game role selected by role determination. Among push navigations, those that specifically assist in the establishment of a replay role are called "RP navigation" (RP is an abbreviation of replay), those that assist in the establishment of a winning role (minor role) are called "prize navigation", and those that assist in the display of a specific symbol are called "eye push navigation" (mainly performed on the sub-control means side). In addition, when it is necessary to distinguish between push navigation performed on the main control means side and push navigation performed on the sub-control means side, the former is also called "main side push navigation" ("main side RP navigation", "main side winning navigation", "main side eye push navigation"), and the latter is also called "sub side push navigation" ("sub side RP navigation", "sub side winning navigation", "sub side eye push navigation") or "push navigation effect" ("RP navigation effect", "winning navigation effect", "eye push navigation effect").

In the following explanations and drawings, values may be expressed not only in decimal but also in binary or hexadecimal notation. To distinguish between these, when expressed in binary, a "B" is added to the end of the value, and when expressed in hexadecimal, an "H" is added to the end of the value. When expressed in decimal, no special notation is added to the end of the value.

[First embodiment]
FIG. 1 shows a slot machine (referred to as "slot machine 1") as a first embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention, and the basic configuration of this slot machine 1 will be described below with reference to FIGS. 1 to 20.
<Appearance of the slot machine>
As shown in Fig. 1A, the slot machine 1 has a front door 2 attached to the front of the main body cabinet by a hinge so as to be able to open and close, and this hinge is attached to the left side of the front door 2 in Fig. 1A so that the right side of the front door 2 in the figure opens and closes. On the front side of the front door 2, an upper panel assembly 10, a middle panel assembly 20, a lower panel assembly 30 and a tray assembly 40 are attached in this order from the top.

In the center of the upper panel assembly 10, the display screen 11a of the image display device (also called a "liquid crystal display device") 11 (see Figure 2) is arranged on the back side of the upper panel assembly 10 so that it faces forward, and around it are arranged a first performance lamp 12, a second performance lamp 13a, 13b, and a third performance lamp 14a, 14b. These performance lamps use light sources composed of three types of LEDs that emit light in red, green, and blue, for example, so that the emitted light color can be changed to a desired color. In addition, a pair of upper speakers 15a, 15b are arranged on the left and right below the display screen 11a.

At the center of the middle panel assembly 20, a central panel is provided with a display window W through which the surfaces of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c arranged side by side inside the main body housing are viewed. Below this display window W, there are a medal insertion slot 21 for inserting game medals (game media), a 1-BET switch 22 for betting one game medal within the credited range, a MAX-BET switch 23 for betting the maximum bet allowable number of game medals (for example, three medals) at once, and a clearing switch 24 for paying out the bet and/or credited game medals. The machine is provided with a calculation switch 24, a start lever 25 that is operated to start the rotation of all reels 3a, 3b, 3c (the reels are also called "drums"), three stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c for individually stopping the rotation of each reel 3a, 3b, 3c (the stop switch 26a on the left side of the figure corresponds to reel 3a, the stop switch 26b in the center corresponds to reel 3b, and the stop switch 26c on the right side corresponds to reel 3c), and a reject switch 27 for returning game medals that have been inserted through the medal insertion slot 21 and are stuck there.

Furthermore, between the medal insertion slot 21 and the MAX-BET switch 23, there are provided a selection button (also called a "direction button" or "cross key") 54 and a decision button (also called a "menu button" or "PUSH button") 55 for the player to input information to the slot machine 1. As shown in FIG. 1(B), the selection buttons 54 are composed of four buttons, an up button 54U, a down button 54D, a left button 54L, and a right button 54R, which specify the up, down, left, and right directions. Either the up, down, left, or right direction is specified according to the button operated by the player. The decision button 55 is formed of a light-transmitting material, and has a light source such as an LED provided inside. When the operation of the decision button 55 is disabled, the light source inside the switch is turned off, and when it is enabled, it flashes (or may be lit).

Here, the up button 54U, down button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R constituting the selection button 54 may be able to be turned on/off individually, or a cross-shaped key top (cross key) may be provided so that the button in the direction in which the cross key is tilted is turned on. When the up button 54U, down button 54D, left button 54L, and right button 54R can be turned on/off using the cross key, two adjacent buttons (up and right, right and down, down and left, left and up) can be turned on at the same time, but opposing buttons (up and down, right and left) may not be able to be turned on at the same time.

The inside of the medal insertion port 21 branches into an acceptance passage (leading to the hopper 50 described later) through which the inserted medal passes if it is validly accepted, and a return passage (leading to the medal payout outlet 41 described later) through which the inserted medal passes if it is not accepted, and a blocker is provided at the branching point. This blocker is configured to be movable between a position where the medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 is guided to the acceptance passage (medal acceptance position) and a position where the medal is guided to the return passage (medal non-acceptance position). The blocker moves due to the elastic force of the spring and the magnetic force of the solenoid 48 (see FIG. 2). Specifically, during the period when the medal can be accepted (medal acceptance period), a current of a predetermined value or more flows through the solenoid 48, generating a predetermined magnetic force, and moving the blocker to the medal acceptance position. This allows the game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 to be guided to the receiving passage (a state in which game media can be received).

On the other hand, during the period when game medals cannot be accepted (medal acceptance unavailable period), no current above a predetermined value flows through the solenoid 48, so no magnetic force is generated, and the elastic force of the spring moves the blocker to the medal acceptance unavailable position. This results in a state in which game medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 are guided to the return passage (game medium acceptance unavailable state). Hereinafter, the state in which a current above a predetermined value flows through the solenoid 48 and a magnetic force of a predetermined value is generated is referred to as the ON state. Also, the state in which a current above a predetermined value does not flow through the solenoid 48, and as a result, a magnetic force of a predetermined value is not generated is referred to as the OFF state.

In addition, inside the medal insertion port 21, three insertion medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c (see FIG. 2) are provided for detecting game medals. The insertion medal sensor 28a detects that a game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion port 21, and is installed upstream of the blocker on the path along which the inserted game medal flows. The insertion medal sensor 28b detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 has been guided to the receiving path and effectively received, and is located downstream (closer to the hopper 50 described below) of the blocker. The insertion medal sensor 28c detects that a game medal inserted into the medal insertion port 21 has passed through the branching point between the receiving path and the return path, and is located near the branching point (slightly closer to the insertion medal sensor 28b than the blocker).

When both the inserted medal sensor 28a and the inserted medal sensor 28b detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion port 21 and that the inserted game medal has been validly accepted. On the other hand, when the inserted medal sensor 28a detects a game medal but the inserted medal sensor 28b does not detect a game medal, it means that the game medal has been inserted into the medal insertion port 21, but the inserted game medal has not been validly accepted and has been returned. In addition, when the three inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, and 28c detect the passage of game medals in an order different from the specified order (the order of 28a, 28c, and 28b) or when some of the inserted medal sensors do not detect the passage of game medals, it means that an abnormal passage such as a reverse flow of game medals has occurred.

The display window W is configured so that when all three reels 3a to 3c are stopped, three symbols per reel, totaling nine symbols, are displayed so as to be visible to the player. A winning line 29 horizontally connecting the symbol display areas in the middle of each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c is a winning line that is activated when a specified number of game medals are bet, and is configured so that the presence or absence of a game winning combination can be determined by the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the activated winning line. The activated winning line is also called an "effective line." In addition, symbol display areas DA1 and DA2 (areas surrounded by two-dot chain lines in the figure) are provided to the left of and above the display window W in the middle panel assembly 20. These symbol display areas DA1 and DA2 are areas for displaying symbols related to symbol combinations that are important in playing a game, and will be described in detail later.

The slot machine 1 is also provided with various display lamps, such as LED lamps. In this embodiment, the display lamps include a MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, a BET number display lamp 46b, a slot possible display lamp 46c, a game start display lamp 46d, a replay display lamp 46e, a status display lamp 46f, a count display lamp 46g, a stored number display lamp 46h, and a payout number display lamp 46j. These display lamps are configured to be controlled by the main control board 60 (main control means 100), which will be described later.

The MAX-BET switch indicator lamp 46a is turned on when it is possible to bet gaming medals, and is disposed inside the MAX-BET switch 23. When turned on, it lights up the MAX-BET switch 23 partially or entirely. The other indicator lamps are disposed to the side or below the indicator window W in the middle panel assembly 20.

The BET number display lamp 46b (hereinafter also referred to as "BET lamp 46b") displays the number of game medals bet, and is composed of a 1-BET display lamp 46bC that is lit when one or more game medals are bet, a 2-BET display lamp 46bB that is lit when two or more game medals are bet, and a MAX-BET display lamp 46bA that is lit when three game medals are bet. The insertion possible display lamp 46c is lit when game medals can be inserted, and the game start display lamp 46d is lit when a game can be started by operating the start lever 25. The replay display lamp 46e is lit when a replay role described below is established in any game and game medals are automatically bet by the automatic bet process described below.

The status indicator lamp 46f is turned on when the accumulated (credited) game medals are to be liquidated, and the number of times indicator lamp 46g indicates the number of times that push navigation can be executed (which is decremented by one each time push navigation is executed, and may also be increased by a lottery, etc.) when, for example, AT is set. The number of accumulated medals indicator lamp 46h (hereinafter also referred to as "CRE lamp 46h") indicates the number of accumulated game medals by incrementing one at a time, and the number of payouts indicator lamp 46j indicates the number of game medals to be paid out when a minor winning combination, which will be described later, is achieved by incrementing one at a time. The number of accumulated medals indicator lamp 46h and the number of payouts indicator lamp 46j each consist of two 7-segment displays (consisting of 7 segment lamps for displaying numbers and one segment lamp for displaying a decimal point (dot)) to display the upper and lower digits of the numbers.

In addition, the payout number display lamp 46j is also configured to display letters (alphabet) or numbers (hereinafter also referred to as "error code") indicating the type of error when some abnormality (error) occurs in the slot machine 1. Errors set in this embodiment include HP error, HE error, H0 error, CE error, CP error, CH error, C0 error, C1 error, FE error, E1 error, E5 error, E6 error, E7 error, etc. The HP error is an error when it is determined that game medals are stuck at the medal payout outlet of the hopper 50 described later, the HE error is an error (hopper empty error) when it is determined that the game medals in the hopper 50 are empty, and the H0 error is an error when it is determined that the game medals have abnormally passed through the payout sensor. The CE error is an error (game medal retention error) when the inserted medal sensor judges that a game medal has been retained, the CP error is an error when it is judged that an inserted game medal has passed illegally, the C0 error is an error when it is judged that an abnormal input has been made to the inserted medal sensor, and the C1 error is an error when it is judged that an abnormality has occurred in the passage of the inserted medal sensor. The FE error is an error (full error) when it is judged that the auxiliary storage 85 described later is full, the E1 error is an error (RAM error) when the contents of the memory device (RAM) are not normal when the power is turned on, and the E5 error is an error (reel stop error) when the combination of patterns when all the reels stop is abnormal (the corresponding patterns constituting roles other than the role that can be established are stopped and displayed). The E6 error is an error (setting value error) when the value of the setting value (setting value) described later for determining the role determination probability is out of range, and the E7 error is an error (built-in random number error) when an abnormality is detected in the update state of the built-in random number used in each lottery, etc. The errors E1, E5, E6, and E7 (collectively referred to as "E-system errors") can be cleared by changing the settings as described below, and the other errors can be cleared by operating the reset switch 82 as described below.

Furthermore, this payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a navigation number, which indicates the operation sequence (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c, as described below. The payout number display lamp 46j when displaying the navigation number is also called the "main push order display". In addition, this payout number display lamp 46j also has a function of displaying a setting value, which will be described later, when checking the setting and when changing the setting, which will be described later. The payout number display lamp 46j when displaying the setting value is also called the "setting value display". In addition to the payout number display lamp 46j, a dedicated setting value display (7-segment display) for the sole purpose of displaying the setting value may be provided in the housing of the slot machine 1. The mounting position of this setting value display may be, for example, on the main control board 60, and a position where the display of the setting value display can be seen from the outside when the main control board 60 is mounted in a predetermined position in the housing of the slot machine 1.

A transparent lower panel cover 31 is attached to the center of the lower panel assembly 30, and decorative lamps 32a, 32b are arranged on both the left and right ends. A translucent lower panel base with a specified design and a lower panel illumination lamp (neither shown) are attached to the back side of the lower panel cover 31, and the design on the lower panel base is illuminated from behind when the lower panel illumination lamp is turned on.

The tray assembly 40 has a medal payout outlet 41 for paying out medals, and a medal storage tray 42 for storing medals facing the medal payout outlet 41. An ashtray 43 is provided to the left of the medal storage tray 42. In addition, on the left and right of the medal payout outlet 41, speaker ports 45a, 45b consisting of a number of small holes are formed facing the front of a pair of lower speakers 44a, 44b (see Figure 2) located on the back side of the tray assembly 40.

In addition, a hopper 50 (see FIG. 2) is provided inside the main body cabinet for dispensing game medals that are acquired when a predetermined winning mode is achieved as a result of playing, and this hopper 50 is provided with a medal detection unit 51 (see FIG. 2) for detecting game medals. This hopper 50 also has the function of physically storing game medals that have been inserted and validly accepted. Furthermore, an auxiliary storage 85 (see FIG. 2) is provided near the hopper 50 for storing game medals that have overflowed from the hopper 50, and a fullness detection unit 86 (see FIG. 2) is provided for detecting whether this auxiliary storage 85 is full (a state in which game medals may overflow from the auxiliary storage 85).

<Reel>
Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is configured to rotate by driving a stepping motor 35a, 35b, 35c (see FIG. 2). Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is made of a translucent material, and a translucent reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (see FIG. 9) are displayed is attached to the outer periphery of each of the reels. Each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is provided with back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c (see FIG. 2) on the inner side thereof. By turning on the back lamps 38a, 38b, 38c, the area of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c facing the display window W is entirely illuminated from the inner side, or only a part of each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c is illuminated so as to highlight a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a symbol corresponding to a game role arranged on the pay line 29 or a position other than the pay line 29) displayed in a stopped state on each of the reels 3a, 3b, 3c.

<Start lever>
The position where the start lever 25 is turned on will be described with reference to Figures 3(a) and (b). Here, the start lever 25 shown in Figures 3(a) and (b) is shown with the components other than the grip 25g and shaft 25s omitted in order to make the movement of the lever easier to see. Figure 3(a) shows a state where the start lever 25 is not operated, (a) shows a side view, (b) shows a front view, and (c) shows a top view. Note that the (a) side view and (b) front view show the start lever 25 alone, but the (c) top view shows the central part of the middle panel assembly 20 (more specifically, the mounting surface of the start lever 25).

When the start lever 25 is not operated, it is stationary in the initial position, and when the slot machine 1 is viewed from the side, the central axis Lx of the cylindrical shaft 25s is parallel to the horizontal direction as shown in FIG. 3(a)(A). When the slot machine 1 is viewed from above, the central axis Lx of the shaft 36s is perpendicular to the mounting surface of the start lever 25 on the middle panel assembly 20 as shown in FIG. 3(a)(C).

The start lever 25 can be tilted in the up, down, left and right directions (see FIG. 3(a)(b)) from the initial position. Here, the tilt axis of the shaft 25s when the lever is tilted in the vertical direction upward (also called "straight up") or downward (also called "straight down") is shown as O _UD in FIG. 3(a)(a). Here, the shaft 25s does not necessarily need to be supported on the up and down tilt axis O _UD , and may be held by a washer, a receiving member and a spring in the main case so that the shaft of the lever can be tilted in all directions (up, down, left and right 360°) without relying on a tilt axis, as in the start lever disclosed in JP-A-2005-21434. Note that the start lever disclosed in JP-A-2005-21434 is not only tiltable in all directions, but also has a shaft held so that it can be turned on when pulled toward the player or pushed toward the gaming machine.

Next, with reference to FIG. 3B, a position where the start lever 25 changes from OFF to ON by being tilted from the initial position (hereinafter also referred to as the "ON position") will be described. The position where the start lever 25 changes from OFF to ON is also the lever position where the main control means 100 determines that the start lever 25 has been operated. Here, when the tilt of the lever is detected by a sensor such as a photointerrupter having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, depending on the method of detecting the tilt of the lever, the light emitted from the light emitting unit may be reflected by the rear end surface of the shaft of the lever, and the state where the light receiving unit can detect the reflected light may be set as the OFF state of the start lever 25, and the state where the light receiving unit cannot detect the reflected light may be set as the ON state of the start lever 25. In addition, by adopting a known configuration different from this, the state where the light receiving unit cannot detect the light from the light emitting unit may be set as the OFF state of the start lever 25, and the state where the light receiving unit can detect the light from the light emitting unit may be set as the ON state of the start lever 25.

Hereinafter, a point on the surface of the grip 25g located on the extension of the central axis Lx of the shaft 25s is referred to as a reference point P, and this reference point P is the tip of the lever. In particular, the reference point P when the lever is in the initial position is referred to as a reference point P _N. Also, as shown in FIG. 3B, the reference point when the lever is tilted from the initial position in a vertically upward direction to reach the ON position is referred to as P _U , and the reference point when the lever is tilted from the initial position in a vertically downward direction to reach the ON position is referred to as P _D. In this embodiment, the ON position is reached before the limit position (shown by the broken line in FIG. 3B) at which the lever can be tilted in the vertically upward direction is reached. In other words, if the reference point at the limit position in the vertically upward direction is referred to as P _UL , the angle of ∠P _{NO UD} P _UL is larger than the angle of ∠P _{NO UD} P _UL . However, the ON position and the limit position in the vertically upward direction may be made to coincide with each other.

Although not shown in FIG. 3(b), the lever may also be turned to the on position before it reaches the limit position to which it can be tilted in the downward direction, or the on position and the limit position in the downward direction may be made to coincide.

In this embodiment, if the length of the path (arc P _N P _U ) traced by the tip of the lever (reference point P) when the lever is tilted from the initial position to the ON position directly above is L _U , and the length of the path (arc P _N P _D ) traced by the tip of the lever (reference point P) when the lever is tilted from the initial position to the ON position directly below is L _D , the length L _U is longer than the length L _D. In other words, the angle of ∠P _{NO UD PU} is larger than the angle of ∠P _{NO UD PD} .

Generally, when starting a game, most players operate the start lever 25 downward. Therefore, as described above, by reducing the amount of operation (operation range) until the start lever 25 is turned on, the burden on the player can be reduced. On the other hand, by increasing the amount of operation in the upward direction, for example, when a player picks up a dropped medal and then lifts his/her head, the distance until the lever reaches the on position is longer than when the lever is moved downward, so that the possibility of the start lever 25 being turned on unintentionally can be reduced. Furthermore, when the start lever 25 is operated from directly below to directly above, a greater force is required to tilt the lever to the on position than when it is operated from directly above to directly below due to the influence of gravity on the grip 25g, and the distance until the lever reaches the on position is also longer. Therefore, when the lever is operated from directly below to directly above, the start lever 25 is less likely to be turned on against the player's intention.

<Basic operations for playing games>
To play the slot machine 1, first, a player inserts a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21 to place a bet, or operates either the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 to bet a specified number of game medals within the credit range, thereby activating the winning line 29. In this embodiment, the specified number of game medals required to activate the winning line 29 is set to three medals in each of the RT states of non-RT, RT1, RT2, and RT3 described later. However, the specified number is not limited to this, and can be changed as appropriate, such as by setting the specified number to a different value depending on the RT state. In addition, a plurality of winning lines may be provided, and the number of activated winning lines may be changed depending on the number of game medals bet.

Next, when the player operates the start lever 25, the number of bets is determined (the bet game medals are used for playing), and the role determination process described later is performed. After that, the minimum play time (the minimum time that must be secured from when all reels start to spin in one game until when all reels start to spin in the next game (for example, 4.1
After it is confirmed that the time period (seconds) has elapsed, each of the reels 3a to 3c starts to rotate, and the various types of symbols displayed on the outer peripheral surfaces of the reels 3a to 3c are displayed moving up and down (usually from top to bottom) within the display window W. Then, when the rotation of the reels 3a to 3c reaches a predetermined speed and starts rotating at a constant speed, each of the stop switches 26a to 26c is enabled (the operation of the stop switches is enabled to be accepted), and when the player operates the stop switch 26a, the rotation of the reel 3a stops, when the player operates the stop switch 26b, the rotation of the reel 3b stops, and when the player operates the stop switch 26c, the rotation of the reel 3c stops.

If it is determined that the symbol combination displayed on the pay line 29 is a predetermined winning combination (a symbol corresponding to a game role that can win a game medal), the number of game medals corresponding to each winning combination is paid out by the hopper 50 or added as credits.

<Connection between the control board and each device>
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the slot machine 1 is provided with three control boards, a main control board 60, a sub-main control board 70A, and a sub-sub control board 70B, as main control boards for controlling the slot machine 1 (the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B are collectively referred to as the sub-control board 70). The main control related to the progress of the game (including the drive control of the reels 3a to 3c and the role determination process, etc.) is performed by a control circuit arranged on the main control board 60, and the lighting control by the lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c is performed by a control circuit arranged on the sub-main control board 70A. In addition, the control of the performance image display by the image display device 11 and the control of the sound generation from the speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b are mainly performed by a control circuit arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B. Furthermore, information transmission between the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 can only be performed in one direction, from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A, and information transmission between the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B can be performed in both directions.

The main control board 60 is provided with a main CPU 61 which performs various calculation processes related to the game, a ROM 62 which is a read-only memory device that stores control programs etc., and a RAM 63 ("RAM" is also referred to as "RWM") which is a memory device to which information can be written and read. The progress of the game in the slot machine 1 is controlled by the operation of each drive circuit etc. according to the control program stored in the ROM 62. The ROM 62 and RAM 63 are non-volatile memory devices which are configured to retain the stored information even when power is not supplied.

The main CPU 61 is connected to a clock pulse generator 64 for generating a clock pulse (clock signal), a frequency divider 65 for dividing the clock pulse generated by the clock pulse generator 64, a random number generator 66 for generating random numbers used for determining a role based on the clock pulse (or the divided clock pulse), and a random number capture circuit 67 for capturing the random numbers generated by the random number generator 66. The clock pulse generator 64 is composed of two oscillators (not shown), and each oscillator outputs a clock signal that is asynchronous with each other. Hereinafter, a clock signal of a predetermined frequency output from one oscillator is referred to as an internal clock, and a clock signal of a predetermined frequency (a frequency different from the internal clock but may be the same) output from the other oscillator is referred to as an external clock. For example, the internal clock is used as an operating clock of the main CPU 61 or an update clock of a random number used for a predetermined lottery other than determining a role, and the external clock is used as an update clock of a random number used for determining a role. The main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, random number capture circuit 67, interface circuit 68, etc. may be mounted on a single IC chip to configure a one-chip microcomputer. The main CPU 61 is configured to transmit signals to the motor drive circuit 36a, the display lamp control circuit 47, the hopper drive circuit 52, and the sub-control board 70 via the interface circuit 68, and to receive signals from the reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, 37c, the payout detection signal circuit 53, and the storage state signal circuit 87.

The motor drive circuit 36a is a circuit for driving the stepping motors 35a, 35b, and 35c that rotate the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively, and the display lamp control circuit 47 is a circuit for turning on and off the various display lamps described above. The reel position detection circuits 37a, 37b, and 37c are circuits that transmit detection signals from reel sensors (not shown) installed on each of the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c to the main control board 60 (the detection circuit 37a corresponds to the reel 3a, the detection circuit 37b corresponds to the reel 3b, and the detection circuit 37c corresponds to the reel 3c). The hopper drive circuit 52 is a circuit that drives the hopper 50 to pay out game medals when a small winning combination is achieved, and the payout detection signal circuit 53 is a circuit that transmits a payout detection signal to the main control board 60 when the medal detection unit 51 detects that game medals have been paid out from the hopper 50. The storage status signal circuit 87 is a circuit that transmits a storage status signal indicating whether the auxiliary storage 85 is full or not to the main control board 60 according to the detection result of the fullness detection unit 86.

The slot machine 1 is also supplied with power from a power supply device 80 via a main control board 60. A power switch 81, a reset switch 82, and a setting key switch 83 are connected to this power supply device 80, and signals from each of these switches are configured to be sent to the main CPU 61 via an interface circuit 68. Furthermore, the main CPU 61 is configured to receive a signal from a setting change switch 84 via the interface circuit 68.

The power switch 81 is a switch that accepts the operation of turning on and off the power to the slot machine 1 from the power supply device 80, and the reset switch 82 is a switch that is operated by a game store employee or the like when a certain error (an error other than the above-mentioned E-type error) occurs in the slot machine 1 and the cause of the error is removed and the error is resolved. By operating this reset switch 82, the information on the error occurrence stored in the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 is cleared, and the main control board 60 and the sub-control board 70 execute the process at the time of error resolution accordingly. In addition, the setting key switch 83 is a switch that is operated when checking and changing the setting value that determines the degree (rank) of the winning probability, and the setting change switch 84 is provided, for example, on the back side of the front door 2 (inside the cabinet) and is a switch for changing the setting value in multiple stages (six stages in this embodiment).

When the front door 2 is open (also called the "door open state") and power is being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is ON), the setting key switch 83 is turned ON to transition to a setting confirmation mode in which the settings can be confirmed. Also, when the door is open and power is not being supplied to the slot machine 1 (the power switch 81 is OFF), the setting key switch 83 is turned ON, and in that state the power switch 81 is turned ON (power is applied to the slot machine 1), transitioning to a setting change mode in which the settings can be changed.

The setting key switch 83 can be switched between ON and OFF states by inserting a predetermined key member (setting key) into a predetermined lock member (keyhole) provided on the main body and rotating the setting key to align the setting key with the ON or OFF position of the setting key switch 83. Also, the transition to the setting confirmation mode cannot be performed while a game is being played (while game medals have been bet (including automatic bets) or while the reels are spinning), and can only be performed while the game is in standby. In contrast, the transition to the setting change mode can be performed even while a game is being played.

Now, referring to FIG. 4, the procedure for switching to the setting change mode when the setting value is "4" and changing the setting value will be described. Note that in FIG. 4, the "setting value display" may be the payout number display lamp 46j, or a dedicated setting value display provided inside the slot machine 1.

First, while the game is in standby, the door is opened and the power switch 81 is turned OFF, and the setting key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 83 is kept in the ON position (FIG. 4, (A)), and the power switch 81 is turned ON (FIG. 4, (B)), to switch to the setting change mode. When the setting change mode is switched to, the current setting value (more precisely, the number corresponding to the setting value) "4" is displayed on the setting value display. Here, the setting values that can be displayed on the setting value display are integers from "1" to "6". Each time the setting change switch 84 is operated in this state (FIG. 4, (C)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display is incremented by one, and the setting value can be updated one step at a time. However, if the setting change switch 84 is operated once when the setting value displayed on the setting value display is the upper limit of "6", the displayed setting value returns to "1", and thereafter, each time the setting change switch 84 is operated again, the displayed setting value is incremented by one. In this way, by operating the setting change switch 84, the setting value can be changed cyclically within the range of "1" to "6."

When the desired setting value (in the case shown in FIG. 4, "2") is displayed, the start lever 25 is turned ON (FIG. 4, (d)), and the setting value is confirmed as "2". After that, even if the setting change switch 84 is operated, the setting value displayed on the setting value display does not change (FIG. 4, (e)). After the setting value is confirmed, the setting change mode is ended by turning the setting key switch 83 to the OFF state, and the setting value displayed on the setting value display disappears and the game is in standby. Here, the end condition of the setting change mode in this embodiment is that the start lever 25 is first operated during the setting change mode to confirm the setting value, and then the setting key switch 83 is changed from the ON state to the OFF state. If the end condition of the setting change mode is met, the setting change mode can be ended by turning the setting key switch 83 to the OFF state, even if the start lever 25 is left ON (FIG. 4, (f)).

When the power switch 81 is turned OFF again during game standby, and then the power switch 81 is turned ON with the orientation of the setting key inserted into the keyhole of the setting key switch 83 set to the ON position (FIG. 4, (K)), the setting value display will display the setting value "2" confirmed in the previous setting change mode. Here, if the power switch 81 is turned OFF without the above-mentioned conditions for terminating the setting change mode being met (FIG. 4, (K)), when the power switch 81 is turned ON again (FIG. 4, (K)), the game will not be in standby mode but will continue to be in setting change mode. Also, even if the power switch 81 is turned ON (FIG. 4, (K)) after the power switch 81 is turned OFF (FIG. 4, (K)) with the orientation of the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 83 set to the OFF position (FIG. 4, (K)), the game will continue to be in setting change mode. In this case, to end the setting change mode and transition to game standby, the setting key switch 83 should be turned ON once and then turned OFF. The setting value update procedure described above is also referred to as the "normal procedure."

As mentioned above, the setting change switch 84 is located on the back side of the front door 2, so if, for example, the dedicated setting value display described above is provided inside the cabinet of the slot machine 1, the gaming store clerk who changes the setting value will place his or her body between the open front door 2 and the cabinet of the slot machine 1 and operate the setting change switch 84 while checking the setting value displayed on the dedicated setting value display.

In addition, some slot machines of this type are provided with monitor lamps (e.g., LEDs that light up when the corresponding switch is turned ON) on the main control board to check whether the connections between the main control board 60 and each switch (see FIG. 1(A)) on the middle panel assembly 20 are normal. With such slot machines, you can check whether the start lever 25 is being operated correctly by simply checking the monitor lamps on the main control board, reducing the need to look directly at the start lever 25.

For these reasons, when operating the start lever 25 to confirm the changed setting value, the store attendant is likely to operate the start lever 25 by simply moving his or her arm around to the front side (player side) of the front door 2, stretching out his or her elbow and not looking directly at the start lever 25, which is located near the hinge of the front door 2 (in other words, far away from the store attendant).

In this situation, the start lever 25 of this embodiment is turned on whether it is tilted up or down, so for example, by using the wrist of an outstretched arm as an axis and moving the palm up and down with straight fingers (a motion similar to a beckoning gesture), the start lever 25 can be easily turned on without looking directly at the start lever 25. Therefore, it can be said that the start lever 25 of this embodiment is structured so that it is easy to turn on the start lever without looking directly at it.

3B, the length LD of the path traced by the tip of the start lever 25 when tilted from the initial position to the ON position directly below is shorter than the length LU of the path traced by the tip of the lever when tilted from the initial position to the ON position directly above. _Therefore , even if the fingertip moving from top to bottom only _slightly touches the grip of the start lever 25, the start lever 25 is likely to be in the ON state. In this way, the start lever 25 is likely to be in the ON state by an operation performed without looking directly at it, so that the body movement associated with the setting change operation can be minimized, and the burden associated with the setting change operation can be reduced.

As described above, each time the setting change switch 84 is turned ON in the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is incremented by one. However, if the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 turned ON, the setting value displayed on the setting value display may be the setting value before entering the setting change mode, incremented by one.

For example, as shown in FIG. 5, when the door is open and the setting value display shows "1" during the setting change mode and the setting value is confirmed as "1," the power switch 81 is turned OFF without the conditions for terminating the setting change mode being met (FIG. 5, (A)). If the setting key inserted into the setting change switch 84 is then oriented to the ON position (FIG. 5, (B)) and the power switch 81 is turned ON (FIG. 5, (C)), the setting value display will show "2." Here, if the setting value was "6" when the power switch 81 was turned OFF during the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display will be "1" when the power switch 81 is turned ON while the setting change switch 84 is still ON.

If you use this configuration, when you switch to the setting change mode, the setting value has already been incremented by one, so if you want to update the setting value by just one step,
The setting change operation is completed simply by operating the start switch 25 to the ON state. Therefore, the time from when the power switch 81 is turned ON until the setting change operation is completed can be shortened. Note that, even if such a configuration is not adopted and the setting change mode is entered while the setting change switch 84 is left ON, the setting value before the transition to the setting change mode may be displayed on the setting value display.

If the power switch 81 is turned OFF while the setting value is "1" during the setting change mode (FIG. 5, (A)), and the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 83 is turned to the OFF position (FIG. 5, (D) shown by the dashed line), and the power switch 81 is turned ON (FIG. 5, (C)) while the setting change switch 84 is turned ON (FIG. 5, (B)), the setting change mode will not be terminated as the conditions for terminating the setting change mode are not met, and the setting change mode will be entered again. Even in such a case, the setting value display may be made to display "2". To terminate the setting change mode from this situation, the setting key switch 83 may be turned ON once and then OFF again after the start lever 25 has been operated to confirm the setting value.

When configured in this way, it is possible to reduce the time required to update the setting values, and even if the power switch 81 and the setting key switch 83 are unintentionally turned OFF during the setting change operation, the setting values corresponding to the operation of the setting change switch 84 can be displayed when the power switch 81 is turned ON again.

In addition, in the normal procedure shown in FIG. 4, when the start switch 25 is turned ON in the setting change mode (FIG. 4, (d)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display is confirmed, and even if the setting change switch 84 is subsequently operated (FIG. 4, (e)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display does not change. In such a configuration, when the setting change mode is entered with the start switch 25 turned ON, the setting value displayed on the setting value display may be in a confirmed state.

For example, as shown in Figure 6, when the door is open and the setting value display shows "1" during the setting change mode, the power switch 81 is turned OFF without the conditions for terminating the setting change mode being met (Figure 6, (A)). If the power switch 81 is then turned ON (Figure 6, (C)) while the start lever 25 is tilted to the ON position (Figure 6, (B)), the setting change mode will resume and the setting value display will show a confirmed "1" even if the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 83 is pointed to the OFF position (Figure 6, (D)). In other words, even if the setting change switch 84 is operated (Figure 6, (E)), the setting value display will not change to "1".

With this configuration, for example, if the power switch 81 is unintentionally turned OFF just before the set value is confirmed, the set value can be confirmed by turning the power switch 81 ON while the start switch 25 is ON (i.e., tilted), so that, as described above, the set value can be confirmed more easily and reliably than when operating the start switch 25 without looking directly at it. Also, when the mode is switched to the setting change mode, the set value before the mode was switched to remains confirmed, so it is possible to prevent a situation in which the set value is changed to an unintended value, for example, when the mode is switched to the setting change mode unintentionally without the intention of updating the set value.

Even if the above-mentioned configuration is not adopted and the setting change mode is entered while the start lever 25 is kept ON, the setting value displayed on the setting value display may start in an unconfirmed state (a state in which the setting value is incremented by one in response to the operation of the setting change switch 84).

Furthermore, if the setting change mode is entered with both the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned ON, the setting value display will show the setting value incremented by one from the setting value before entering the setting change mode, but the displayed setting value may be left in an unconfirmed state.

For example, as shown in FIG. 7, when the setting value display of pattern A (hereinafter also referred to as "setting value display A") displays "1" during the setting change mode in the door open state, the power switch 81 is turned OFF without the end condition of the setting change mode being satisfied (FIG. 7, (A)), and then, with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned ON (FIG. 7, (B) and (C)), the power switch 81 is turned ON (FIG. 7, (D)). In either case, when the orientation of the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 83 is set to the ON position or the OFF position (FIG. 7, (E)), the setting change mode is resumed, and the setting value display of pattern A displays "2". Note that, if the setting value before the transition to the setting change mode is "6", and the transition to the setting change mode is made with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned ON, the setting value displayed on the setting value display A will be "1".

In this state, each time the setting change switch 84 is operated (Fig. 7, (f)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display A is incremented by one. In other words, when the power switch 81 is turned ON (Fig. 7, (d)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display A is in an unconfirmed state. Then, when the start lever 25 is turned ON (Fig. 7, (g)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display A is confirmed, and even if the setting change switch 84 is then turned ON (Fig. 7, (h)), the setting value displayed on the setting value display A does not change.

When the setting change switch 84 is operated before the set value is confirmed (Fig. 7, (F)), and when the start lever 25 is turned ON to confirm the set value, even if the MAX-BET switch 23 or any of the stop switches 26a to 26c is in the ON state (Fig. 7, (I)), it is possible to change or confirm the set value.

After turning the start lever 25 ON to confirm the setting value, if the setting key switch 83 is turned OFF (Fig. 7, (K)), the setting change mode ends and the game enters standby mode, even if the start lever 25 is ON (shown by the dashed line in Fig. 7, (K)). In addition, if the power switch 81 is turned OFF (Fig. 7, (A)), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 83 is oriented to the OFF position (Fig. 7, (E)), and the power switch 81 is turned ON (Fig. 7, (D)) while operating the start lever 25 and the setting change switch 84 to the ON state, in order to end the setting change mode after confirming the setting value, it is necessary to first turn the setting key switch 83 ON (Fig. 7, (L)) and then OFF (Fig. 7, (K)).

When this configuration is adopted, when the setting change mode is entered with the start lever 25 and the setting change switch 84 operated to ON, the setting value is displayed incremented by one, so there is no need to operate the setting change switch 84 again, and the work involved in updating the setting value can be simplified. In addition, when changing the setting value in multiple steps instead of one step, the setting value displayed on the setting value display is not finalized, so the setting value can be changed to the desired value by continuing to operate the setting change switch 84 without having to switch back to the setting change mode.

In addition, without being limited to the above-mentioned configuration, when the start lever 25 and the setting change switch 84 are operated to ON and the mode is switched to the setting change mode, for example, (i) the setting value displayed on the setting value display A is the setting value before the mode was switched to the setting change mode, which is incremented by 1, and the setting value is confirmed; (ii) like the setting value display of pattern B in Figure 7 (hereinafter also referred to as "setting value display B"), the displayed setting value remains the same as before the mode was switched to the setting change mode, and the setting value is not confirmed; or (iii) like the setting value display B in Figure 7, the displayed setting value remains the same as before the mode was switched to the setting change mode, but the displayed setting value is confirmed.

As described above, we have explained the display contents of the setting values when the power switch 81 is turned OFF during the setting change mode, and then the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 turned ON (see FIG. 5), the confirmed state of the setting values when the setting change mode is entered with the start switch 25 turned ON (see FIG. 6), and the display contents and their confirmed state when the setting change mode is entered with both the setting change switch 84 and the start switch 25 turned ON (see FIG. 7). As an example of a combination of these configurations, configurations No. 1 to 6 are shown in FIG. 8. It goes without saying that combinations other than the configurations No. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 8 are also possible.

In this figure, in the configuration of No. 1, if the setting value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n (n is an integer from 1 to 6), when the power switch 81 is turned off and then the power switch 81 is turned on with the setting change switch 84 turned on to switch to the setting change mode, the setting value display will display the setting value of n. Also, when the setting value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, if the power switch 81 is turned off and then the power switch 81 is turned on with the start lever 25 turned on to switch to the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display will not be confirmed. Furthermore, when the setting value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, when the power switch 81 is turned off and then the power switch 81 is turned on with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned on to switch to the setting change mode, the setting value display will display the setting value of n, but the setting value will not be confirmed.

In the configuration of No. 2, when the setting value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, if the power switch 81 is turned off and then the power switch 81 is turned on with the setting change switch 84 turned on to switch to the setting change mode, the setting value display will show a setting value of n+1. Here, if the setting value before switching to the setting change mode was 6, the setting value displayed on the setting value display when switching to the setting change mode will be 1. Also, when the setting value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, if the power switch 81 is turned off and then the power switch 81 is turned on with the start lever 25 turned on to switch to the setting change mode, the setting value displayed on the setting value display will not be confirmed. Furthermore, if the setting value before turning OFF the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, and after turning OFF the power switch 81, the setting change switch 84 and start lever 25 are turned ON, and the power switch 81 is turned ON to switch to the setting change mode, the setting value display will show a setting value of n+1, but that setting value has not been finalized.

In the configuration of No. 3, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, when the power switch 81 is turned ON with the setting change switch 84 turned ON after the power switch 81 is turned OFF to switch to the setting change mode, the set value display shows a set value of n+1. Also, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, when the power switch 81 is turned OFF and the power switch 81 is turned ON with the start lever 25 turned ON to switch to the setting change mode, the set value displayed on the set value display is confirmed. Furthermore, when the set value before turning off the power switch 81 in the setting change mode is n, when the power switch 81 is turned OFF and the power switch 81 is turned ON with the setting change switch 84 and the start lever 25 turned ON to switch to the setting change mode, the set value display shows a set value of n, and the set value is confirmed.

The configurations of No. 4 to 6 are similar to the configuration of No. 3 in terms of the display contents of the set values when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 turned ON, and the confirmed state of the set values when the setting change mode is entered with the start switch 25 turned ON. However, the display contents of the set values and their confirmed state when the setting change mode is entered with both the setting change switch 84 and the start switch 25 turned ON are different from those of No. 3. Therefore, the following will explain the display contents of the set values and their confirmed state when the setting change mode is entered with both the setting change switch 84 and the start switch 25 turned ON in the configurations of No. 4 to 6.

In the configuration of No. 4, when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and start lever 25 on, the setting value display shows a setting value of n, but the setting value is not confirmed. Also, in the configuration of No. 5, when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and start lever 25 on, the setting value display shows a setting value of n+1, and the setting value is confirmed. Furthermore, in the configuration of No. 6, when the setting change mode is entered with the setting change switch 84 and start lever 25 on, the setting value display shows a setting value of n+1, but the setting value is not confirmed.

In any of the configurations No. 1 to No. 6 in FIG. 8, if the operation of the setting change switch 84 is valid during the setting change mode, the operation of the setting change switch 84 is accepted as valid even if the MAX-BET switch 23 or any of the stop switches 26a to 26c is ON. The same applies to the start lever 25. On the other hand, when the setting change mode ends and the game becomes playable, for example, after a specified number of game medals have been inserted, if the start lever 25 is operated when the MAX-BET switch 23 or any of the stop switches 26a to 26c is ON, the operation of the start lever 25 is invalidated and the reels do not spin.

In this way, during the setting change mode, operation of the start lever 25 is valid even if the MAX-BET switch 23 or the stop switches 26a to 26c are in the ON state. As a result, even if the start lever 25 is operated without looking directly at it while changing the setting value and the MAX-BET switch 23 or the stop switches 26a to 26c are unintentionally turned ON, the changed setting value can be confirmed, making it possible to smoothly change the setting value.

Furthermore, in any of the configurations No. 1 to No. 6 in FIG. 8, if the above-mentioned conditions for terminating the setting change mode are met during the setting change mode, the setting change mode can be terminated by turning the setting key switch 83 OFF, even if the start lever 25 is in the ON position.

Power from the power supply device 80 is supplied to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60, and further to the sub-sub control board 70B via the sub-main control board 70A (power may be supplied directly from the power supply device 80 to the sub-main control board 70A and the sub-sub control board 70B). A supply voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) for monitoring the supply state of voltage is provided on the circuit that supplies power from the power supply device 80 to the main control board 60 and on the circuit that supplies power to the sub-main control board 70A via the main control board 60. Each supply voltage monitoring circuit is configured to determine that a power supply is interrupted when the supply voltage drops to a predetermined voltage value, and to output a power interruption detection signal to the main CPU 61 and a sub-main CPU 71 described below. In addition, each supply voltage monitoring circuit is configured to determine that a power supply is turned on when the supply voltage returns to a predetermined voltage value (a value different from the voltage value for power interruption determination (for example, a higher value), but may be the same value), and to output a power-on detection signal to the main CPU 61 and the sub-main CPU 71. In addition, the voltage value when detecting a power outage of the main control board 60 is set to a value higher than the voltage value when detecting a power outage of the sub-main control board 70A, and the main control board 60 is configured to perform the processing (power outage processing) that is programmed to be executed when power is out before the sub-main control board 70A (the same may be true for powering on).

In addition, the main CPU 61 receives signals from the reel stop signal circuit 91, start lever 25, inserted medal sensors 28a, 28b, 28c, 1-BET switch 22, MAX-BET switch 23, and settlement switch 24, which are connected to the switch board 90 or mounted on the switch board 90, via an interface circuit 68.

The main CPU 61 is also connected to a solenoid 48 via an interface circuit 68, and is configured to control the solenoid 48 to be turned on and off. In the following description, a signal for controlling the solenoid 48 to be turned on and off is also referred to as a "blocker signal." Furthermore, although not shown, the slot machine 1 is provided with a door sensor that detects the open/closed state of the front door 2, and a signal from this door sensor is input to the main CPU 61 via the interface circuit 68. The main CPU 61 determines whether the front door 2 is closed (also referred to as a "door closed state") or open (door open state) based on the signal from the door sensor.

Also, although not shown in the figure, the main CPU 61 is configured to output a predetermined signal (also called an "outer end signal") to a data counter, hall computer, etc. via an external connection terminal board, etc., when a predetermined gaming state (for example, AT state or bonus state) is reached, and this outer end signal can be used to manage the number of times set in the predetermined gaming state, etc., and to present it to the player.

On the other hand, the sub-main control board 70A is provided with a sub-main CPU 71 which performs various arithmetic processing mainly related to the management of effects, a ROM 72 which is a read-only memory device storing control programs and the like, and a RAM 73 which is a memory device capable of writing and reading information. The drive circuits and the like operate according to the control programs stored in the ROM 72, thereby controlling the management of image effects and sound effects in the slot machine 1, controlling lamp effects, and the like. The ROM 72 and RAM 73 are non-volatile memory devices, and are configured to retain the stored information even when power is not supplied. A clock pulse generator and a frequency divider (not shown) are also connected to the sub-main CPU 71, and the sub-main CPU 71 executes a predetermined process according to the clock signals generated by the clock pulse generator and the frequency divider.

The sub-main CPU 71 is configured to receive various signals from the main control board 60 via the interface circuit 74 and transmit signals to the lamp control circuit 18. The lamp control circuit 18 is a circuit that controls the lighting of lamps such as the back lamps 38a to 38c. The sub-main CPU 71 also receives output signals from the selection button 54 and the decision button 55 via the interface circuit 74, and in response to the received output signals from each button, causes the sub-sub control board 70B to display a menu screen on the image display device 11 to provide information according to the player's selection, or changes the content of the presentation displayed on the image display device 11 during play.

Furthermore, the sub-main CPU 71 is configured to transmit various signals to the sub-sub control board 70B via the interface circuit 74, and to receive various signals from the sub-sub control board 70B. Hereinafter, signals (control signals) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub-main control board 70A are also referred to as "control commands", and signals (alert signals and performance signals) transmitted from the sub-main control board 70A to the sub-sub control board 70B are also referred to as "performance commands". Furthermore, signals (status signals) transmitted from the sub-sub control board 70B to the sub-main control board 70A are also referred to as "status commands".

The sub-sub control board 70B is provided with a sub-sub CPU 75 which performs various calculation processes mainly related to the control of image and sound effects, a ROM 76 which is a read-only memory device that stores control programs etc., and a RAM 77 which is a memory device to which information can be written and read. The drive circuits etc. operate according to the control programs stored in the ROM 76, thereby controlling image and sound effects etc. Note that the ROM 76 and RAM 77 are non-volatile memory devices and are configured to retain the stored information even when power is not supplied.

The sub-sub CPU 75 is configured to receive notification signals or performance signals from the sub-main control board 70A via the interface circuit 78, and transmit signals to the display device control circuit 16 and the speaker control circuit 17, as well as transmit a status signal to the sub-main control board 70A. The display device control circuit 16 is a circuit that controls the image display device 11 to display a predetermined performance image, and the speaker control circuit 17 is a circuit that controls the type and volume of sounds generated from speakers such as the upper speakers 15a and 15b. The image display device 11 is also configured to function as a push indicator (also called the "sub-side push order indicator") that displays the operation order (push order) of the stop switches 26a to 26c.

<Reel symbol arrangement>
In this embodiment, the symbols displayed by each of the reels 3a to 3c are arranged as shown in FIG. 9 ("left reel", "middle reel", and "right reel" in FIG. 9 represent the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c, respectively). That is, a predetermined number of ten types of symbols, namely "red seven", "gold seven", "black bar", "blue bar", "blank A", "blank B", "bell A", "bell B", "watermelon", and "replay", are arranged on each of the reels 3a to 3c. Hereinafter, the reels 3a, 3b, and 3c are also referred to as the left reel (left reel), the middle reel (middle reel), and the right reel (right reel), respectively.

<Types of Gaming Roles>
In this embodiment, the symbol combinations displayed on the reels 3a to 3c are set as shown in Figures 10 to 13, and these are the symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) that constitute the game roles. In this embodiment, a total of 51 game roles are set, including two special roles (BB roles; BB is an abbreviation for big bonus, also called "one type BB" or "bonus role"), five replay roles 1 to 5, and 44 winning roles (minor roles) 1 to 44. The symbol combinations (corresponding symbols) for achieving each game role, the number of game medals paid out when the game role is achieved, etc. are as shown in Figures 10 to 13.

BB roles 1 and 2 are game roles (bonus roles) that indicate that no game medals are paid out even if they are established, but that the establishment of a specific bonus (also referred to as "BB" in this embodiment) as a special role is activated, and a specific bonus game (also referred to as "BB game") executed under conditions different from normal games can be started from the next game, and that the game will transition to a special game state (also referred to as "BB in operation") that is advantageous to the player. BB role 1 corresponds to the symbol combination of "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," and BB role 2 corresponds to the symbol combination of "black bar, black bar, red seven" (the names of the symbols that make up the game roles are written in the order of reels 3a, 3b, and 3c. The same applies below). The bonus game that can be started by the establishment of BB role 1 or BB role 2 ends when a predetermined number of game medals (for example, 70 medals in this embodiment, but the number can be changed as appropriate) are acquired (as a modification, it may end when a predetermined number of games (for example, 30 games) have been played). BB roles 1 and 2 may be established in non-RT and RT1 (inside BB) described later, but are roles that cannot be established in RT2 (while BB is operating) ("-" in Figures 10 to 13 indicates that they are not established).

In this embodiment, only the BB role is provided as a special role, but as another special role, an RB role (RB is an abbreviation for regular bonus) or an MB role (MB is an abbreviation for middle bonus, also referred to as "two types of BB") may be provided. When an RB role is established, an RB game as a bonus game may be set to start from the next game, and when an MB role is established, an MB game as a bonus game may be set to start from the next game. In this case, the RB game may end, for example, when a minor role is established a predetermined number of times (e.g., 8 times) or when a predetermined number of games (e.g., 12 times) have been played, and the MB game may end, for example, when a predetermined number of game medals (e.g., more than 200) have been paid out. In addition, multiple special roles (for example, multiple types of BB roles may be provided, or both BB and MB roles may be provided).

When replay roles 1 to 5 are established, no game medals are paid out, but the player is allowed to play the next game without reducing the number of game medals he owns (without inserting new game medals). Note that replay role 1 is configured so that when its corresponding symbol "Bell A, Replay, Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven" ("/" means "or") is stopped and displayed on the pay line 29, the symbol "Replay" is lined up on a downward-right line connecting the upper left display area, the middle-middle display area, and the lower right display area in the display window W. For this reason, replay role 1 is also called "downward-right replay" (replay is also written as "RP"). For the same reason, replay roles 2 to 4 are also called upward-right RP, upper RP, and middle RP, respectively. In addition, the replay role 5 is configured so that when the corresponding symbols "Bell A, Blue Bar/Black Bar/Gold Seven/Red Seven, Bell B" are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29, the "watermelon" symbol is lined up on the upper line connecting the upper left display area, the upper middle display area, and the upper right display area in the display window W. For this reason, the replay role 1 is also called the "upper watermelon RP."

As shown in FIG. 9 (reel symbols), the "Replay" symbols on the left, center, and right reels that make up the replay role 4 are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols or less on each reel. As a result, when the replay role 4 is won, the corresponding symbol "Replay, Replay, Replay" can be displayed stopped (also called "pulled in") on the pay line 29 regardless of the push order or push position (see the explanation of the reel rotation stop control by the reel control means 134 described later). A role that can pull in the corresponding symbol (any of multiple pairs, if there are multiple pairs) onto the pay line 29 regardless of the operation timing of each stop switch, like this replay role 4, is also called a "100% pull-in possible game role." Note that replay roles 1 to 3 and 5 are also 100% pull-in possible game roles, just like the replay role 4. In addition, replay roles 1 to 5 can be achieved in non-RT and RT1, which will be described later, but cannot be achieved in RT2.

The small roles 1 to 44 are game roles (winning roles) that are configured to pay out a predetermined number of game medals when they are established. Among the small roles 1 to 44, the small roles 1 to 36 are roles that can be established in any of the non-RT, RT1, and RT2 described below, while the small roles 37 to 39 are roles that can be established only in RT2 (BB operation). In addition, the small roles 1 to 23 and 40 to 43 are also called "1-coin roles" because the number of payouts when they are established is set to one. Similarly, the small roles 24 to 37 are also called "15-coin roles", and the small roles 38 and 39 are also called "3-coin roles". The 15-coin role is also called "bell small role".

The small win 37 is configured so that when the corresponding symbols "Bell A, watermelon, blue bar/black bar/gold seven/red seven" are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29, the "watermelon" symbol is lined up on a line sloping to the right in the display window W. For this reason, the small win 37 is also called the "watermelon small win." The small win 40 is a one-coin win whose corresponding symbols are "red seven, red seven, red seven." For this reason, the small win 40 is also called the "red sevens, one-coin win." The small wins 1 to 7 and 24 to 37 are game wins that can be drawn in 100% (so-called "no misses").

<<Winning Items in the Role Lottery (Condition Device)>>
The role determination process (role lottery) is performed once per game, and one or more winning items are selected as the role determination result (lottery result). Here, the role determination result is called a condition device. The table in FIG. 14(A) shows the type of bonus condition device selected by the role lottery (internal lottery) and the corresponding winning role, and the tables in FIG. 14(B) and FIG. 15 to FIG. 19 show the type of winning replay condition device selected by the role lottery and the corresponding winning role, and describe combinations, etc. The contents of some condition devices will be specifically explained below.

The bonus condition device shown in FIG. 14(A) includes a type 1 BB-A condition device corresponding to number 1 and a type 1 BB-B condition device corresponding to number 2 (number 0 indicates that neither bonus condition device is selected). The type 1 BB-A condition device is a condition device in which BB role 1 is the sole winner, and is selected during a non-RT, which will be described later. Also, if it is selected but BB role 1 is not realized, the selection is carried over to RT1, which will be described later. On the other hand, it is not selected or carried over in RT2 (the "-" in the figure indicates that it is not selected or carried over). The type 1 BB-B condition device is a condition device in which BB role 2 is the sole winner, and is selected during a non-RT, and if it is selected but BB role 2 is not realized, the selection is carried over to RT1. Also, it is not selected or carried over in RT2.

During a non-RT in which a type 1 BB-A condition device has been selected or during an RT1 in which the selection of a type 1 BB-A condition device has been carried over, if the player's push position allows the corresponding symbols of BB role 1, "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," to be pulled onto the active line 29, then BB role 1 will be established. Similarly, during a non-RT in which a type 1 BB-B condition device has been selected or during an RT1 in which the selection of a type 1 BB-B condition device has been carried over, if the player's push position allows the corresponding symbols of BB role 2, "black bar, black bar, red seven," to be pulled onto the active line 29, then BB role 2 will be established.

The replay-A to L condition devices, which correspond to the numbers 1 to 12 shown in FIG. 14(B), respectively, are condition devices that make the replay role the winning role. For example, the replay-A condition device is a condition device that makes the replay roles 1 to 4 win in a duplicated manner, and is configured so that it can be selected during non-RT and RT1, but not during RT2, as described below. Also, when selected, replay role 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the push order or push position, whether in non-RT or RT1. The replay-L condition device is a condition device that makes the replay roles 2 to 5 win in a duplicated manner, and when selected during non-RT, replay role 5 (upper watermelon RP) is always established regardless of the push order or push position, whereas when selected during RT1, replay role 4 (middle RP) is always established regardless of the push order or push position.

The number 0 shown in FIG. 14(B) indicates a miss in which none of the winning replay condition devices are selected. In this embodiment, this miss is selected only during non-RT, but it may also be selected during RT1 or RT2. In addition, when a miss is selected during RT1, if the push order is a predetermined push order such as reverse push (the push order in which the stop switch 26c is operated first), depending on the push position, a symbol combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven" (also called "red sevens") may be displayed in the display window W (for example, on the pay line 29). This red sevens are the same as the corresponding symbol of the small win 40 (red sevens), but the small win 2 is only formed during RT2. The red sevens displayed during RT1 are always miss symbols.

The winning-A1 to A12 condition devices corresponding to numbers 13 to 24 shown in Fig. 14(B), Fig. 15, and Fig. 16, respectively, are condition devices that make a small role the winning role. Also, they may be selected during non-RT and RT1, which will be described later, but are configured not to be selected during RT2. Furthermore, when selected during non-RT, a specified 1-coin role is always established regardless of the pressing order or pressing position, and when selected during RT1, the role that is established differs depending on the pressing order or pressing position. For example, the winning-A11 condition device shown in Fig. 16 is a condition device that makes small roles 6, 10, 15, 16, 21, and 34 win in duplicate, and when selected during non-RT, small role 6, which is a 1-coin role, is always established regardless of the pressing order or pressing position.

On the other hand, if the winning-A11 condition device is selected during RT1, when the push order is "middle, right, left", the small prize 6, which is a 15-coin prize, will be formed with a probability of 1/1, when the push order is "right, middle, left", the small prize 34, which is a 15-coin prize, will be formed with a probability of 1/1, and when the push order is other than "left, middle, right", "left, right, middle", "middle, left, right", "middle, right, left"), the small prizes 10, 15, and 16, which are 1-coin prizes, will be formed with a probability of 1/8. Note that "left", "middle", and "right" refer to the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c, and the order of these indicates the order of their operation. For example, "middle, right, left" represents the push order in which the stop switches are operated in the order 26b → 26c → 26a. In Figures 15 to 18, each push order is shown in the order of numbers "1", "2", and "3". In the diagram, "123", "132", "213", "231", "312", and "321" correspond to the pressing orders of "left center right", "left left center", "center left right", "center right left", "center right left", and "right center left", respectively.

During RT1, the selection of the bonus condition device is carried over, so depending on the push order and push position, BB role 1 or BB role 2 may be established. For example, if the prize-winning-A11 condition device is selected during RT1 in which the selection of the type 1 BB-B condition device in which BB role 2 is the sole winner is carried over, when the push order is "middle right left" or "right middle left", small role 6 and small role 34 are always established, respectively, so BB role 2 will not be established. On the other hand, with other push orders ("left middle right", "left left middle", "middle left left", "middle right left"), if the push order allows the corresponding symbols of small roles 10, 15, and 16 to be drawn depending on the push position, BB role 2 will not be established, but if these corresponding symbols cannot be drawn and, conversely, the corresponding symbols of BB role 2, "black bar/black bar/red seven", can be drawn, BB role 2 will be established.

Specifically, the case where the push order is "left, center, right" will be taken as an example. First, the case where the push position on the first left reel is within the range where the symbol "red seven" can be drawn will be described. In this case, reel control is performed on the left reel to draw the symbol "red seven", so at that stage, there remains a possibility that either the small win 16 or the small win 21 will be achieved. Next, if the push position on the second center reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be drawn, reel control is performed on the center reel to draw the symbol "blue bar", so at that stage, there remains a possibility that the small win 16 will be achieved, and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the symbol "blue bar" can be drawn, reel control is performed on the right reel to draw the symbol "blue bar", so finally, the small win 16 (corresponding symbols "red seven, blue bar, blue bar") will be achieved. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control will be performed on the middle reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, and a miss (no winning combination will be achieved) will be confirmed at that stage (there remains a possibility that the "red seven, red seven, red seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed), and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control will be performed on the right reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, and the "red seven, red seven, red seven" symbol combination will ultimately be displayed.

Next, we will explain the case where the first left reel is pushed in a range that can pull in the "black bar" symbol. In this case, reel control is performed on the left reel to pull in the "black bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains the possibility of either BB role 2, small role 10, or small role 15 being formed. Next, if the second center reel is pushed in a range that can pull in the "black bar" symbol, reel control is performed on the center reel to pull in the "black bar" symbol, so at that stage, there remains the possibility of BB role 2 being formed, and finally, if the third right reel is pushed in a range that can pull in the "red seven" symbol, reel control is performed on the right reel to pull in the "red seven" symbol, so finally, BB role 2 (corresponding symbols "black bar, black bar, red seven") is formed. On the other hand, if the push position on the second middle reel is within the range where the "gold seven" symbol can be pulled in, reel control will be performed on the middle reel to pull in the "gold seven" symbol, so there is still a chance of achieving minor win 10 at that stage, and finally, if the push position on the third right reel is within the range where the "gold seven" symbol can be pulled in, reel control will be performed on the right reel to pull in the "gold seven" symbol, so ultimately minor win 10 (corresponding symbols "black bar gold seven gold seven") will be achieved.

The winning-B1 to B12 condition devices corresponding to numbers 25 to 36 shown in Figures 16 to 18 are condition devices that set a small role as a winning role, and are configured to be selected during non-RT and RT1, but not during RT2. Also, when selected during non-RT or RT1, the role that is formed differs depending on the pressing order and pressing position. For example, the winning-B7 condition device shown in Figure 17 is a condition device that allows small roles 4, 5, 8, 13, 18, 23, and 30 to be multiple winning roles, and when selected during non-RT, when the pressing order is "middle first", the small role 30, which is a 15-piece role, is formed with a probability of 1/1, and when the pressing order is "left first" or "right first", the small role 5, which is a 1-piece role, is formed with a probability of 1/1. Note that "left first" represents the pressing order in which stop switch 26a is operated first, "middle first" represents the pressing order in which stop switch 26b is operated first, and "right first" represents the pressing order in which stop switch 26c is operated first. In Figures 16 to 19, the pressing orders for "left first," "middle first," and "right first" are displayed as "1 - -," "- 2-," and "- - 3," respectively.

On the other hand, if the winning-B7 condition device is selected during RT1, when the push order is "middle left right", small prize 4 or small prize 5, which are 1 coin roles, will be established with a probability of 1/1, when the push order is "right left middle", small prize 30, which is a 15 coin role, will be established with a probability of 1/1, and when the push order is other than "left middle right", "left left middle", "middle right left", "right middle left"), any of the small prizes 8, 13, 18, and 23, which are 1 coin roles, will be established with a probability of 1/8. Also, when the selection of the type 1 BB-A condition device, which is the sole winner of BB role 1, is carried over, if the winning-B7 condition device is selected during RT1, when the push order is "middle left left" or "right left middle", small prizes 4, 5, and small prize 30 will always be established, so BB role 1 will never be established. On the other hand, when pressing in any other order ("left-center-right", "left-right-center", "center-right-left", "right-center-left"), if the pressing position allows you to pull in any of the corresponding symbols of minor symbols 8, 13, 18, or 23, BB role 11 will not be achieved, but if you cannot pull in these corresponding symbols and, conversely, you can pull in the corresponding symbols of BB role 1, "blue bar/blue bar/red seven", then BB role 1 will be achieved.

The winning-C to winning-E condition devices corresponding to the numbers 37 to 39 shown in Fig. 19 are condition devices that set a small winning combination as a winning combination, and are configured to be selected during non-RT and RT1, but not during RT2. Also, when selected during non-RT or RT1, the small winning combination 36, which is a 15-coin combination, is always established, regardless of the pressing order or pressing position.

The winning-F to Q condition devices, which correspond to numbers 40 to 51 shown in FIG. 19, respectively, are condition devices that set a small role as the winning role, and are configured to be selected during RT2, but not during non-RT or RT1. Of these, the winning-F, G, L, and M condition devices are configured to always achieve a 15-coin role (small role 24 to 37) when selected during RT2, regardless of the push order or push position. The winning-I, J, K, O, P, and Q condition devices are configured to achieve a 1-coin role (small role 1 to 23, 40 to 44) when selected during RT2, depending on the push position. The winning-H condition device is configured to achieve a 3-coin role (small role 38, 39) when selected during RT2, depending on the push position. When the Winning-N Condition Device is selected during RT2, if the pressing order is "left first" or "middle first", a 1-coin role will be achieved depending on the pressing position, and if the pressing order is "right first", a 7-match 1-coin role (small role 40) will be achieved depending on the pressing position.

<Probability of winning and setting difference>
In the role determination process, the probability (role determination probability) of each condition device being selected can be set arbitrarily. In addition, the role determination probability can be configured to be changeable according to the above-mentioned setting value set by a game store clerk or the like. In this embodiment, the setting value is configured in six stages from setting 1 to 6, and a condition device in which the role determination probability changes according to the setting value and a condition device in which the role determination probability remains unchanged even if the setting value changes are provided. Hereinafter, setting such that the role determination probability changes according to the setting value is referred to as "setting a setting difference". It is possible to arbitrarily determine whether or not to set a setting difference for each condition device. As an example, a setting difference is not set for a condition device that is a lottery trigger for a lottery that affects the ball payout rate (the ratio of the number of payouts to the number of game medals used for playing) in the slot machine 1, and a setting difference may or may not be set for a condition device that is not a lottery trigger.

Figure 20 shows the winning numbers assigned to each condition device (total number of settings: 65,536) as an example of the probability of determining a winning combination in slot machine 1. In this example, the winning numbers in each RT state of non-RT, RT1, and RT2 are shown for three settings: setting 1, setting 3, and setting 6. According to this example, the probability of a type 1 BB-A condition device and a type 1 BB-B condition device being selected during non-RT is set relatively high at about 7/100. Also, the probability of any of the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices being selected during non-RT or RT1 is set fairly high at about 7/10.

Next, the characteristic configuration of the slot machine 1 according to this embodiment will be described with additional reference to FIGS.
<Function Block>
As shown in FIG. 21, from the functional point of view, the slot machine according to this embodiment mainly includes a bet operation for betting game medals (for example, an operation for inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21, or an operation for pressing the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23), a reel rotation start operation for rotating each of the stopped reels 3a to 3c (for example, an operation for tilting the start lever 25), and a reel rotation stop operation for stopping the rotation of the three reels 3a, 3b, and 3c which variably display a plurality of types of symbols (for example, , pressing stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c), settlement operations for paying out bets or accumulated (credited) game medals (for example, pressing settlement switch 24), main control means 100 (corresponding to main control board 60) that performs main control related to the progress of the game, and sub-control means 200 (corresponding to sub-control board 70) that performs predetermined presentation control according to the game situation.

<Functional block of main control means>
The main control means 100 is roughly divided into a game state management means 110 that mainly manages the game state, a game progress management means 130 that mainly manages the game progress, and a main communication control means 150 that controls communication in the main control means 100. Of these, the game state management means 110 includes a set value control means 111, an RT state control means 112, a replay operation control means 113, a bonus operation control means 114, a freeze control means 115, a game mode control means 116, and a random number generation/acquisition means 117.

The game progress management means 130 includes a received medal management means 131, a role determination means 132, a performance group number determination means 133, a reel control means 134, a stop display pattern determination means 135, a paid medal management means 136, a blocker control means 137, a display lamp control means 138, a push order management means 139, and a condition device group number determination means 140, and the main communication control means 150 includes a control command transmission means 151 and an outer end signal transmission means 152. Each of the above-mentioned means in the main control means 100 is a functional representation of the main CPU 61, ROM 62, RAM 63, electronic circuits, and other hardware arranged on the main control board 60 shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 62, etc.

(Means constituting the game status management means 110)
The set value control means 111 is configured to control a numerical value (also called a "control set value") for internally managing the set value (six-stage configuration of setting 1 to setting 6) of the winning combination probability. In this embodiment, consecutive integer values from 1 to 6 (the integer values from 1 to 6 correspond to the settings 1 to 6, respectively) are used as the control set values. The data of the control set values is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63, and is referred to when the set value is confirmed in the winning combination process, and is also referred to when the set value is displayed on the set value display (the payout number display lamp 46j) when the setting is confirmed or changed. The control set value is changed in response to a setting change operation by a gaming store clerk. Specifically, the setting key switch 83 is operated to the ON state, and the setting change switch 84 is operated in that state, and the setting value is updated by one.

The RT state control means 112 is configured to control the setting of three RT states: non-RT, RT1, and RT2, as shown in FIG. 22. Non-RT is the RT state that is set when the RAM (RAM 63) is initialized. In this non-RT state, a transition to RT1 occurs when condition P1 is satisfied. Condition P1 is that a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type 1 BB-B condition device is selected (also referred to as a "BB win").

RT1 is an RT state (also called "inside BB") that is set when the selection of a Type 1 BB-A condition device or Type 1 BB-B condition device (winning BB role 1 or BB role 2) is carried over. During this RT1, a transition to RT2 occurs when condition P2 is satisfied. Condition P2 is that BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established (also called "BB establishment" or "BB activation").

RT2 is an RT state (also called "BB in operation") that is set from the next game when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established, and bonus games can be played during this RT2. In RT2, the replay role is not won, and it is set so that one of the winning condition devices J to Q is selected (no misses). During RT2, the satisfaction of condition P3 triggers a transition to non-RT. Condition P3 is that more than a predetermined number (70 medals) of game medals are acquired during RT2 and the bonus game ends (also called "BB operation ends").

Returning to FIG. 21, the re-play operation control means 113 is configured to set a state (also called the "re-play operation state") in which the player is permitted to play the next game without betting any game medals owned, when a re-play role is established. When the re-play operation state is set, information indicating the re-play operation state (also called the "re-play operation state flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a specified memory area of the RAM 63. The set re-play operation state flag is cleared (for example, the value "0" is stored) at a specified point in time until the re-play operation state is resolved.

The bonus operation control means 114 is configured to operate in the following manner: from the time when a bonus role (in this embodiment, BB role 1 or BB role 2) is won (when a type 1 BB-A condition device or a type 1 BB-B condition device is selected),
It is configured to execute a predetermined process during the period until the end of the bonus game that is executed when the B role 1 or BB role 2 is established. Specifically, when the BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won, information indicating that the BB role 1 or BB role 2 has been won (also called the "Type 1 BB winning flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63. In addition, when the BB role 1 or BB role 2 is established, information indicating that the BB role is in operation (also called the "Type 1 BB operation flag") is set (for example, the value "1" is stored) in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 63.

The freeze control means 115 is configured to set a freeze that delays the execution of control processes related to the progress of the game (such as processes that accept bet operations, reel spin start operations, reel spin stop operations, etc.) for a predetermined time when a predetermined condition is met. In this embodiment, four types of freezes can be executed: win wait (freeze time 2 seconds), fake wait (freeze time 5 seconds), announcement wait (freeze time 2 seconds), and full stop end wait (freeze time 5 seconds).

As shown in FIG. 23, the game mode control means 116 is configured to control the setting of eight game modes from game mode 0 to game mode 7. A game mode refers to a game state (also called a "main game state") that is controlled by the main control means separately from the RT state and is mainly related to the setting state of the AT.

Game mode 0 is a normal (non-advantageous) game state. Game mode 0 is a mode in which the player stays in a normal zone that is different from the advantageous zone described later, and does not perform lotteries related to AT play (assisted play). In game mode 0, the player transitions to game mode 1 when condition Q1 is satisfied, the player transitions to game mode 2 when condition Q2 is satisfied, the player transitions to game mode 3 when condition Q3 is satisfied, and the player transitions to game mode 6 when condition Q4 is satisfied. The contents of each transition condition (conditions Q1 to Q15) are simplified and described in FIG. 23, but more detailed contents are described in the flowchart described later. The zone type number is a number (taking the value of 0 or 1) that manages whether the player stays in a normal zone or an advantageous zone described later, and a zone type number of 0 indicates that the player stays in a normal zone, and a zone type number of 1 indicates that the player stays in an advantageous zone (see also FIG. 24). When in game mode 0, the section type number = 0. Also, the AT winning flag is a flag (taking the value of 0 or 1) that manages whether the AT has been won, with AT winning flag = 0 indicating that the AT has not been won, and AT winning flag = 1 indicating that the AT has been won (see also Figure 24).

Game mode 1 is a game state that is also called "chance" and is in which the section type number is 1 but the AT has not been won. In game mode 1, the satisfaction of condition Q5 triggers a transition to game mode 0, and the satisfaction of condition Q8 triggers a transition to game mode 3. The chance game number counter included in condition Q5 is a number (taking values from 0 to 30) that manages the number of games in game mode 1, and is set to 30 when the game mode is switched to game mode 1, and is decremented by 1 for each game thereafter (see also FIG. 24). The type 1 BB winning flag included in conditions Q6 to Q8 is a flag (taking values from 0 to 1) that manages whether or not the BB has been won in the role drawing in the game, and a type 1 BB winning flag = 0 indicates that the BB has not been won in the game, and a type 1 BB winning flag = 1 indicates that the BB has been won in the game (see also FIG. 24).

Game mode 2 is a game state also called "after AT win 1" that is mainly entered when the section type number is 1, the AT has been won, but the BB has not been won. In game mode 2, the transition to game mode 3 occurs when condition Q9 is satisfied.

Game mode 3 is a game state of the AT that is mainly entered when the BB is won while the AT is won. In this game mode 3, the push navigation described below is executed, which is a very advantageous game state for the player. In game mode 3, the game mode is entered into game mode 0 when condition Q11 is satisfied, and then into game mode 7 when condition Q11 is satisfied. The bell count counter included in conditions Q11 and Q12 is a counter (taking values from 0 to 134) that manages the number of times (also called "bell count") that push navigation (winning navigation) can be executed in the AT, and the winning navigation can be executed when the value of the bell count counter is 1 or more (see also FIG. 24). The seven number is a number that manages the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and seven number = 1 indicates red seven, and seven number = 2 indicates gold seven (see also FIG. 24). The seven counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 26) that manages the number of red sevens stocked, the accumulation counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2412) that manages the number of game medals won in one favorable zone (the difference in number of medals), and the reach flag is a flag (taking a value of 0 or 1) that adjusts when the upper limit of the number of game medals won (the difference in number of medals) has been reached (see also Figure 24).

Game mode 6 is a game state also called "chance state" where the section type number is 1 and the player is in the BB state without winning the AT. When condition Q10 is satisfied during game mode 6, the game mode is switched to game mode 1.

Game mode 7 is a game state also called "inside AT after" that you stay in when the reach flag = 0 after one AT ends. When condition Q10 is satisfied during game mode 7, the game mode transitions to game mode 4.

Game mode 4 is a game state also called "after AT" in which the player remains after BB is established in game mode 7. When condition Q7 is satisfied during game mode 4, the player transitions to game mode 5, when condition Q8 is satisfied the player transitions to game mode 3, when condition Q13 is satisfied the player transitions to game mode 0, and when condition Q14 is satisfied the player transitions to game mode 7. The AT cycle counters included in conditions Q13 and Q14 are counters (taking values from 0 to 3) that manage the cycle during the AT.

The game mode 5 is a game state also called "AT winning 2" in which the player stays after winning the AT in the game mode 4. In the game mode 5, the game mode is shifted to the game mode 3 when the condition Q9 is satisfied.

When the player is in one of game modes 1 to 7, the game mode will be switched to game mode 0 when condition Q15 is satisfied. The favorable zone clear counter included in condition Q15 is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 1500) that manages the number of games that have been played consecutively in the favorable zone, is set to 1500 when the player moves from the normal zone to the favorable zone, and is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the favorable zone (see also FIG. 24). The net gain counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2412) that manages the number of coins won (difference in number of coins) during the favorable zone, is set to 0 when the player moves from the normal zone to the favorable zone, and is updated according to the number of coins won thereafter (see also FIG. 24).

The above-mentioned eight game modes 0 to 7 are divided into game modes belonging to the normal zone (game mode 0) and game modes belonging to the advantageous zone (game modes 1 to 7). The normal zone is a period during which push navigation (prize-winning navigation, RP navigation, and eye-pushing navigation) is not performed, and is also a period during which information that can determine the push order (information such as condition device number and instruction number) is not transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means. The normal zone is also a period during which a lottery can be held to determine whether or not to move to the advantageous zone (for example, a lottery for moving to the advantageous zone).

The favorable zone is a period during which push navigation can be performed, and is also a period during which information that can determine the push order can be sent from the main control means to the sub-control means. The favorable zone is also a period during which a lottery that changes the performance of the favorable zone (for example, an AT mode lottery) or a process that adds to the number of AT games during the favorable zone (for example, a seven stock 1 lottery, a seven stock 2 lottery) can be performed. Furthermore, during the favorable zone, a zone indicator (for example, among the payout number display lamps 46j, a DP segment lamp other than the seven segment lamp (also called an "favorable zone lamp") is lit up) to notify the player that he or she is in the favorable zone. While staying in the favorable zone, a winning navigation may be performed at least once (in this case, if a winning navigation has not been performed even once, it may be possible not to move to the normal zone).

In addition, there is an upper limit (1500 games) on the period during which a player can stay continuously in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous zone ends, all information related to the advantageous zone (for example, information such as the AT winning flag and the value of the seven stock counter) is cleared. Note that when the upper limit is reached and the advantageous zone ends, it is not necessary that a winning navigation was performed even once during the stay in the advantageous zone. Furthermore, when the lottery for determining whether or not to move to the advantageous zone and the lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous zone are performed based on the role determination result (condition device), they may be limited to the role determination result that does not have a setting difference, and in particular, the lottery for changing the performance of the advantageous zone may be performed based on conditions other than the role determination result. In that case, they may be performed without referring to the setting value.

In this embodiment, a favorable zone clear counter is provided to keep track of the number of games that have been played consecutively in the favorable zone, and the value of this favorable zone clear counter is set to "1500" when transitioning from the normal zone to the favorable zone. The value of the favorable zone clear counter is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the favorable zone, and when the counter value reaches "0", a forced transition to the normal zone occurs. Furthermore, if a transition occurs from the favorable zone to the normal zone before the value of the favorable zone clear counter reaches "0", the value of the favorable zone clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and when a transition occurs again from the normal zone to the favorable zone, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also has a net gain counter that counts the number of game medals acquired (the difference in number of medals) during the favorable zone. This net gain counter sets its counter value to "0" at the start of the favorable zone (it may also be set to "0" at the end of the favorable zone), and updates the counter value for each game and game result thereafter. In updating, if the difference in number of medals falls below 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference in number of medals is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as it is (such correction may not be performed). Then, when the accumulated difference in number of medals exceeds 2400, the favorable zone ends and the normal zone is entered. The accumulation counter is functionally a counter that performs the same count as the net gain counter. When checking the number of game medals acquired (the difference in number of medals) during control processing, the value of the accumulation counter may be referenced or the value of the net gain counter may be checked depending on the processing contents.

In addition, a correction counter is also provided as a counter that performs counting related to the number of game medals won (difference in number) during the favorable zone. This correction counter is a counter (taking a value between 0 and 2101) that counts the number of game medals that can be won during one favorable zone (also called the "expected number won" or "expected number of medals that can be won"), which is calculated by adding the number of AT stocks such as red sevens and gold sevens and the value of the bell count counter to the value of the net increase counter (accumulation counter). When the value of the correction counter (expected number won) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), this may be used as a trigger to end the favorable zone at a predetermined timing and transition to the normal zone.

This configuration makes it difficult for players to tell when the advantageous zone will end. For example, if the end of the advantageous zone is determined solely by the value of the advantageous zone clear counter or the value of the net gain counter, displaying these values to the player allows the player to easily understand when the advantageous zone will end by checking them. However, if the player can easily tell that the end of the advantageous zone is approaching, there is a risk that the player's motivation to play will decrease.

In this embodiment, by providing the correction counter described above, even if the advantageous zone clear counter and the net gain counter have not reached their upper limits, the advantageous zone may end because the correction counter reaches a predetermined value. Therefore, it becomes difficult to know when the advantageous zone will end, which increases the interest of the game. In addition, by setting the predetermined value (2100) of the correction counter to a value smaller than the upper limit (2400) of the net gain counter, it is possible to reduce the possibility of the advantageous zone ending during the AT. For example, if the value of the correction counter (expected number of wins) exceeds the predetermined value (2100) during the AT, if the next AT can be executed after the end of the AT, the net gain counter is likely to exceed the upper limit (2400) during the execution of the next AT, and the advantageous zone will end. If the advantageous zone suddenly ends while the player is in a game state advantageous to the player, such as during the AT, the player may feel uncomfortable or disappointed. However, if the advantageous zone ends when the value of the correction counter (expected number of wins) exceeds the predetermined value (2100), such a situation can be avoided.

In the game modes 0 to 7, various lotteries are held. These lotteries are summarized in Figures 25 to 31, so we will briefly explain them here. The advantageous zone transition lottery shown in Figure 25 (A) is a lottery that determines whether or not to transition to an advantageous zone, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group A number (condition device group numbers will be described later). The number of winning positions corresponding to each condition device group A number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 1 lottery shown in FIG. 25(B) is a lottery that determines the chance mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during chance (game mode 1)), and selects one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4 based on the condition device group H number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group H number is as shown in the figure.

Chance mode 2 lottery-1 shown in Figure 25 (C) is a lottery to decide the chance mode number during BB operation in chance (game mode 1), and selects one of chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) based on the condition device group D number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group D number is as shown in the figure.

The Chance Mode 2 Draw-2 shown in Figure 25 (D) is a draw to determine the chance mode number when BB is not in operation during chance (game mode 1), and selects one of the chance mode numbers 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) based on the condition device group B number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group B number is as shown in the figure.

The chance mode 3 drawing shown in Figure 25 (E) is a drawing to determine a new chance mode number at the end of a stay cycle during chance (game mode 1), and a new chance mode number from 0 to 4 (actually 0 or 4) is selected based on the current chance mode number 1 to 3 (no drawing if the number is 0). The winning number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown. Note that chance mode number 4 indicates an AT win. The chance mode drawings in Figures 25 (B) to (E) are collectively referred to as AT drawings.

The chance game number lottery shown in FIG. 26(A) is a lottery that determines the number of games to stay in chance (game mode 1) when any of chance mode numbers 1 to 3 is selected in the chance mode 1 lottery (also referred to as "chance mode winning"). Based on the selected chance mode number 1 to 3, one of the game numbers 0, 10, 20, or 30 is selected. The winning number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The chance cycle lottery shown in FIG. 26(B) is a lottery that determines the number of cycles when a chance mode is won, and selects one of the cycle numbers 0 to 4 based on the chance mode number 1 to 3 selected in the chance mode 1 lottery. The winning number corresponding to each chance mode number is as shown in the figure.

The EX1 mode lottery shown in Figure 26 (C) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number after winning the AT (the number that manages the stock add-on status during the AT), and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2) based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The EX2 mode lottery shown in Figure 26 (D) is a lottery that is held while in game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the add-on mode number after winning the AT, just like the EX1 mode lottery, and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 0 or 2) based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-1 shown in Figure 26 (E) is a lottery that is held especially while in game modes 0 to 2 in order to determine the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT is won, and one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 is selected based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-2 shown in Figure 26 (F) is a lottery that is held while in game modes 3 to 5 in order to determine the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT wins, just like AT mode lottery-1, and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode lottery-3 shown in Figure 26 (G) is the same as AT mode lottery-1 and -2, in that it determines the next AT mode number (a number that controls the likelihood of winning in the lottery during the AT) when an AT is won, and is held after all reels have stopped (also called "after all stops"), and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the condition device group J number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 1 drawing shown in Figure 27 (A) is a drawing that is held during play mode 1 or 4 and after a full stop in order to determine the type of AT (red seven or gold seven), and one of the seven numbers 0 to 2 is selected based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven 2 drawing shown in FIG. 27(B) is a drawing that is conducted, like the Seven 1 drawing, during game mode 2 or 5 in order to determine the type of AT, and selects one of the Seven numbers 0 to 2 based on the condition device group F number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group F number is as shown in the figure.

The AT mode rewrite lottery shown in FIG. 27(C) is a lottery to rewrite the AT mode number after the AT ends, and selects one of the AT mode numbers 0 to 5 based on the value of the advantageous zone clear counter (less than 300 or 300 or more). The winning number corresponding to each advantageous zone clear counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Loop lottery shown in Figure 27 (D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to continue the Red Seven, and selects either a winning number (1) or a losing number (0) based on the loop number (the number that controls the continuation rate of the Red Seven). The number of winning numbers corresponding to each loop number is as shown in the figure.

The Gold Seven Loop lottery shown in FIG. 27(E) is a lottery to decide whether or not to continue with Gold Seven, and selects either a winning number (1) or a losing number (0). The winning numbers assigned to winning numbers (1) and losing numbers (0) are as shown in the figure.

The Gold Seven Loop Rewrite Lottery shown in FIG. 27(F) is a lottery for rewriting the continuation rate of Gold Seven, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group E number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The add-on mode lottery shown in Figure 27 (G) is a lottery to determine the add-on mode number during the AT, and selects one of the add-on mode numbers 0 to 2 (actually 1 or 2). The winning number assigned to each add-on mode number is as shown in the figure.

The bell count change lottery shown in FIG. 28(A) is a lottery for rewriting the number of bells, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the value of the bell count counter. The number of wins corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 1 lottery shown in Figure 28 (B) is a lottery to decide whether or not to add to the AT stock number, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Stock 2 drawing shown in FIG. 28(C) is the same as the Seven Stock 1 drawing, A
This is a lottery to decide whether to add the T stock number or not, and either a win (1) or a loss (0) is selected based on the condition device group E number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group E number is as shown in the figure.

The effect lever wait lottery shown in FIG. 28(D) is a lottery to decide whether or not to perform a fake wait as a freeze, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group J number. The number of wins corresponding to each condition device group J number is as shown in the figure.

The AT Cycle Lottery-1 shown in Figure 29 (A) is a lottery that is held when the AT mode number is 1 or 2 in order to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT (the number of BB operations required to go from game mode 3 via game modes 7 and 4 to return to game mode 3) at the end of the AT, and selects one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) based on the value of the bell count counter. The winning number corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The AT Cycle Lottery-2 shown in FIG. 29(B) is the same as the AT Cycle Lottery-1, and is a lottery held when the AT mode number is 3 or 4, in order to determine the number of stay cycles during the AT at the end of the AT. Based on the value of the bell count counter, one of the stay cycle numbers 0 to 3 (actually 1 to 3) is selected. The winning number corresponding to each bell count counter value is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 1 lottery-1 shown in Figure 29 (C) is a lottery that is held especially when the AT mode number is 1 to 3 to determine whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The Pullback 1 Draw-2 shown in FIG. 29(D) is the same as the Pullback 1 Draw-1 Draw-1, and is a draw that is held especially when the AT mode number is 4 to determine whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The Pullback 1 Draw-3 shown in Figure 30 (A) is the same as Pullback 1 Draw-1-1 and -2, and is a draw that is held especially when the AT mode number is 5 to determine whether or not the AT will be won again after the AT has ended, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the condition device group C number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each condition device group C number is as shown in the figure.

The pullback 2 lottery shown in Figure 30 (B) is a lottery to determine whether or not you will win the AT again after the number of stay cycles during the AT becomes 0, and selects either a win (1) or a loss (0) based on the AT mode number. The number of winning entries corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The AT cycle preferential game number lottery shown in Figure 30 (C) is a lottery that determines the number of games (also called the "preferential state game number") that will be set to a specified preferential state after the AT ends, and selects one of the preferential state game numbers 0, 10, 20, or 30 based on the AT mode number. The winning number of settings corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The seven table 1 drawing shown in Figure 31 (A) is a drawing to decide the seven table number (the number that manages the table that decides the continuation rate during red seven), and selects one of the seven table numbers 0 to 15 based on the AT mode number. The winning number corresponding to each AT mode number is as shown in the figure.

The Seven Table 1 drawing shown in FIG. 31(B) is a drawing to determine the Seven Table number, just like the Seven Table 1 drawing, and selects one of the Seven Table numbers 0 to 15 based on the condition device group G number. The winning number corresponding to each condition device group G number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 1 Draw-1 shown in Figure 32 (A) is a draw for the first time, which is conducted especially when the game mode is 0 to 2, to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 based on the CU rank number (a number that manages the ease of counting up). The winning number corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

Like Bell Number 1 Draw-1, Bell Number 1 Draw-2 shown in Figure 32(B) is the first draw to determine the number of bells, particularly when the game mode is 4 or 5, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 based on the CU rank number. The winning numbers corresponding to each CU rank number are as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 2 lottery shown in Figure 32 (C) is a lottery for the second or subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20 based on the CU rank number. The winning number corresponding to each CU rank number is as shown in the figure.

The Bell Number 3 drawing shown in FIG. 32(D) is the same as the Bell Number 2 drawing, and is a drawing for the second or subsequent times to determine the number of bells, and selects one of the bell numbers 0 to 4, 6, 10, 11, or 20. The winning numbers assigned to each bell number are as shown in the figure.

Returning to FIG. 21, the random number generation/import means 117 is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61, clock pulse generator 64, frequency divider 65, random number generator 66, and random number import circuit 67, and generates and imports random numbers used in various lotteries. In this embodiment, it has four 16-bit random number means (4ch: ch is an abbreviation for "channel") capable of generating a random number sequence with a maximum value range of "0 to 65535", and four 8-bit random number means (4ch) capable of generating a random number sequence with a maximum value range of "0 to 255", each of which is capable of generating a random number sequence independently. The random numbers generated by these 16-bit random number means or 8-bit random number means are updated based on the clock signal generated by the clock pulse generator 64, and are therefore also referred to as hardware random numbers (hard random numbers). Although not shown, this embodiment has a random number generation means other than the random number generation/import means 118. This random number generation means is composed of the above-mentioned CPU 61 and RAM 63, and has a random number means capable of generating a sequence of random numbers within a predetermined numerical range as random numbers to be used for determining roles, etc. These random numbers are also called software random numbers (soft random numbers) because they are updated based on a program.

(Means constituting the game progress management means 130)
The received medal management means 131 is configured to control whether the actually accepted medals (which are medals guided to the acceptance passage and detected by the accepted medal sensor 28b, and are also referred to as "accepted medals") among the medals inserted from the medal insertion port 21 (also referred to as "inserted medals") are to be directly bet or credited. In this embodiment, when the number of bets does not reach the maximum bet allowable number (the number of bets required to execute a game (prescribed number "3")), the accepted medals are to be directly bet, and when the number of bets reaches the maximum bet allowable number and the number of credits does not reach the maximum credit allowable number (for example, "50"), the accepted medals are to be credited.

The accepted medal management means 131 is also configured to perform automatic betting processing (processing to set a state in which the same number of game medals as the number of bets in the previous game are bet without reducing the number of game medals held by the player) in a game that has been set to the replay operation state. Even in the replay operation state, if the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowable number, the inserted game medals are accepted as game medals to be credited (it may be possible to not accept them). If the number of bets has reached the maximum bet allowable number and the number of credits has also reached the maximum credit allowable number, the inserted game medals are not accepted and are returned.

The role determination means 132 is configured to perform a role determination process (internal lottery) to select at least one role determination result from multiple role determination results (condition devices) based on a preset role determination probability (lottery setting number) when the start lever 25 is operated (when the operation of the start lever 25 is validly accepted). This role determination process is performed using a random number generated by the above-mentioned 16-bit random number means. Specifically, when the start lever 25 is operated, the random number generated by the 16-bit random number means is captured. Then, when performing the role determination process, the captured random number is read, a predetermined software random number is added to the read random number, and the condition device is selected using the random number after the addition. It is also possible to select a condition device using the read random number without adding the predetermined software random number.

The role determination process is performed by referring to a predetermined role determination table (not shown). The role determination table is configured such that the lottery placement number data corresponding to each condition device is stored in a predetermined storage area (multiple addresses) in ROM 62 according to the set value. When one or more condition devices are selected in the role determination process, the game role corresponding to the selected condition device becomes the role that is allowed to be established in that game. Information on the selected condition device (winning role) is stored in a predetermined storage area of RAM 63, but if the information on the winning item stored in one game is information on the winning of a small role or a replay role, it is cleared (reset to "0") after the end of that game, regardless of whether or not these small roles or replay roles are established. On the other hand, if the BB role is won but not established, information on the winning of the BB role is stored and not cleared until the BB role is established.

The performance group number determination means 133 is configured to perform a process of associating a performance group number with the condition device selected by the role determination process. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 33, the performance group A group number (0 or 1) is associated with the bonus condition device, and the performance group B group number (0 to 29) is associated with the winning replay condition device. For example, as shown in FIG. 33(A), the performance group A group number 1 is commonly associated with the 1st type BB-A condition device and the 1st type BB-B condition device. Also, as shown in FIG. 33(B), the performance group B group number 13 is commonly associated with the winning-A1 to A12 condition devices, in which differences in the push order can cause advantages or disadvantages in the game (effect on ball payout) or differences in the number of game medals paid out (number of medals won), and the performance group B group number 14 is commonly associated with the winning-B1 to B12 condition devices.

In contrast, for replay-A to L condition devices that correspond to the winning of replay roles in which differences in the pressing order do not affect the game's advantage or disadvantage (no effect on the number of balls issued), and winning replay condition devices that correspond to the winning of minor roles (winning roles) in which differences in the pressing order do not affect the number of game medals paid out (number won) or in which the number of game medals that can be won is small (for example, less than the specified number of bets), different performance group B numbers are associated with each individual condition device.

Returning to Figure 21, the reel control means 134 is configured to, when the start lever 25 is operated (the operation of the start lever 25 is validly accepted), confirm that the minimum play time has elapsed, and then start rotating the reels 3a to 3c, and after all the reels that have started to rotate have reached a constant speed rotation state, when the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are operated in sequence (the operations of each of the stop switches 26a to 26c are validly accepted), stop the rotation of each of the corresponding reels 3a to 3c in sequence.

The spinning stop control of each reel 3a to 3c is performed according to the operation mode (push order, operation timing, etc.) of the stop switches 26a to 26c based on each stop table (not shown) that is set according to the role determination results selected by the role determination process. Each reel 3a to 3c is controlled so that each reel 3a to 3c stops within a predetermined allowable stop time (e.g., 190 milliseconds) from the timing when the stop switches 26a, 26b, 26c are operated (within the range of the maximum number of slipping frames, 5 frames, in this embodiment).

In other words, if a specific game role is selected as a role that is allowed to be achieved as a result of the role determination process, the reels 3a to 3c are controlled to stop so that the symbols corresponding to the selected game role are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29 as much as possible within the allowable stop time, and in the case of a miss, none of the symbols corresponding to the game roles are stopped and displayed on the pay line 29. Note that if a replay role or small role is won while a special role is being carried over, or if a special role and a replay role or small role are both won, the reel spin stop control may be performed with priority given to the replay role, which is set in the order of replay role, special role, and small role (small role may be given priority over special role).

The stop display symbol determination means 135 is configured to determine which symbol is stopped and displayed on the reels 3a to 3c based on the timing when the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated, and to determine whether a game role is established based on the combination of symbols determined to be stopped and displayed on the pay line 29. Note that the determination of the symbols stopped and displayed does not necessarily have to be performed after all the reels have stopped. For example, when performing reel stop control such that the number of sliding frames is determined at the time the stop switch is operated, the symbol that will ultimately be stopped and displayed on the pay line 29 may be determined based on the symbol located on the pay line 29 at that time and the number of sliding frames, and the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the pay line 29 before all the reels have stopped may be determined based on the determination result.

When a minor win is achieved, the payout medal management means 136 pays out a number of game medals according to the achieved minor win by a stored addition payout that adds to the number of credits if the number of credits has not reached the maximum credit allowable number, or by an actual payout that drives the hopper 50 via the hopper drive circuit 52 if the number of credits has reached the maximum credit allowable number. In addition, when a settlement operation (pressing the settlement switch 24) is validly accepted, the payout medal management means 136 drives the hopper 50 to pay out the number of game medals that were bet or the number of game medals that were credited.

The blocker control means 137 is configured to output a blocker signal for controlling the above-mentioned solenoid 48, and switch the solenoid 48 between an ON state (a state in which game media can be received) and an OFF state (a state in which game media cannot be received). When the solenoid 48 is in the OFF state, game medals inserted into the medal insertion port 21 are guided to the return passage and returned. However, the insertion of game medals is detected by the inserted medal sensor 28a.

The display lamp control means 138 is configured to control the lighting and extinguishing of the above-mentioned various display lamps (MAX-BET switch display lamp 46a, BET lamp 46b, insert possible display lamp 46c, game start display lamp 46d, replay display lamp 46e, status display lamp 46f, number of times display lamp 46g, CRE lamp 46h, payout number display lamp 46j) via the display lamp control circuit 47. When the payout number display lamp 46j is made to function as a main side push order annunciator, the push order management means 139 controls the payout number display lamp 46j.

The push order management means 139 is configured to select an instruction number (any one of 0 to 6) corresponding to the push order to be notified, depending on the role determination result (condition device) selected by the role determination process. Instruction number 0 is selected when the push order is not to be notified, and instruction numbers 1 to 6 are selected when it is desired to notify the push order. In this embodiment, instruction number 1 corresponds to the push orders of "left center right", instruction number 2 corresponds to "left left center", instruction number 3 corresponds to "center left right", instruction number 4 corresponds to "center right left", instruction number 5 corresponds to "right left center", and instruction number 6 corresponds to "right center left".

The push sequence management means 139 is also configured to make the payout number display lamp 46j function as a main side push sequence indicator and perform push navigation (main side push navigation) by announcing the selected instruction number. This push navigation uses two 7-segment lamps (hereinafter sometimes abbreviated as "7-seg") provided on the payout number display lamp 46j to announce the navigation number. For example, the left 7-segment lamp displays "=", and the right 7-segment lamp displays the numerical value of the instruction number (for example, "2" for instruction number 2). The "=" displayed on the left 7-segment lamp is to distinguish it from when the payout number display lamp 46j displays the payout number. When navigation number 0 is selected, no display is made by the payout number display lamp 46j, but in another embodiment, "=" may be displayed on the left 7-segment display and "0" may be displayed on the right 7-segment display, or "0" may be displayed on both the left and right 7-segment displays, or "0" may be displayed on only one of the left or right 7-segment displays.

The condition device group number determination means 140 is configured to determine the condition device group number used to select the winning value in various lotteries according to the performance group A group number and the performance group B group number determined by the performance group number determination means 133. Specifically, the condition device group numbers are divided into 10 types from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number, and each combination of the performance group A group number and the performance group B group number is previously associated with each number value from the condition device group A number to the condition device group J number. The specific association is as shown in FIG. 34. For example, for the combination of the performance group A group number 1 and the performance group B group number 0, the condition device group A number 1, the condition device group B number 2, the condition device group C number 2, the condition device group D number 0, the condition device group E number 0, the condition device group F number 1, the condition device group G number 0, the condition device group H number 1, the condition device group I number 0, and the condition device group J number 1 are associated with each other. In addition, the notes column in the table in Figure 34 lists abbreviations that indicate the contents of each combination of performance group A group number and performance group B group number.

(Means constituting the main communication control means 150)
The control command transmitting means 151 is configured to transmit control commands including various information related to the game at a predetermined timing. For example, the control commands transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated include a control command including information indicating which game mode is set (also referred to as a "game mode command"), a control command including information indicating which RT state is set (also referred to as an "RT command"), and a control command including information indicating the replay operation state (also referred to as an "operation state command"). In addition, the control commands transmitted in response to the operation of the start lever 25 include, for example, a control command including instruction number information (also referred to as an "instruction number command"), a control command including information on the performance group number (performance group A number and performance group B number) (
In addition, control commands including information on set values, control commands including information on the values of various counters such as the bell count counter, control commands including information instructing the content of effects to be executed by the sub-control means, and control commands including information to be transmitted in a bonus game described below may be transmitted before the start lever 25 is operated, when the start lever 25 is operated, or at some other time.

In addition, the control command transmission means 151, when the minimum play time has elapsed, transmits a control command (also referred to as a "all reels start rotation command") including information indicating that all reels will start rotating before all reels start rotating. Furthermore, when the first stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reels for the first time) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "first stop acceptance command") including information indicating that the first stop operation has been accepted is transmitted, and when the first reel stop (stop of the reels corresponding to the first stop operation) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "first stop command") including information on the first reel stop is transmitted. Similarly, when the second stop operation (operation of the stop switch to stop the reels for the second time) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "second stop acceptance command") including information indicating that the second stop operation has been accepted is transmitted, and when the second reel stop (stop of the reels corresponding to the second stop operation) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as a "second stop command") including information on the second reel stop is transmitted. Similarly, when the third stop operation (finally the operation of the stop switch to stop the reels) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as the "third stop acceptance command") containing information indicating that the third stop operation has been accepted is sent, and when the third drum stop (stop of the reels corresponding to the third stop operation) is accepted, a control command (also referred to as the "third stop command") containing information on the third drum stop is sent. Furthermore, before the stop pattern determination, a control command (also referred to as the "all drum stop command") containing information on the stop of all drums is sent, and after the stop pattern determination, a control command (also referred to as the "payout number command") containing information on the payout number of game medals is sent. In addition, at a predetermined timing after all drums have stopped, a control command (also referred to as the "role determination result command") containing information on the role determination result (bonus condition device and winning replay condition device) is sent. Communication between the main control means 100 and the sub-control means 200 (sub-main control means 200A) is possible only in one direction, from the former to the latter.

The outer edge signal transmitting means 152 is configured to transmit an outer edge signal to an external device such as a data counter or hall computer when a predetermined game state is reached. In this embodiment, when the game mode 3 in the advantageous zone is in progress and a winning-A1 to A12 condition device or a winning-B1 to B12 condition device is selected, the outer edge signal is output when a situation occurs in which 15 game medals are paid out twice (consecutively). Such a situation can occur even when inside the BB or when not inside the BB (not inside the BB). If the outer edge signal is output only when such a situation occurs inside the BB, it is possible to determine that the game is inside the BB by the output of the outer edge signal. In contrast, in this embodiment, the outer edge signal is output when the above-mentioned situation occurs, whether inside the BB or not inside the BB. Therefore, even if the outer edge signal is output, it is difficult to reliably determine whether the game is inside the BB. However, the possibility of 15 game medals being paid out when not inside the BB is much lower than when inside the BB. Therefore, when an outer end signal is output, there is a high possibility that it was output inside the BB. Therefore, even if a player checks the number of times the outer end signal has been output using an external device, etc., and judges that number to be the number of times the player has transitioned to inside the BB, that judgment will not deviate greatly from the actual situation (it is possible to ensure reliability when the outer end signal is interpreted as a signal indicating that the player is inside the BB).

<Function block of sub-control means>
The sub-control means 200 is composed of a sub-main control means (also referred to as the "first sub-control means") 200A that mainly manages (instructs) the lamp performances, image performances, and audio performances, and a sub-sub control means (also referred to as the "second sub-control means") 200B that mainly controls (executes) the image performances and audio performances.

The sub-main control means 200A is roughly divided into a presentation management means 210 and a sub-main communication control means 230. The presentation management means 210 is provided with a game presentation management means 211, an announcement presentation management means 212, and a lamp presentation control means 213, while the sub-main communication control means 230 is provided with a control command receiving means 231, a presentation command sending means 232, and a status command receiving means 233. Each of the above-mentioned means in the sub-main control means 200A is a functional representation of the hardware such as the sub-main CPU 71, ROM 72, RAM 73, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-main control board 70A shown in FIG. 2, and software such as a control program stored in the ROM 72.

(Means constituting the performance management means 210)
The game presentation management means 211 is configured to manage the timing of presentation of images and sounds (also called "game presentation") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B, mainly for the purpose of improving the interest and playability of the game, based on the control commands from the main control means 100 and the output signal from the decision button 55. Game presentation includes, for example, continuous presentation, single presentation, assist presentation, etc.

A continuous performance is a performance that continues over multiple play periods, and examples of this include displaying images that tell a continuous story over multiple play periods, mainly using the image display device 11, and displaying performance images that symbolize the player being in a specific play mode (for example, play mode 5). When performing continuous performances or single performances, which will be described below, performances using performance lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b or decorative lamps 32a, 32b may be performed, or a combination of performances using speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, 44b may be performed.

A one-off effect is an effect that is executed one-off when a specific situation arises during the progress of a game. For example, an example is an effect in which the image display device 11 displays an image suggesting the expected winning probability of a game role as each reel spins. Another example of a one-off effect is an effect in which, in a game in which the main control means 100 has decided to add the number of AT games (number of bells), the value of the number of AT games that has been decided to be added (for example, text such as "+10") is displayed on the display screen 11a of the image display device 11 when the player operates the decision button 55.

The assist effect is an effect to assist the player, and in this embodiment, the push navigation effect is mainly performed according to the information of the navigation number transmitted by the navigation number command from the main control means 100. This push navigation effect (sub-side push navigation) is a one-off effect that uses the image display device 11 as a sub-side push order display device to display the push order (correct push order) according to the navigation number to the player on the display screen 11a. In this embodiment, the RP navigation effect (sub-side RP navigation) corresponding to the above-mentioned RP navigation, the prize navigation effect (sub-side prize navigation) corresponding to the prize navigation, and the eye push navigation effect (sub-side eye push navigation) corresponding to the eye push navigation are executed.

A specific example of the push navigation effect (RP navigation effect, winning navigation effect) that notifies the push order is a mode in which numbers indicating the corresponding push order are displayed. For example, if the numbers "1" are attached to the left reel, "2" to the middle reel, and "3" to the right reel (these numbers are also called "reel numbers"), in the case of the "left first" push order, "1" is displayed at the bottom left of the display screen 11a, and in the case of the "middle left and right" push order, the numbers "2, 1, 3" indicating the push order are arranged from the left to the bottom of the display screen 11a to notify. That is, when displaying the reels from the first stop operation target to the third stop operation target, the display of the reel number that is the target of the first stop operation may be erased when the player operates the first stop switch according to the displayed push order, and the display of the reel number that is the target of the second stop operation may be erased when the player operates the next stop switch according to the displayed push order, and the display of the reel number that is the target of the third stop operation may be erased when the player operates the last stop switch.

In addition, if the player operates the stop switch in a different order from the displayed push order, the push navigation effect may be immediately terminated. Furthermore, when the push order is displayed, the sound "middle", the sound "left", and the sound "right" may be output from the speakers 15a, 15b, etc. in association with the next operation to be performed. Furthermore, the effect lamp 13a may be associated with "left", the effect lamp 12 with "middle", and the effect lamp 13b with "right", and may be made to light up or blink in association with the next operation to be performed. Also, a display for performing sub-side push navigation may be provided. For example, a display consisting of three 7-segment lamps arranged horizontally may be provided under the display window W, and in the case of the push order of "right-center-left", the numbers "3", "2", and "1" may be displayed on the left, center, and right 7-segment lamps, respectively.

The notification effect management means 212 is configured to manage the execution timing of the image and sound effects (hereinafter referred to as "notification effects") executed by the sub-sub control means 200B based on control commands from the main control means 100, mainly for the purpose of notifying the player of information related to the game. Examples of notification effects include an error notification effect that notifies the player of the occurrence of an error with text information such as "error occurred" and an effect that notifies the player of the preparation of an image when the power is restored after a power outage with text information such as "image preparation". Another example of a notification effect is an effect that displays an image containing text information (also referred to as "attention drawing image") to call the player's attention in order to prevent the player from becoming too absorbed in the game (addiction). Furthermore, when the decision button 55 is operated while not playing, a menu screen is displayed on the image display device 11, and various information related to the game and various settings related to the effects are possible according to the operation of the selection button 54 by the player.

The lamp effect control means 213 is configured to control various lighting effects using the effect lamps 12, 13a, 13b, 14a, 14b, the decorative lamps 32a, 32b, and the back lamps 38a to 38d. It is also configured to perform suggestive effects, which will be described later.

(Means constituting the sub-main communication control means 230)
The control command receiving means 231 is configured to receive control commands from the main control means 100 and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (for example, a command buffer for the received control commands).

The performance command transmission means 232 is configured to transmit a performance command including various information related to the performance (e.g., a performance command including image information) to the sub-sub control means 200B based on a control command from the main control means 100.

The status command receiving means 233 is configured to receive a status command (e.g., a status command including information that a reception error has occurred for a performance command) from the sub-sub control means 200B and store it in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 73 (e.g., a command buffer for the received status command).

In contrast to the sub-main control means 200A configured as described above, the sub-sub control means 200B is broadly divided into a presentation execution control means 250 and a sub-sub communication control means 270. The presentation execution control means 250 is provided with a game presentation execution control means 251 and a notification presentation execution control means 252, and the sub-sub communication control means 270 is provided with a presentation command receiving means 271 and a status command sending means 272. Note that each of the above-mentioned means in the sub-sub control means 200B is a functional representation of the hardware such as the sub-sub CPU 75, ROM 76, RAM 77, and electronic circuits arranged on the sub-sub control board 70B shown in FIG. 2, and the software such as the control program stored in the ROM 76.

(Means constituting the performance execution control means 250)
The game presentation execution control means 251 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc., based on presentation commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned game presentation.

The notification performance execution control means 252 is configured to control the image display device 11, speakers 15a, 15b, etc. based on performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A, and execute the above-mentioned notification performance.

(Means constituting the sub-sub communication control means 270)
The performance command receiving means 271 is configured to receive performance commands from the sub-main control means 200A and store them in a predetermined storage area such as the RAM 77 (for example, a command buffer for received performance commands).

The status command sending means 272 is configured to send the above-mentioned status command to the sub-main control means 200A.

The transmission of control commands from the control command transmission means 151, the transmission of performance commands from the performance command transmission means 232, and the transmission of status commands from the status command transmission means 272 are all performed by a serial communication method (parallel communication method may also be used). Each of the transmission means 151, 232, and 272 has a similar configuration, and is configured with a command buffer (also called "CB") as a storage area for temporarily storing commands to be transmitted, a command processing unit that performs processing such as writing and reading the commands to be transmitted, and a command transmission unit that transmits commands by serial communication.

The CB has multiple memory areas, each distinguished by an address, and is configured to be able to store one byte of command data in each memory area. The command processing unit is configured to generate command data to be sent and write it to the address area indicated by the write pointer of the CB, and also to read previously written command data from the address area indicated by the read pointer of the CB and write it to the TDR (transmit data register) of the command sending unit. The command sending unit is configured to transfer the command data written to the TDR to the TSR (transmit shift register), where it is converted to serial data and sent.

When using the parallel communication method, previously written command data is read from the address area indicated by the CB read pointer, and the command data is written to a specified output port (output port for sending to the sub-control means) for transmission. In this embodiment, one command is usually two bytes long (the checksum is one byte long). The communication method is asynchronous (start-stop synchronous), and has one stop bit and one parity bit (even parity) (the communication method and command structure can be changed as appropriate).

<Blocker operation status>
As described above, the blocker is moved between the medal non-receiving position and the medal receiving position by the elastic force of the spring and the solenoid 48. Hereinafter, the operation state of the blocker will be described with reference to Figs. 35 to 38. Here, Fig. 35 is a plan view showing the appearance of the blocker BLK in this embodiment. Fig. 36 shows the state where the blocker BLK is in the medal non-receiving position, and Fig. 36(A) shows the state where the medal passage MW through which the inserted medal M passes inside the slot machine 1 is viewed from above. Also, Fig. 36(B) shows the b-b' cross section in Fig. 36(A), and Fig. 36(C) shows the c-c' cross section in Fig. 36(A). It should be noted that Fig. 36(A) shows the a-a' cross section in Fig. 36(C).

Figure 37 shows the blocker BLK in a position where it can accept a medal, and Figure 37(A) shows the medal passage MW through which an inserted medal M passes inside the slot machine 1, as viewed from above. Figure 37(B) shows the b-b' cross section in Figure 37(A), and Figure 37(C) shows the c-c' cross section in Figure 37(A). Figure 37(A) also shows the a-a' cross section in Figure 37(C). Figure 38 is a schematic diagram showing chattering that occurs when the blocker is activated. Note that the structure for slidably supporting the blocker BLK is omitted from Figures 36 to 38.

As shown in FIG. 35, the shape of the blocker BLK in this embodiment is composed of a rectangular plate-shaped member PLT, a U-shaped frame body F fixed to the plate-shaped member PLT, and a magnetic body MG attached to the frame body F and in close contact with the solenoid 48 in the ON state. The blocker BLK also has an opening OP formed by the plate-shaped member PLT and the frame body F. As described above, a gaming medal inserted from the medal insertion port 21 passes through the medal passage inside the slot machine 1, reaches the branch point between the receiving passage and the return passage, and is guided by the blocker BLK to either the receiving passage or the return passage.

Specifically, when the solenoid 48 is in the OFF state, as shown in FIG. 36(A), the magnetic body MG of the blocker BLK is separated from the solenoid 48, and the elastic force of the spring (not shown) keeps the blocker BLK in a position where it cannot accept medals. As a result, as shown in FIG. 36(B), the opening OP of the blocker BLK overlaps with the position of the drop hole HL provided in the medal passage MW, so that the game medals flowing down the medal passage MW fall from the opening OP and the drop hole HL at the branching point and reach the return passage, as shown in FIG. 36(C).

On the other hand, when the solenoid 48 is turned ON, the blocker BLK is attracted to the solenoid 48 against the elastic force of the spring, and the blocker BLK moves to the medal receiving position as shown in FIG. 37(A). As a result, the plate-shaped member PLT of the blocker BLK blocks the drop hole HL of the medal passage MW as shown in FIG. 37(B) and (C), and the inserted game medal flows down the upper surface of the plate-shaped member PLT. Then, after passing the inserted medal sensors 28b and 28c, it flows down to the receiving passage. Note that when the solenoid 48 is turned OFF again from this state, the blocker BLK moves in a direction in which the magnetic body MB moves away from the solenoid 48 due to the elastic force of the spring, and the end surface BEF of the plate-shaped member PLD comes into contact with the contact surface BCF formed protruding from the medal passage, and the movement of the blocker BLK is stopped at the medal receiving non-receiving position. As a result, the opening OP of the blocker BLK reaches the position of the drop hole HL provided in the medal passage MW, and the game medal M that has flowed down the medal passage MW reaches the return passage from the drop hole HL.

Here, for example, when the blocker BLK is in the medal unacceptable position, the solenoid 48
The time from when the solenoid 48 is turned ON until the blocker BLK reaches the medal acceptable position is set to t1. In addition, the time from when the solenoid 48 is turned OFF until the blocker BLK reaches the medal unacceptable position while the blocker BLK is in the medal acceptable position is set to t2. In this embodiment, the time t1 is shorter than the time t2. In this way, by making the time from when the state where the game medal is not accepted (the game medium unacceptable state) to when the game medal is accepted (the game medium acceptable state) shorter than the time from when the game medium acceptable state to when the game medium unacceptable state is changed to the game medium unacceptable state, the blocker BLK can be moved to the medal acceptable position immediately when the slot machine 1 is controlled to a state where the game medal can be accepted. This allows the player to quickly prepare for starting the game, and prevents the player from returning the medal that he or she inserted to start the game against his or her will.

Note that time t2 may be configured to be shorter than time t1, for example, by increasing the elastic force of the spring. In this case, when the slot machine 1 is controlled to a state in which it cannot accept game medals, the blocker BLK can be immediately moved to a position in which game medals cannot be accepted, thereby preventing the swallowing of a game medal inserted just before the slot machine 1 is controlled to a state in which it cannot accept game medals.

In general reciprocating mechanisms, a method is used in which play is provided in the mechanical structure to create a time difference between the time for the forward movement of the actuating object and the time for the return movement. For example, if you want the time for the return movement to be longer than the time for the forward movement, when stress for the return movement acts on the actuating object, by providing play until the stress is applied to the actuating object, a delay will occur by the set amount of play, and the time for the return movement can be extended.

However, when the blocker BLK moves from a medal-receiving position to a medal-unreceiving position, and from a medal-unreceiving position to a medal-receiving position, chattering occurs in the blocker BLK. As a result, for example, when the solenoid 48 is turned off and the blocker BLK moves to a medal-unreceiving position, the end of the plate-shaped member PLT of the blocker BLK repeatedly enters and exits the drop hole HL in accordance with the vibration of the chattering. At this time, in this embodiment, even if the end of the plate-shaped member PLT of the blocker BLK is in a state where it has entered the drop hole HL the most when the vibration due to the chattering reaches its peak, the game medal M is configured not to pass through the branching part and flow down into the receiving passage (in other words, it is not in a state where the game medium can be received). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(A), chattering is suppressed so that the dimension of the opening width w1 of the drop hole HL when the end of the plate-shaped member PLT of the blocker BLK is inserted deepest into the drop hole HL is not greater than the thickness of the game medal M. The structure for suppressing chattering will be explained in detail later.

In this way, in this embodiment, even if the end of the plate-shaped member PLT blocks part of the drop hole HL due to chattering that occurs when the blocker BLK moves from a medal receiving position to a medal not receiving position, the inserted game medal will not flow down into the receiving passage, so it is possible to prevent the so-called medal from being swallowed.

Also, when the solenoid 48 is turned on and the blocker BLK moves to the medal receiving position, a gap is generated between the side wall of the medal passage NW and the end of the plate-shaped member PLT of the blocker BLK in accordance with the vibration of chattering. At this time, in this embodiment, even if the width of the above-mentioned gap becomes the largest at the peak of the vibration due to chattering, the game medal M does not pass through the drop hole and flow down to the return passage (in other words, the game medium is not unacceptable). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 38(B), the structure is such that chattering is suppressed so that the dimension of the maximum width w2 of the above-mentioned gap is not larger than the thickness of the game medal M. As a result, in this embodiment, even if a part of the drop hole HL is exposed due to chattering generated when the blocker BLK reaches the medal receiving position from the medal unacceptable position, the inserted game medal does not fall into the return passage, so that the game medal can be reliably received.

This time, an example of the structure of the blocker BLK that forms a flow path for medals when the game medium is accepted has been explained, but this is not limited to this. It is also applicable to a blocker BLK that has a structure in which a stopper member (not shown) appears and disappears in the medal flow path when the game medium is not accepted, to deflect the medal from the flow path and guide the medal to the return path, and that retreats the stopper member from the medal flow path when the game medium is accepted (see, for example, JP 2016-144496 A). Even in this type of blocker BLT, it is sufficient to implement a structure or measures that prevent the stopper member from retreating from the medal flow path due to chattering that occurs when the blocker BLK moves from a medal accepting position to a medal unacceptable position, or that prevent the stopper member from appearing and disappearing in the medal flow path to deflect the medal due to chattering that occurs when the blocker BLK moves from a medal unacceptable position to a medal accepting position.

<Modification>
The above-mentioned operation of the blocker by the solenoid and spring can also be applied to the operation of the opening and closing member in the attacka (big prize opening) of a pachinko game machine. Hereinafter, the operation of the opening and closing member in the attacka of this modified example will be described with reference to Figs. 39 to 41. Fig. 39 is a diagram showing a part of the game area of the pachinko game machine in this modified example (specifically, the lower right side of the game area). Fig. 40 is a diagram showing chattering that occurs when the opening and closing member is operated. Fig. 41 is a diagram showing a structure for suppressing chattering that occurs when the opening and closing member is operated. Note that in Figs. 39 to 41, the illustration of the solenoid and spring that open and close the opening and closing member 320, and the illustration of the structure for slidably supporting the opening and closing member 320 are omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39(A), the pachinko game machine 300 in this modified example has a large prize winning device 310 with two ball entrances (first ball entrance 312 and second ball entrance 314) inside, which is provided on the game board 301. An opening/closing member 320 that opens or closes the opening of the large prize winning device 310 is provided at the opening of the large prize winning device 310, and normally closes the opening of the large prize winning device 310 while protruding from the surface of the game board 301 due to the elastic force of a spring. For this reason, the game ball B cannot enter the first ball entrance 312 or the second ball entrance 314 inside the large prize winning device 310. For example, a part of the game ball B that flows into the game area PA from the right flow path 302 flows down toward the large prize winning device 310 while passing through the start gate 303. Then, of the game ball B that reaches the big prize device 310, some are discharged from the game area PA through the first outlet 304, but most flow down the top surface of the opening and closing member 320 and enter the starting prize hole 305 or the second outlet 306 located under the center of the game board 301.

In contrast, for example, when a big win game is started, the solenoid on the back of the big win device 310 is turned on, and the opening/closing member 320 is pulled into the back of the game board 301. This opens the opening of the big win port 310 as shown in FIG. 39(B), and the game ball B can enter the first ball entry port 312 or the second ball entry port 314 inside the big win port 310. That is, when the game ball B that flows into the game area PA from the right flow path 302 reaches the big win device 310, some of it is discharged from the game area PA through the first outlet 304, but most of the game ball B passes through the opening of the big win port 310 and enters the first ball entry port 312 or the second ball entry port 314 inside. Then, when the big win game ends, the solenoid described above turns off, and the elastic force of the spring causes the opening/closing member 320 to protrude from the surface of the game board 301 again, closing the opening of the big win opening 310.

Here, for example, when the opening/closing member 320 is in a closed state, the time from when the solenoid is turned on until the opening/closing member 320 is in an open state is t1. Also, when the opening/closing member 320 is in an open state, the time from when the solenoid is turned off until the opening/closing member 320 is in a closed state is t2. At this time, in this modified example, the time t1 is shorter than the time t2. In this way, by making the time from when the big winning device 310 goes from a state where it does not accept game balls (a state where it cannot accept game media) to a state where it accepts game balls (a state where it can accept game media) shorter than the time from a state where it can accept game media to a state where it cannot accept game media, in a big win game, the opening/closing member opens quickly at the start of each round and closes slowly at the end of each round. This reduces the amount of wasted balls during a big win game, and over-winning can be expected at the end of each round, reducing the sense of loss of game balls and increasing the expectation of over-winning, thereby improving the interest of the game.

Note that time t2 may be configured to be shorter than time t1, for example, by increasing the elastic force of the spring. In this case, the opening and closing member can be quickly closed when each round ends during a jackpot game, making it possible to keep the number of balls dispensed during the jackpot constant and reducing the risk of game balls getting caught in the opening and closing member when it closes at the end of the round, causing the opening and closing member to not close properly.

As shown in FIG. 38, chattering occurs when the blocker BLK moves between the medal receiving position and the medal not receiving position, but the same chattering also occurs in the opening and closing member 320 of the big prize device 310 described above. For example, when one round of a big prize game is started, a solenoid (not shown) provided on the back side of the big prize device 310 is turned on and the opening and closing member 320 moves from the closed position to the open position, the end of the opening and closing member 320 repeats intrusion and withdrawal into and from the opening AOP of the big prize device 310 in accordance with the vibration of the chattering. At this time, in this modified example, even if the end of the opening and closing member 320 is in the most intrusive state into the opening AOP when the vibration due to the chattering reaches its peak, it is configured not to prevent the game ball B from passing through the opening AOP (in other words, not to be in a state where the game medium cannot be received). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(A), chattering is suppressed so that the dimension of the width w1 of the opening AOP when the end of the opening/closing member 320 penetrates deepest into the opening AOP is not greater than the diameter of the game ball B. The structure for suppressing chattering will be described in detail later.

As a result, in this modified example, even if the width of the opening AOP of the large prize winning device 310 is narrowed due to chattering that occurs when the opening/closing member 320 moves from the closed position to the open position, the game ball B is not prevented from entering the large prize winning device 310, so the game ball can be reliably received.

In addition, when one round of the big win game ends, the solenoid (not shown) on the back side of the big win device 310 is turned off and the opening/closing member 320 moves from the open position to the closed position, a gap is generated between the end face AEF of the opening/closing member 320 and the abutment face ACF that forms the opening AOP of the big win device 310 and abuts against the end face AEF in accordance with the vibration of chattering. At this time, in this modified example, even if the width of the above-mentioned gap becomes the largest at the peak of the vibration due to chattering, the game ball does not pass through the opening AOP and enter the inside of the big win device 310 (in other words, it does not become in a state where the game medium can be received). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), the structure is designed to suppress chattering so that the dimension of the maximum width w2 of the gap generated between the end face AEF and the abutment face ACF does not become larger than the diameter of the game ball B.

Therefore, in this modified example, even if the opening AOP of the large prize device 310 cannot be completely closed by the opening/closing member 320 due to chattering that occurs when the opening/closing member 320 of the large prize device 310 moves from the open position to the closed position, the game ball B will not enter the inside of the large prize device 310, so so-called over-winning can be prevented.

Next, a structure for suppressing chattering that occurs when the above-mentioned opening/closing member 320 moves from the open position to the closed position will be described with reference to FIG. 41. As shown in FIG. 41(A), the end face AEF of the opening/closing member 320 has a semicircular cross section and protrusions APP that extend linearly in the thickness direction (in the paper, in the depth direction) of the opening/closing member 320, which are formed at equal intervals in the longitudinal direction of the opening/closing member 320. In addition, the contact surface ACF of the big prize device 310 has wedge-shaped grooves ADT formed of a surface perpendicular to the contact surface and an inclined surface linearly formed in the thickness direction (in the paper, in the depth direction) of the contact surface ACF. The grooves ADT are formed at equal intervals so as to face the protrusions APP in the longitudinal direction of the contact surface ACF.

As shown in FIG. 41(A), when one round ends during a big win game and the solenoid (not shown) that moved the opening/closing member 320 of the big prize device 310 to the open position is turned off, the opening/closing member 320 starts to move to the closed position by the elastic force of the spring (not shown). Then, as shown in FIG. 41(B), just before the end face AEF of the opening/closing member 320 and the abutment face ACF of the big prize device 310 abut, the top of the protrusion APP abuts the slope of the groove ADT. That is, the formation positions of the protrusion APP and the groove ADT are determined so that the top of the protrusion APP abuts the slope of the groove ADT. When the end face AEF of the opening/closing member 320 and the abutment face ACF of the big prize device 310 get closer to each other, the top of the protrusion APP advances along the slope of the groove ADT toward the back of the groove, which shifts the opening/closing member 320 slightly to the right in the figure. When the end surface AEF of the opening/closing member 320 comes into contact with the contact surface ACF of the big prize device 310, the entire protrusion APP fits into the groove ADT, as shown in FIG. 41(C).

In this way, when the opening/closing member 320 moves from the open position to the closed position, the opening/closing member 320 is shifted slightly horizontally just before the end face AEF of the opening/closing member 320 comes into contact with the abutment face ACF of the large prize winning device 310, dispersing the kinetic energy, thereby suppressing vibration of the opening/closing member 320 in the opening/closing direction due to chattering. Note that the protrusion APP shown in FIG. 41(A) may be formed on the end face EF shown in FIG. 37(B) and the groove ADT may be formed on the abutment face CF shown in FIG. 37(B) to suppress chattering that occurs when the blocker BLK moves from the medal receiving position to the medal not receiving position.

In the above-mentioned modified example, the opening is opened and closed by sliding the opening/closing member of the big prize device so that it protrudes from or retracts into the game board, but the operation of the opening/closing member is not limited to this. For example, the opening of the big prize device may be arranged parallel to the game board, and the bottom edge of the rectangular opening/closing member may be pivoted on the bottom edge of the opening so that it can be freely opened and closed (i.e., it operates like a swing door). In this case, when the opening/closing member is in the open position, it has the function of catching game balls that flow down and guiding them to the opening.

<<Various Performances>>
Next, the presentation executed in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 42 to 46.
<Suggestive performance>
(Designs used in the production)
As shown in FIG. 42(A), three display patterns, namely, display pattern GK1, display pattern GK2, and display pattern GK3, are drawn in the pattern display area DA1 (see also FIG. 1(A)) of the central panel. The display pattern GK1 is a pattern of three patterns, namely, "blue bar", "blue bar", and "red seven", on a background portion BK1.
Display design GK1 is a design in which three symbols, "black bar", "black bar" and "red seven", are arranged in this order from the left side on top of background section BK2. Display design GK3 is a design in which three symbols, ". ", ". " and "red seven", are arranged in this order from the left side on top of background section BK2.

Display design GK1 is a design that allows the player to know that it represents the corresponding pattern of BB role 1, "blue bar, blue bar, red seven," and display design GK2 is a design that allows the player to know that it represents the corresponding pattern of BB role 2, "black bar, black bar, red seven." On the other hand, display design GK3 is a design that reminds the player of a pattern combination in which "red seven" is located on the right side, for example, a pattern combination of "red seven, red seven, red seven." In addition, the background part BK3 of display design GK3 is colored in the same color or a similar color as the color of the pattern "red seven" (red). In addition, the background part BK1 of display design GK1 may be colored in the same color or a similar color as the color of the pattern "blue bar" (blue), and the background part BK2 of display design GK2 may be colored in the same color or a similar color as the color of the pattern "black bar" (black). Instead of the "red seven" symbol in display design GK3, a symbol not provided on the reel, such as a "☆" symbol, may be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 42(B), three "Red Seven" symbols are drawn in a horizontal line in the symbol display area DA2 (see also FIG. 1(A)) of the central panel, which makes the player aware of the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven". The symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" corresponds to the minor role 40 that is only established in RT2 (when BB is in operation), and in RT1 (inside BB), when a predetermined role determination result (for example, a winning-A1 to A12 condition device or a winning-B1 to B12 condition device) is selected, it is a symbol combination that may be displayed as a losing symbol if the symbol "Red Seven" is drawn in depending on the pressing order and pressing position.

On the rear side of the design display area DA1 shown in FIG. 42(A), multiple lighting lamps (not shown, also referred to as "design lighting lamps") are arranged at predetermined positions, and by turning on or blinking these design lighting lamps, the display designs GK1 to GK3 drawn on the central panel can be illuminated from the rear side of the central panel to make them stand out. The turning on and off of the design lighting lamps is controlled by the sub-control means.

(Suggested content)
In this embodiment, a suggestion effect (suggestion notification) is performed using a design lighting lamp. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests a pattern combination that the player should aim for by pressing the button, and as shown in FIG. 43, four types of suggestion effects, suggestion patterns 1 to 4, are performed. The suggestion pattern 1 is a suggestion effect in which two display designs GK1 and GK2 out of three display designs GK1 to GK3 are illuminated from the back side by a design lighting lamp to make them stand out. The suggestion pattern 2 is a suggestion effect in which only the display design GK3 out of three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by a design lighting lamp to make it stand out. The suggestion pattern 3 is a suggestion effect in which only the display design GK1 out of three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by a design lighting lamp to make it stand out. The suggestion pattern 4 is a suggestion effect in which only the display design GK2 out of three display designs GK1 to GK3 is illuminated from the back side by a design lighting lamp to make it stand out. In FIG. 43, the pattern whose frame is displayed with a dashed line indicates that it is illuminated from the back side.

The suggestive performance of the suggestive pattern 2 is basically performed when the BB is won in the state where the AT is won. Specifically, the suggestive performance of the suggestive pattern 2 is performed when the sub-control means receives the information (command) of the AT winning flag = 1 and the performance group A number 1 (indicating that the BB role 1 or the BB role 2 has won) from the main control means when the start lever is operated. By performing the suggestive performance of the suggestive pattern 2, the player can be encouraged to aim for the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" in the "right first" push order (because the symbol "Red Seven" is arranged on the right side in the display pattern GK3). By aiming for the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" by this suggestive performance, the corresponding symbols "Blue Bar, Blue Bar, Red Seven" of the BB role 1 and the corresponding symbols "Black Bar, Black Bar, Red Seven" of the BB role 2 will not be aligned, and thus the AT (game mode 3) can be transitioned to in the BB state.

In this way, when a special role that requires a certain amount of time to press the button to align the corresponding symbols on the pay line is selected and the player is unable to line up the corresponding symbols, the slot machine described in JP 2013-126497 A also shifts the player to a game state that is advantageous to the player. However, in conventional slot machines, when a special role is selected, a notification is given to indicate that the special role has been selected, so that the player can easily tell that a special role has been selected and can relatively easily line up the corresponding symbols of the special role. As a result, the shift to an advantageous game state may not be possible or may be delayed. Since the AT in the BB is a very advantageous game state for the player, the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 2 also serves to lead the player to an advantageous game state. When the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 2 is performed, a sound such as "Aim for the red seven" may be output.

The suggestive performance of the suggestive pattern 1 is basically performed when the BB is won without winning the AT. Specifically, the suggestive performance of the suggestive pattern 1 is performed when the sub-control means receives the information (command) of the AT winning flag = 0 and the performance group A number 1 (indicating that BB role 1 or BB role 2 has won) from the main control means when the start lever is operated. The suggestive performance of the suggestive pattern 1 is a performance in which it is clear that either BB role 1, whose corresponding pattern is the symbol combination "blue bar, blue bar, red seven", or BB role 2, whose corresponding pattern is the symbol combination "black bar, black bar, red seven", has won, but it is not clear which one has won. Therefore, by performing the suggestive performance of the suggestive pattern 1, it is possible to give the player the gameplay of thinking about which of BB role 1 and BB role 2 has won, and aiming for the corresponding pattern of the one he thinks is the one by pressing the button, which can improve the interest of the game. Also, when the suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 1 is performed, even if the player is good at pressing the buttons, there is about a half chance that the BB role will not be established and the player will be transferred to inside the BB. Therefore, the suggestion effect of suggestion pattern 1 also functions to adjust the ball payout rate in cases where the ball payout rate differs between inside the BB and when the BB is operating.

The suggestive performance of suggestive pattern 3 and the suggestive performance of suggestive pattern 4 are basically performed at a predetermined timing (for example, at the start of the reel rotation of the next game) after all the reels have stopped in the game in which the suggestive performance of suggestive pattern 1 has been performed. Specifically, after all the reels have stopped, the suggestive performance of suggestive pattern 3 is performed when the sub-control means receives information on bonus condition device number 1 (BB role 1 wins) from the main control means, and the suggestive performance of suggestive pattern 4 is performed when the sub-control means receives information on bonus condition device number 2 (BB role 2 wins) from the main control means. The suggestive performance of suggestive patterns 3 and 4 is a performance that shows which of BB role 1 and BB role 2 has won. Therefore, by performing the suggestive performance of suggestive patterns 3 and 4, the player can aim for the corresponding symbol of the winning BB role by pressing the button. The suggestive performance and the design (symbol combination) as described above may be displayed using the image display device 11.

In addition, conventionally, as described in, for example, JP 2012-135540 A,
It is also common to display the payout (the number of game values awarded, etc.) when a certain symbol combination is stopped and displayed on a panel member provided on the front door of a slot machine, with some symbol combinations being simplified and their payouts, and all symbol combinations that can be awarded with payouts are displayed on an image display screen along with their payouts. However, the symbol combinations displayed on the panel member of the front door or the image display screen in this way are limited to one type of bonus (e.g., the award of game values) awarded to a player when the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on an active line, and therefore have low interest for players. In contrast, the gaming machine of this embodiment performs an effect that suggests a symbol combination that the player should aim for by pressing the button by using the symbol combination drawn on the central panel, so that the interest of the player in the symbol combinations displayed at a predetermined position on the gaming machine can be increased.

<Slot machine performance>
In this embodiment, the red seven reel effect is performed as the reel effect performed during the freeze. The red seven reel effect is a reel effect that stops and displays three symbols "red seven" in the display window W, and is mainly performed when the AT is entered, specifically, when the BB is won in the AT winning state, and the suggestive effect of the suggestive pattern 2 is performed, but the symbol combination "red seven, red seven, red seven" cannot be stopped and displayed in the display window W at the timing of the player's eye-pressing. Note that even when the AT is entered, if the corresponding symbols "blue bar, blue bar, red seven" of the BB role 1 and the corresponding symbols "black bar, black bar, red seven" of the BB role 2 are stopped and displayed, the red seven reel effect is not performed. By performing such a red seven reel effect, even if the symbol "red seven" cannot be arranged by eye-pressing, the symbol "red seven" can be arranged and displayed. Therefore, the symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" can impress the player as a symbol combination that triggers a transition to game mode 3 in the BB state and the start of an AT game. The Red Seven reel effect is also executed when the next AT is continued after the end of one AT due to the existence of an AT stock.

In addition to the red seven reel effect, there is also a gold seven reel effect and a gold seven promotion reel effect. The gold seven reel effect is a reel effect in which three "gold sevens" are lined up and stopped within the display window W, and the gold seven promotion reel effect is a reel effect in which three "red sevens" are lined up and stopped within the display window W, and then the reel is rotated again to line up and stop the three "gold sevens" within the display window W.

(Display rate of matching red sevens)
In this embodiment, the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is stopped and displayed in the display window W when BB is not in operation (non-RT or RT1) when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won and when a reel performance is performed, and when BB is in operation, when small role 40 is won. Comparing when BB is in operation and when BB is not in operation, the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is displayed more frequently when BB is not in operation than when BB is in operation. Also, comparing when BB role 1 or BB role 2 is won and when a reel performance is performed, the symbol combination "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" is displayed more frequently when a reel performance is performed.

The symbol combination of "Red Seven, Red Seven, Red Seven" displayed in the symbol display area DA2 (also referred to as "Red Seven combination") has a different function when it is displayed in the display window W while BB is not in operation and when it is displayed in the display window W while BB is in operation. That is, the Red Seven combination displayed while BB is not in operation has a function of notifying the start of AT play, and the Red Seven combination displayed while BB is in operation has a function of notifying the establishment of a small role 40 (1-coin role). In this embodiment, the rate at which the Red Seven combination is displayed while BB is not in operation is higher than when BB is in operation, so that it is possible to strongly impress the player with the Red Seven combination as a symbol combination that triggers the start of AT play (a transition to an advantageous state). In addition, when BB1 or BB2 is won, the percentage of times that the player's eye press is successful and a red seven line is displayed due to the reel presentation is higher than the percentage of times that the player's eye press is unsuccessful and a red seven line is displayed. Therefore, even players who are not good at eye presses can accurately understand that AT play is about to begin (the current game state), allowing the game to proceed smoothly.

<Ending Production>
In this embodiment, the advantageous zone ends when the number of games played during the advantageous zone exceeds 1500 or the values of the net increase counter and the correction counter exceed their respective upper limits. If the advantageous zone ends without any warning, the player may become discouraged and lose motivation to play. Therefore, in this embodiment, an effect (also called an "ending effect") for informing the player of the end of the advantageous zone is performed using the image display device 11. Such an ending effect is also performed in conventional gaming machines. For example, in the slot machine described in JP 2018-796 A, when a predetermined condition (also called an "ending condition") is established during the advantageous zone, an ending effect is performed to notify the player that the advantageous zone will end, and the AT is not extended (added). On the other hand, in the slot machine described in JP 2018-126213 A, when the ending condition is established, an addition is performed by referring to a dedicated add-on table.

The ending effects in the conventional gaming machines described above were intended to notify the player that the end of the advantageous zone was approaching, and had little playability. Therefore, in the ending effects of this embodiment, the content of the effects changes in multiple ways depending on the progress of the game in the advantageous zone, and the player is given a bonus depending on how the changes occur. This makes it possible to interest the player in how the ending effects change, and to increase the enjoyment of the game. Specific examples of ending effects are described below with reference to Figures 44 and 45.

In the ending performance 1 shown in FIG. 44(A), the content of the performance changes according to the number of games in the advantageous zone (the number of games played since the transition to the advantageous zone), and the bonus is a suggestion of the setting value of the slot machine 1. In this ending performance 1, when the number of games in the advantageous zone is between 0 and 250, an image GZ1 is displayed on the image display screen 11a. The image GZ1 may be a still image or a moving image (the same applies to the other images GZ2 to GZ10). The displayed content is not particularly limited, but may suggest that the advantageous zone has started or display the expected number of game medals to be won. Next, when the number of games in the advantageous zone is between 251 and 500, the image GZ1 is switched to the image GZ2 or image GZ5 at a predetermined timing (for example, when a predetermined game role is won). The displayed content of the image GZ2 and the image GZ5 are different from each other.

In addition, when the number of games in the favorable zone is between 251 and 500, the image is switched at a predetermined timing. In this example, when image GZ2 is displayed, it is switched from image GZ2 to image GZ3 or image GZ6, and when image GZ5 is displayed, it is switched from image GZ5 to image GZ6 or image GZ8. Images GZ3, GZ6, and GZ8 each have different display content. In addition, when the number of games in the favorable zone is between 1001 and 1500, the image is switched at a predetermined timing. In this example, when image GZ3 is displayed, it is switched from image GZ3 to image GZ4 or image GZ7, and when image GZ6 is displayed, it is switched from image GZ6 to image GZ7 or image GZ9. In addition, when image GZ8 is displayed, it is switched from image GZ8 to image GZ9 or image GZ10.

The content suggested to the player varies depending on which of the images GZ4, GZ7, GZ9, and GZ10 is displayed. That is, the image GZ4 indicates that the setting value of the slot machine 1 may be setting 6 (suggesting setting 6), and the image GZ7 indicates that the setting value may be setting 3 or setting 6 (suggesting settings 3 and 6). In contrast, GZ9 and GZ10 do not suggest the setting value. How the images are switched is determined at a predetermined timing (for example, at the time of transition to the advantageous zone) by a lottery for the ending performance 1 shown in FIG. 46(A). In this lottery, one of eight image switching flows (also called "image transitions") is selected, and the selection probability is set to change depending on the setting value of the slot machine 1. For example, the probability that an image transition of GZ1→GZ2→GZ3→GZ4 will be selected is 0 for setting 1, 10/256 for setting 3, and 32/256 for setting 6.

Ending performance 2 shown in Figure 44 (B) is designed so that the content of the performance changes depending on the value of the correction counter, and the image switching flow and bonuses are as shown in the figure. Also, the image transition in ending performance 2 is determined by a lottery for ending performance 2 shown in Figure 46 (B). Image GZ4 in this ending performance 2 indicates that the setting is definitely 6 (setting 6 confirmed), and is more reliable for players than image GZ4 (suggesting setting 6) in ending performances 1 and 3.

Ending performance 3 shown in Figure 45 (A) is designed so that the content of the performance changes depending on the number of winnings (difference in number of coins) during the advantageous zone, and the image switching flow and benefits are as shown in the figure. Also, the image transition in ending performance 2 is determined by a lottery for ending performance 3 shown in Figure 46 (C).

In the ending performance 4 shown in FIG. 45(B), the content of the performance changes according to the awarded point value during the advantageous zone, and the image switching flow and the benefits are as shown in the figure. In addition, the image transition in the ending performance 2 is determined by the drawing for the ending performance 4 shown in FIG. 46(D). The image GZ4 in this ending performance 4 indicates that the setting is definitely 6 (setting 6 confirmed), and is more reliable for the player than the image GZ4 in the ending performances 1 and 3. The awarded point value means the number of some kind of prize-like benefit (e.g., wallpaper data, etc.) other than game medals that is awarded to the player according to the result of the role drawing during the game (which may be limited to during bonus play or AT play). In addition, the advantageous zone may be configured to end when the awarded point value exceeds an upper limit value (e.g., 10,000).

In ending effects 1 to 4, the image is switched based on one variable (the number of games in the advantageous zone or the correction counter value) that changes during the advantageous zone, but the image may be switched based on multiple variables (for example, the number of games in the advantageous zone and the correction counter value, or the correction counter value and the awarded point value). When switching images based on multiple variables, the image may be switched based on the variable that reaches the timing for image switching first, or one of the variables may be prioritized. For example, when switching images based on two variables, the number of balls acquired and the awarded point value, the number of balls acquired, which has a higher relevance to the balls issued, may be prioritized for image switching. In addition, the content of the bonus given to the player depending on the result of the ending effect is not limited to a set value suggestion, and can be changed as appropriate.

<Game restart performance>
In this embodiment, the slot machine 1 is in a game standby state when the player is not playing a game, and when the slot machine 1 is in a game standby state, if the player performs a predetermined operation required to play a game, a game restart effect is executed. The game restart effect executed in this embodiment will be described below with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, the player can select a character (hereinafter, also referred to as a "character for presentation") that appears in the presentation displayed on the image display device 11 during gameplay. The selection of the character for presentation is performed, for example, by operating the decision button 55 while not playing a game, displaying a menu screen on the image display device 11, and when the "character selection" item displayed on the menu screen is selected, a character selection screen such as that shown in FIG. 47(A) is displayed on the display screen 11a. This character selection screen displays five characters, C1 to C5, and only the selected character is displayed, while the silhouettes of characters that are not selected are displayed. Here, the character selection screen shown in FIG. 47(A) shows the state in which character C3 has been selected (only the outline of character C3 is shown in the figure).

Each time the player operates the right button 54R or left button 54L of the selection buttons 54, the selected character (i.e. the character that switches from a silhouette to normal display) shifts in the direction of the button operated by the player. Then, when the decision button 55 is operated with the character the player desires selected, the character selection screen closes and the display on the display screen 11a returns to the display during gameplay. As a result, in a specified effect that is executed during gameplay (for example, an effect executed when transitioning to an advantageous state such as a bonus game or AT), the effect is performed by the character selected on the character selection screen.

In this embodiment, during normal play when the player is not in an advantageous position, (i) when all reels 3a, 3b, and 3c stop, the timer starts counting, and when a predetermined time has elapsed and no medals have been inserted (the 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, or a gaming medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 21), and (ii) when the player operates the settlement switch 24 and all credited medals are paid out, the slot machine 1 enters a standby state. In this standby state, as shown in FIG. 47(B), an image indicating that the game is in standby is displayed on the display screen 11a, and predetermined BGM (background music) is played from the speakers 15a, 15b and 44a, 44b.

When the player performs a predetermined operation required to play the game in this state, specifically, by inserting a medal (operating the 1-BET switch 22 or MAX-BET switch 23, or inserting a game medal into the medal insertion slot 21), the sub-control means 200 executes the game restart presentation shown in FIG. 47(C). This game restart presentation is performed by the character selected on the character selection screen shown in FIG. 47(A), and FIG. 47(C) illustrates the game restart presentation when character C3 is selected.

In the game restart presentation shown in FIG. 47(C), immediately after inserting a medal, the speaker 15a, 15b and 44a, 44b outputs the line "Let's do our best" in a voice corresponding to the character C3. The display screen 11a also switches from the game standby image shown in FIG. 47(B) to an image of the character C3 (only the outline is shown in FIG. 47(C)) and a speech bubble BLM containing the text "Let's do our best!!" Then, after the sound of the game restart presentation is output, the game restart presentation ends when a predetermined time has elapsed, and the image of the game restart presentation displayed on the display screen 11a switches to the presentation image for normal play.

Here, the sound output in the game restart performance and the image displayed on the display screen 11a are common to all set values, so that the player cannot determine or guess the set value from the content of the game restart performance. Also, the game restart performance may be executed with a predetermined probability, rather than necessarily being executed when a predetermined operation required for executing the game is performed during game standby, but in this case, it is desirable that the probability of execution is constant regardless of the set value.

In this embodiment, during play, a performance suggesting a set value may be performed, such as the ending performance described above, but such a performance suggesting a set value is not executed when play is resumed from a game standby state. In other words, the setting value is not suggested in a performance executed when play is not being performed. Therefore, since the player cannot determine or guess the setting value before play is performed, for example, if a low setting value is set in the gaming machine, there is no risk of the player's motivation to play being reduced before play is actually performed. In addition, if a player can easily guess the setting by performing the action from the game standby state to the execution of the game resume performance multiple times before play is performed, the player will confirm that a high setting value has been set before playing, which may result in a loss of profits for the gaming facility, but such a situation can be avoided.

A similar effect can be performed in pachinko machines. For example, the probability of winning a jackpot can be set in multiple ways by the game store staff, and an effect suggesting the currently set probability of winning a jackpot can be performed at the end of a jackpot game. On the other hand, a timer starts timing when the fluctuation of so-called special or decorative symbols stops, and if a predetermined operation required to execute the game, specifically, turning the handle of the launching device for the game balls (i.e., performing an operation to launch the game balls) or touching the handle of the launching device, is not performed after a predetermined time has elapsed, the machine is configured to transition to a game standby state. During the game standby state, an image indicating that the game is in standby, such as that shown in FIG. 47(B), can be displayed on an image display device provided in the approximate center of the game board of the pachinko machine, and predetermined background music can be output from the speaker.

Then, when a predetermined operation required to execute the game is performed during game standby, a predetermined character executes a game restart performance as shown in FIG. 47(C). At this time, the sound output in the game restart performance and the image displayed on the image display device are common to all jackpot winning probabilities, so that the player cannot determine or guess the currently set jackpot winning probability from the content of the game restart performance. In addition, the performance suggesting the jackpot winning probability as described above is configured to be executed when the game is resumed from the game standby state. By configuring in this way, the currently set jackpot winning probability cannot be determined or guessed by the player before the game is executed, so that there is no risk of the player losing motivation to play before the game is actually played, even if the jackpot winning probability set in the pachinko game machine is low. In addition, if a player easily guesses the probability of winning a jackpot by repeatedly performing the action from the game standby state to executing the game restart performance before playing a game, the player will play the game only after confirming that a high probability of winning has been set, which may result in a loss of profits for the gaming facility, but this can be avoided.

In addition, in slot machines and pachinko machines equipped with a performance device (hereinafter also referred to as a "movable role") that is mechanically moved by a driving source such as a motor, if the movable role moves from its initial position in front of the display device 11a and then transitions to a game standby state while stopped, when a specific operation required to execute the game is performed, a game restart performance may be performed and the movable role may be operated to return to its initial position.

In addition, when the game is switched to a game standby state in a state advantageous to the player, such as during AT, and a predetermined operation required for playing the game is performed thereafter, the game restart effect may not be executed. This allows the manager of the game facility to easily determine whether the current state is advantageous or not.

<Pseudo light guide plate effect>
Some conventional slot machines have a light guide plate installed in front of the screen of the mounted image display device, and in order to heighten the player's expectations, light is irradiated onto the light guide plate for a short period of time to make the design drawn on the light guide plate (design that is difficult to see when light is not irradiated) stand out, creating an effect that gives an impact to the player (hereinafter referred to as a "light guide plate effect"). In this embodiment, an effect that exerts a visual effect similar to that of the light guide plate effect is performed only by the display of the image display device. Hereinafter, an effect that exerts a visual effect similar to that of the light guide plate effect only by the display of the image display device is referred to as a "pseudo light guide plate effect".

When an image is displayed on the image display device 11 in the pseudo light guide plate performance of this embodiment, multiple virtual layers are provided, and the individual images displayed on each layer are superimposed and displayed on the display screen 11a. These multiple layers have a concept of upper and lower, and the higher the layer in the multiple stacked layers, the closer it is to the front (the side closer to the viewer of the screen). Therefore, if the light transmittance of the image displayed on the higher layer is 0, the image displayed on the layer located below it will be hidden by the image of the higher layer (it will not be displayed on the display screen).

For example, as shown in Figure 48 (A), assume that a battle performance is taking place on the display screen 11a during the AT. In the image relating to the battle performance shown in this figure (hereinafter also referred to as the "battle performance image"), a battle is taking place between the player's character BC1 and the enemy character BC2, and the number of games remaining in the AT (remaining: 2G) is displayed in the upper left of the display screen 11a, and the net increase in the number of coins during the AT (TOTAL: 150 coins) is displayed in the lower right. Figure 48 (B) shows a pseudo light guide plate image (an image displayed as if it were a design drawn on a light guide plate) superimposed on this battle performance image.

The pseudo light guide plate image shown in this figure is composed of light-transmitting areas LP and non-light-transmitting areas PLC. The light-transmitting areas LP are black in color and have a certain light transmittance, so that the image displayed on the lower layer can be seen through the light-transmitting areas LP. On the other hand, the non-light-transmitting areas PLC are white in color and form a design resembling an angry face. The non-light-transmitting areas PLC have a light transmittance of 0, so the parts of the image displayed on the lower layer that overlap with the non-light-transmitting areas PLC cannot be seen.

Figure 48 (C) shows a state in which the pseudo light guide plate image shown in Figure 48 (B) is displayed in a layer higher than the layer in which the battle effect image shown in Figure 48 (A) is displayed. As shown in this figure, the battle effect image can be seen in the light-transmitting area LP shown in Figure 48 (B), but the battle effect image cannot be seen in the non-light-transmitting area PLC. In this way, rather than switching the effect image that was previously displayed to another effect image, the display of the effect image that was previously being executed is maintained while another effect image is superimposed, and in addition, the visibility of the effect image that was previously being executed is reduced (making it difficult to see) and the superimposed effect image stands out (making it easier to see), thereby creating an impactful effect.

In addition, by forming the non-light-transmitting area PLC in the pseudo light guide plate image at a position that does not overlap with the display of the number of games remaining in the AT game and the net increase in the number of coins during the AT, which are included in the battle effect image, the player can visually confirm information of high interest to the player even during the execution of the pseudo light guide plate effect. On the other hand, the non-light-transmitting area PLC may be displayed at a position that overlaps with the display of the number of games remaining in the AT game and the net increase in the number of coins during the AT. In this case, the non-light-transmitting area PLC
Since the LC is preferentially displayed (in other words, the display of the number of remaining games in the AT game, etc. is hidden by the non-light-transmitting area PLC), it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily concentrate on the pseudo light guide plate presentation. For example, in a situation in which the number of remaining games in the AT game is small, the player may be anxious that the advantageous state will soon end and may not be able to concentrate on the currently displayed presentation, but even in such a case, it is possible to create a situation in which the player can easily concentrate on the pseudo light guide plate presentation.

In the pseudo light guide plate presentation shown in FIG. 48(C), the color of the light-transmitting area LP is black and the color of the non-light-transmitting area PLC is white, but these colors may be different depending on the expectation of the advantageous game being awarded. Here, the "advantageous game" and the "expectation of awarding" will be explained in detail later. Note that it is not limited to the color of the light-transmitting area LP and the non-light-transmitting area PLC that is different depending on the expectation of the advantageous game being awarded, but the size of the design formed by the non-light-transmitting area PLC may also be different. For example, three sizes of the angry face shown in FIG. 48(B) may be prepared, large, medium, and small, so that the larger the face is displayed, the higher the expectation of the advantageous game being awarded. Furthermore, the expectation of the advantageous game being awarded may be expressed by a combination of the color of the non-light-transmitting area PLC and the size of the design (here, the face). For example, if the non-transmitting region PLC can be displayed in red or blue, and the size of the design can be displayed as large, medium, or small, the degree of expectation can be determined as follows: blue [small] < blue [medium] < red [small] < blue [large] < red [medium] < red [large] (the numbers in [ ] indicate the size of the design).

The light transmittance in the light-transmitting region LP does not need to be uniform as in the pseudo light guide plate image shown in FIG. 48(B), and multiple regions with different light transmittances may be provided. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 49(A), a light-transmitting region LP2 with a light transmittance lower than that of the light-transmitting region LP1 is provided inside the angry face drawn by the non-light-transmitting region PLC. Therefore, the visibility of the battle effect image in the light-transmitting region LP2 is lower than that of the battle effect image in the light-transmitting region LP1. In addition, when providing regions with different light transmittances in the light-transmitting region, a predetermined pattern or design may be expressed by a region with high light transmittance and a region with low light transmittance. For example, when expressing the pattern of an animal, a zebra, it is preferable to form the white part of the zebra pattern with a light-transmitting region with high light transmittance, and the black part of the zebra pattern with a light-transmitting region with low light transmittance.

The color of the non-transmitting area PLC does not have to be a single color as in the pseudo light guide plate image shown in FIG. 48(B), and may be a mixture of multiple colors. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 49(A), the non-transmitting area PLC1 on the left half of the angry face drawn by the non-transmitting area PLC is displayed in white, and the non-transmitting area PLC2 on the right half is displayed in another color (e.g., red). In addition, when the non-transmitting area PLC is displayed in a predetermined color on the image display device, or in multiple colors including the predetermined color, the performance lamps provided around the image display device may be made to emit light in the above-mentioned predetermined color or in a color similar to the predetermined color. Here, "similar colors" refers in a broad sense to colors that are considered to belong to the same color category (for example, vermilion, crimson, and maroon are in the "red" category, while light blue, indigo, navy blue, and ultramarine are in the "blue" category), and in a narrow sense to colors that have a hue difference of 30 to 60 degrees on the color wheel.

For example, as shown in FIG. 49B, when the color of the non-transparent region PLC3 is displayed in blue, the first effect lamp 12, the second effect lamps 13a, 13b, and the third effect lamps 14a, 14b provided around the image display device 11 are illuminated in blue or a color similar to blue. In this way, not only the image display device 11 but also the effect lamps provided around it are illuminated in the same color (or a color that can be recognized as the same color), so that a greater impact can be given to the player. Also, as described above, when the color of the non-transparent region PLC3 represents the expectation of an advantageous game, when the non-transparent region PLC3 is displayed in a color with a high expectation and each effect lamp is illuminated in a color with a high expectation, the visual effect can further increase the expectation of the player.

As described above, in this embodiment, when an error is detected in the slot machine 1, an error code corresponding to the error is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j, and an error notification effect is performed by the image display device 11. Here, if a specific error (e.g., an E-type error) is detected while performing a pseudo light guide plate effect such as that shown in FIG. 48(C), an error message corresponding to the type of error detected is displayed on the image display device 11 as an error notification effect. At this time, the displayed error message (error display image) does not include a light-transmitting area and is composed only of non-light-transmitting areas, and is displayed on a layer higher than the layer on which the battle effect image (see FIG. 48(A)) and the pseudo light guide plate image (see FIG. 48(B)) are displayed.

For example, if an E1 error (RAM error) is detected while a pseudo light guide plate effect is being performed, an error display image including the text strings "RAM error" and "Please call an attendant" (error message) is displayed on the display screen 11a, as shown in FIG. 49(C). At this time, the text strings displayed on the display screen 11a and their background areas are both non-transparent areas, so the player cannot see the battle effect image and pseudo light guide plate image displayed on the lower layer. To be precise, the sub-control means 200 continues the process of displaying the battle effect image and pseudo light guide plate image, but because the error display image, which is composed only of non-transparent areas, is displayed on the higher layer, the player is ultimately unable to see the battle effect image and pseudo light guide plate image.

Here, for example, if the error display screen contained a translucent area, the player would be able to see the battle presentation image and the pseudo light guide plate image, and so there is a risk that the player would perceive the error display screen as part of the pseudo light guide plate presentation. In contrast, in this embodiment, the battle presentation image and the pseudo light guide plate image are made difficult to see, and only the error display image is made easily visible, allowing the player to more clearly recognize that an error has occurred.

It goes without saying that the pseudo light guide plate presentation described above can also be performed in a pachinko game machine equipped with an image display device. In addition, in a game machine (slot machine, pachinko game machine, etc.) equipped with the movable role described above, for example, the movable role is normally on standby in a position (standby position) where it does not overlap with the display screen of the image display device, and when a presentation is to be performed, the movable role moves in front of the display screen to perform a presentation involving mechanical movement (role presentation). In such a game machine equipped with a movable role, when the pseudo light guide plate presentation described above is being performed, it is desirable that the movable role remain in the standby position and not perform the role presentation, so as not to interfere with the pseudo light guide plate presentation, even if the conditions for performing the role presentation are met.

For example, a slot machine may generate a predetermined sound effect when a predetermined minor winning combination is achieved and medals are dispensed from the hopper, or a pachinko machine may generate a predetermined sound effect when a game ball enters the ball entrance in the large winning device (these effects are collectively referred to as "winning effects"). In a gaming machine that generates such winning effects, when a situation arises in which the pseudo light guide plate effect and the winning effect occur simultaneously, it is preferable to execute the pseudo light guide plate effect with priority. Here, a specific example of executing the pseudo light guide plate effect with priority is, for example, not generating a predetermined sound effect when a winning combination is achieved while the pseudo light guide plate effect is being executed, or making the volume of the predetermined sound effect lower than when the normal winning effect is executed.

<Main control processes>
Below, among the control processes performed by the main control means 100 of the slot machine 1, the setting change process, the game progress control process, and the timer interrupt process will be described with additional reference to Figures 50 to 78. Note that for variables such as counters and flags used in the following description, brief explanations are given in the variable list of Figure 24.

<Settings change process>
First, the basic flow of the setting change device process will be described with reference to Fig. 50 (A). The setting change device process is executed when a setting change is made, and performs a process of saving "0" in all RWMs (addresses in RAM 63 that store information about advantageous zones) that affect the performance of the instruction function (step K1).

<Game Progress Control Processing>
Next, the basic flow of the game progress control process will be described with reference to Fig. 50 (B) to Fig. 77. The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during a game, and as shown in Fig. 50 (B), first, a game start standby process is performed (step S1). In this game start standby process, as shown in Fig. 50 (C), it is determined whether the total stop wait number is 0 or not (step S11). Here, if the total stop wait number is not 0, the process waits for a standby time corresponding to the total stop wait number (step S12) and proceeds to step S13, and if the total stop wait number is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S13. Then, in step S13, 0 is saved in the total stop wait number, and the game start standby process is terminated and returned.

After the game start standby process is completed, the process proceeds to step S2 in FIG. 50 (B). Here, the process waits in that state until operation of the start lever 25 is accepted, and when it is accepted, the internal lottery start process is carried out (step S3). In this internal lottery start process, an internal lottery is carried out (step S21), as shown in FIG. 51 (A). In this internal lottery, the bonus condition device number and the winning replay condition device number are determined. After the internal lottery is carried out, the process proceeds to group number set process.

In the group number set process, as shown in FIG. 51(B), a value corresponding to the bonus condition device number (see FIG. 33(A)) is stored in the performance group A number (step S31), and a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number (see FIG. 33(B)) is stored in the performance group B number (step S32). Next, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number (see FIG. 34, same below) are stored in the condition device group A number (step S33), values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group D number (step S34), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group G number (step S35).

Similarly, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group B number (step S36), values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group C number (step S37), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group E number (step S38). Furthermore, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group I number (step S39), values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group F number (step S40), and values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group H number (step S41). Then, values corresponding to the performance group A number and performance group B number are stored in the condition device group J number (step S42), and the process proceeds to the section type number management lever processing.

In the section type number management lever process, as shown in FIG. 52, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 (normal section) or not (step S51). If the section type number is 0, the process proceeds to step S52 to determine whether the BB is not yet activated. If the BB is not yet activated, it is determined whether the BB is in operation (step S53), and if the BB is not in operation, the process proceeds directly to step S55. If the BB is in operation, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 (step S54), and if the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S51. On the other hand, if the BB is in operation as determined in the above step S52, or if the condition device group A number is not 1 as determined in the above step S54, the process does not proceed to step S51, but proceeds to the standby performance process described later.

In step S51, the favorable zone transition process is performed. In this favorable zone transition process, as shown in FIG. 54 (A), it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 0 or not (step S71), and if it is 0, the favorable zone transition process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 0, a favorable zone lottery is performed (step S72), and the lottery result is saved in the zone type number (step S73). Next, it is determined whether the zone type number is 0 or not (step S74), and if it is 0, the favorable zone transition process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the zone type number is not 0, a chance mode 1 lottery is performed (step S75), and the lottery result is saved in the chance mode number (step S76). Furthermore, a seven table 1 lottery is performed (step S77), and the lottery result is saved in the seven table number (step S78).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 (step S79). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S83, where a chance game number drawing process is performed. In this chance game number drawing process, as shown in FIG. 54 (B), a chance game number drawing is performed (step S91), the drawing result is stored in the chance game number counter (step S92), and a return is made. Upon return from the chance game number drawing process, the process proceeds to step S84 in FIG. 54 (A), where a chance cycle drawing is performed. Then, the drawing result is stored in the chance cycle counter, the advantageous zone transition process is terminated, and a return is made.

On the other hand, if the chance mode number is determined to be 4 in step S79, the process proceeds to step S80 and AT winning processing is performed. In this AT winning processing, as shown in FIG. 55, first, 1 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S101). Next, an AT mode drawing is performed and the drawing result is stored in the AT mode number (step S102), and then a Seven 1 drawing is performed and the drawing result is stored in the Seven number (step S103). Next, Seven number correction processing is performed (step S104).

In this seven number correction process, as shown in FIG. 56(A), first, the correction counter process is performed (step S121). In this correction counter process, as shown in FIG. 56(B), the correction counter data (counter that adds up the value of the gold seven counter and the value of the seven counter) is set to 0 (step S131), and it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not (step S132). If the seven number is 2, the correction counter data is set to the value of the gold seven counter (step S133), and 1 is added to the correction counter data (step S134), and the process proceeds to step S135. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 2 as determined in the above step S132, the process proceeds directly to step S135. In this step S135, the seven counter value is added to the correction counter data, and the process proceeds to step S136. In step S136, a value calculated based on each value of the cumulative counter, the correction counter data, and the bell count counter is saved in the correction counter data, and the process returns from the correction counter process.

Upon return from the correction counter process, the process proceeds to step S122 in FIG. 56(A) to determine whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more. Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more, 1 is stored in the seven number (step S123), and the seven number correction process is terminated and returned. If the value of the correction counter is not 1901 or more, the process returns as it is. In the arrival flag process described later, the process procedure is branched depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 2101 or more. In contrast, in this process, whether to store 1 in the seven number is determined depending on whether the value of the correction counter is 1901 or more, and the value of the correction counter used for branching judgment (also called the "discrimination value") is different. This is because storing 1 in the seven number allows at least one AT game next time, and the discrimination value is set to be less than 2101 in the arrival flag process, taking into consideration that the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future will increase accordingly. In this way, by changing the discrimination value according to the situation, the number of game medals that can be acquired in the future can be managed without overcounting more than necessary.

When the seven number correction process is returned, the process proceeds to step S105 in FIG. 55 to determine whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is not 1, the process stores 3 in the gold seven counter (step S106) and proceeds to step S107. If the seven number is 1, the process proceeds directly to step S107. In this step S107, the arrival flag process is performed.

In this reach flag processing, as shown in FIG. 56 (C), first, correction counter processing is performed (step S141). After the correction counter processing is completed, it is determined whether the correction counter is 2101 or greater (step S142), and if it is 2101 or greater, 1 is saved in the reach flag (step S143), and the reach flag processing is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, if the correction counter is not 2101 or greater, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 (step S144), and if it is 3, the process returns, and if it is not 3, 0 is saved in the reach flag (step S145) and the process returns.

When returning from the arrival flag processing, proceed to step S108 in FIG. 55 (A) and determine whether or not the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is 1, the AT winning processing ends and returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1, an EX mode 1 drawing is performed (step S109), the drawing result is saved in the EX mode number (step S110), and then the AT winning processing ends and returns.

When returning from the AT winning processing process, proceed to step S81 in FIG. 54 (A) and determine whether the condition device group A number is 1. If the condition device group A number is not 1, the transition to the advantageous zone ends and returns, and if the condition device group A number is 1, the AT entry lever processing is performed (step S82).

In this AT entry lever process, as shown in FIG. 57, first, loop CU rank set process is performed (step S151). In the loop CU rank set process, as shown in FIG. 58 (A), the seven set counter is incremented by 1 (step S171), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the loop number (step S172), a value corresponding to the seven table number and the seven set counter is stored in the CU rank number (step S173), and then the process returns.

When the loop CU rank set process is returned, the process proceeds to step S152 in FIG. 57 to determine whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is 1, the process proceeds to step S154 to perform the seven loop lottery process. In the seven loop lottery process, as shown in FIG. 58(B), a seven loop lottery is performed (step S181), the lottery result is stored in the seven counter (step S182), and the process returns. When the seven loop lottery process is returned, the process proceeds to step S155 in FIG. 57, where the arrival flag process is executed and the process proceeds to step S156. On the other hand, if the seven counter value is not 0 in the determination in the above step S153, the process proceeds directly to step S156. Also, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination in the above step S152, the gold seven counter value is decremented by 1 (step S158), and gold seven loop lottery correction process is performed (step S159).

In this gold seven loop lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 58(C), it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not, and if it is not 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the arrival flag is 0, the correction counter process is performed (step S192), and after the correction counter process is terminated, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900 or not (step S193). Here, if the value of the correction counter is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the value of the correction counter is smaller than 1900, the gold seven loop lottery is performed (step S194), and it is determined whether the result is 0 or not (step S195). Here, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is 0, the gold seven loop lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. On the other hand, if the result of the gold seven loop lottery is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S196), the arrival flag process is performed (step S197), and the process returns.

Upon return from the Gold Seven Loop lottery correction process, the process proceeds to step S156 in FIG. 57, where a draw for the add-on mode is performed and the result is saved in the add-on mode number (step S157). Next, a correction counter process is performed (step S160), and after completion of this, a draw for 1 bell count is performed (step S161), and the result is saved in the bell count counter (step S162). Next, a bell count counter correction process is performed (step S163).

In this bell counter correction process, as shown in FIG. 59, first, the value of the allowable number of bells (the value of the number of bells allowed until the correction counter reaches the upper limit) calculated based on the difference between the upper limit value (2100) of the correction counter and the current value is stored in the correction counter (step S201). Next, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not (step S202), and if it is not 0, it proceeds directly to step S203, and if it is 0, it is determined whether the value of the correction counter is smaller than the value of the bell counter (step S206), and if it is smaller, it proceeds to step S203. In step S203, 7 is stored in the bell counter, and after saving, the bell counter correction process is terminated and returned. When returning from the bell counter correction process, it proceeds to step S164 in FIG. 57, where the arrival flag process is executed, and the AT entry lever process is terminated and returned. When returning from the AT entry lever process, the advantageous zone transition process in FIG. 54 is also terminated and returned, and it proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 52, where the lever wait process is executed.

In this lever time wait process, as shown in FIG. 60, first, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S211). Here, if the condition device group A number is 1, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not (step S212), and if the AT winning flag is 0, 2 is stored in the lever weight number (step S213), and if it is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever weight number (step S214). Then, after storing, the lever time wait process is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the determination of the above step S211, it proceeds to step S215 and determines whether the main game state number is smaller than 2 or not. Here, if the main game state number is smaller than 2, it proceeds directly to step S217, and if the main game state number is 2 or more, it is determined whether the main game state number is 4 or not (step S230), and if it is 4, it proceeds to step S217. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not 4, it terminates the lever time wait process and returns.

In step S217, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0, and if it is 0, the lever time wait process is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the AT winning flag is not 0, a lever effect wait drawing is performed (step S2189). Then, it is determined whether the result is 0 (step S219), and if it is 0, the lever time wait process is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the result of the lever effect wait drawing is not 0, the process proceeds to step S213, where 2 is saved as the lever wait number, and after saving, the lever time wait process is terminated and returned. When the process returns from the lever time wait process, the process returns to the section type number management lever process in FIG. 52, and the process proceeds to the standby performance process described below.

On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0 in the judgment of step S51 in FIG. 52, 0 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S57), and it is judged whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S58). If the condition device group A number is 1, 1 is stored in the type 1 BB winning flag (step S59), and if it is not 1, 0 is stored in the type 1 BB winning flag (step S60). After storing, it is judged whether the winning replay condition device number is any of 13 to 36 (step S61). If the winning replay condition device number is any of 13 to 36, a value corresponding to the winning replay condition device number is stored in the instruction number (step S62), and then the process proceeds to step S63 in FIG. 53. If the winning replay condition device number is not any of 13 to 36, the process proceeds directly to step S63.

In step S63, the main game state number is determined, and depending on the main game state number, if the main game state number is 1, main game state number 1 lever processing is performed (step S64), and if the main game state number is 2, main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S65). If the main game state number is 3, main game state number 3 lever processing is performed (step S66), if the main game state number is 4, main game state number 4 lever processing is performed (step S67), and if the main game state number is 5, main game state number 2 and 5 lever processing is performed (step S68). After each lever processing is performed, the process proceeds to step S56 in FIG. 52. On the other hand, if the main game state number is any other number, no particular processing is performed and the process proceeds directly to step S56.

In the main game state number 1 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 61 (A), a chance mode 2 drawing is performed (step S241), and then a chance mode number determination processing is performed (step S2421). In this chance mode number determination processing, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), it is determined whether the result of the chance mode 2 drawing or chance mode 3 drawing is 0 (step S251). Here, if the result is 0, the chance mode number determination processing is terminated and the process returns, and if the result is not 0, the result of the drawing is saved in the chance mode number (step S252) and then the process returns.

When the chance mode number determination process is returned, the process proceeds to step S243 in FIG. 61 (A) to determine whether the chance mode number is 4 or not. If the chance mode number is not 4, the process proceeds to step S247 to determine whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. If it is 0, the process ends the main game state number 1 lever process and returns. If it is not 0, the chance game number lottery process is performed, and after that, the main game state number 1 lever process is terminated and returns. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4 in the determination of step S242, the process proceeds to step S244 to perform AT winning process. After that, the process determines whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S245). If it is 0, the process ends the main game state number 1 lever process and returns. If it is not 0, the AT entry lever process is performed, and then returns.

In the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), first, the AT winning lever processing is performed (step S261). In this AT winning lever processing, as shown in FIG. 62, first, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 or not (step S271). Here, if the arrival flag is not 0, the AT winning lever processing is terminated and returned as it is, and if the arrival flag is 0, it proceeds to step S272 and it is determined whether the EX mode number is 1 or not. Here, if the EX mode number is 1, an EX mode 2 drawing is performed (step S273), and it is determined whether the drawing result is 2 or not (step S274). Here, if the drawing result is 2, 2 is saved in the EX mode number (step S275), and then it proceeds to step S276. On the other hand, if the EX mode number is not 1 in the judgment of the above step S272, it proceeds directly to step S276 from there, and if the result of the EX mode 2 drawing is not 2 in the judgment of the above step S274, it proceeds directly to step S276 from there.

In step S276, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 13. If the seven table number is smaller than 13, it is determined whether the drawn flag is 0 (step S277), and if it is 0, it is further determined whether the condition device group G number is 0 (step S278), and if the condition device group G number is not 0, it proceeds to step S279. In step S279, a seven table 2 drawing is performed, and it is determined whether the drawing result is 0 (step S280). If the result of the seven table 2 drawing is 0, it proceeds directly to step S282, and if the result of the seven table 2 drawing is not 0, it saves the drawing result in the seven table number (step S281), and then proceeds to step S282. In step S282, 1 is saved in the drawn flag, and it proceeds to step S283. On the other hand, if the seven table number is determined to be 13 or greater in step S276, if the drawn flag is not 0 in step S277, or if the condition device group G number is 0 in step S278, the process advances to step S283.

In step S283, it is determined whether the seven number is 1. If the seven number is 1, a seven 2 lottery is performed (step S284), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 2 (step S285). If the result of the seven 2 lottery is 2, the lottery result is stored in the seven number (step S286), and a seven number correction process is performed (step S287). After the seven number correction process is performed, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 (step S288), and if it is 2, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S289), and the process proceeds to step S290. On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the determination in step S283, if the result of the seven 2 lottery is not 2 in the determination in step S285, or if the seven number is not 2 in the determination in step S289, the process proceeds to step S291. In step S291, a seven stock 1 lottery is performed, and the lottery result is added to the seven counter, and then the process proceeds to step S290. In this step S290, the reach flag processing is performed, and then after the AT is won, the lever processing ends and the process returns.

When returning from the lever processing after winning the AT, proceed to step S262 in FIG. 61 (C) and determine whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 2, 5 lever processing ends and returns, and if it is not 0, the AT entry lever processing is performed, and then the game state number 2, 5 lever processing ends and returns.

In the main game state number 3 lever process, as shown in FIG. 63(A), first, it is determined whether the command number is 0 or not (step S301). Here, if the command number is not 0, the value of the bell count counter is subtracted by 1 (step S302), and then the process proceeds to step S303. If the command number is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S303. In step S303, it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 or not. Here, if the reach flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever process is terminated and the process returns, and if the reach flag is 0, a seven stock 2 lottery is performed (step S304), and the lottery result is added to the seven counter (step S306). Next, the reach flag process is performed (step S306), and it is determined whether the reach flag is 0 or not (step S307). Here, if the reach flag is not 0, the main game state number 3 lever process is terminated and the process returns, and if the reach flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 1 or 2 (step S308). Here, if the value of the Gold Seven counter is not 1 or 2, the main game state number 3 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the value of the Gold Seven counter is 1 or 2, the Gold Seven loop rewrite lottery correction processing is proceeded to.

In the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process, as shown in FIG. 63(B), first, the correction counter process is performed (step S311), and then it is determined whether the correction counter value is smaller than 1900 (step S312). If the correction counter value is 1900 or more, the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. If the correction counter value is smaller than 1900, the gold seven loop rewrite lottery is performed (step S313), and it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S314). If the result of the gold seven loop rewrite lottery is 0, the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. If the result is not 0, 3 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S316). Then, the arrival flag process is performed (step S316), and then the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process is terminated and the process returns. Upon return from the gold seven loop rewrite lottery correction process, the main game state number 3 lever process in FIG. 63(A) is also terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 lever processing, as shown in FIG. 64 (A), a pull-back 1 lottery is performed, and it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S321). If the result of the pull-back 1 lottery is not 0, AT winning time processing is performed (step S323), and then it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not (step S324). If the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and returned, and if the 1st type BB winning flag is not 0, the AT entry time lever processing is performed (step S325), and then the main game state number 4 lever processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the result of the pull-back 1 lottery is 0 in the judgment of the above step S322, proceed to step S326, and it is determined whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 4 lever processing ends and returns, and if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing proceeds. In this AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing, as shown in FIG. 64(B), a lottery for the AT cycle preferential game number is performed (step S331), the lottery result is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S332), and the AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing ends and returns. With the return from this AT cycle preferential game number lottery processing, the main game state number 4 lever processing in FIG. 64(A) also ends and returns.

Next, the standby effect process performed after the section type number management lever process of FIG. 65 will be described. In this standby effect process, as shown in FIG. 65, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 or not (step S341). Here, if the section type number is not 0, it is determined whether the main game state number is 3 or not (step S342), and if the main game state number is 3, it is further determined whether the value of the seven set counter is 1 or not (step S344). Here, if the value of the seven set counter is 1, it is determined whether the seven table number is smaller than 15 or not (step S344), and if it is smaller than 15, it proceeds to step S345, and if it is 15 or more, it proceeds to step S347. In step S347, it is determined whether the winning replay condition device number is any one of 1 to 12 or 37 to 39, and if it is determined that it is not any one of them, it proceeds to step S345, and if it is determined that it is any one of them, it ends the standby effect process and returns. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S341 that the section type number is 0, or if it is determined in step S342 that the main gaming state number is not 3, the process directly proceeds to step S345.

In step S345, it is determined whether the lever weight number is 0. If the lever weight number is 0, the process proceeds to step S345. If the lever weight number is not 0, the process waits for a time period corresponding to the lever weight number, saves 0 as the lever weight number (step S349), and then proceeds to step S346. In step S346, it is determined whether the standby effect number is 0. If the standby effect number is 0, the process ends the standby effect process and returns. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process executes a standby effect (step S349), then ends the standby effect process and returns.

Upon returning from the end of the standby performance process, the section type number management lever process in FIG. 52 also ends, which also ends the internal lottery start process in FIG. 51 (A), and proceeds to step S4 in FIG. 51 (B). In this step S4, it is continuously determined whether all the reels have stopped, and if all the reels have stopped, game medals are paid out (only if a winning combination is achieved) (step S5), and further, count management is performed to perform processing such as updating the displayed number on the display (not shown), which shows the number of game medals won during the AT, etc., according to the number of game medals paid out (step S6). After that, the section type number management game end process is performed (step S8).

In this section type number management game end process, as shown in FIG. 66, first, it is determined whether the section type number is 0 or not (step S361). Here, if the section type number is 0, the section type number management game end process is ended as it is and returned. On the other hand, if the section type number is not 0, 1 is stored in the lever full stop flag (step S362), and the cumulative counter process is performed (step S363). In the cumulative counter process, as shown in FIG. 67, it is determined whether the replay operation pattern (the corresponding pattern of the replay role) is displayed (step S381), and if it is displayed, the cumulative counter process is ended as it is and returned. On the other hand, if the replay operation pattern is not displayed, the number of game medals paid out (including the case of 0) is added to the cumulative counter value (step S382), and further 3 is subtracted from the cumulative counter value (step S383), and the cumulative counter process is ended and returned.

After returning from the cumulative counter process, the process proceeds to step S364 in FIG. 66, where the main game state number is determined. Then, depending on the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, main game state number 0 full stop process is performed (step S365), if the main game state number is 1, main game state number 1 full stop process is performed (step S366), and if the main game state number is 2, main game state number 2, 5 full stop process is performed (step S367). Also, if the main game state number is 3, main game state number 3 full stop process is performed (step S368), if the main game state number is 4, main game state number 4 full stop process is performed (step S369), and if the main game state number is 5, main game state number 2, 5 full stop process is performed (step S370). Furthermore, if the main game state number is 6, main game state number 6 full stop process is performed (step S371), and if the main game state number is 7, main game state number 7 full stop process is performed (step S372).

In the main game state number 0 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not (step S391). Here, if the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not (step S392), and if the condition device group A number is 1, it is further determined whether BB is not established or not (step S392). Then, if BB is not established, 6 is stored in the main game state number (step S394), and the main game state number 0 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is not 1 in the judgment of the above step S392, and if BB is established in the judgment of the above step S393, 0 is stored in the main game state number (step S396), and the main game state number 0 full stop processing is terminated and returned. Also, if the AT winning flag is not 0 in the judgment of the above step S391, it proceeds to step S396, where it is determined whether the condition device group A number is 1 or not. Here, if the condition device group A number is not 1, 2 is saved in the main game state number (step S398), the main game state number 0 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the condition device group A number is 1, the process proceeds to step S397, and the game end processing at the time of AT entry is performed.

In this game end process when entering the AT, as shown in FIG. 69, 0 is stored in the chance mode number (step S401), 0 is stored in the chance game number counter (step S402), and 0 is stored in the chance cycle counter (step S403). After that, 0 is stored in the EX mode number (step S404), 0 is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S405), and 0 is stored in the completed drawing flag (step S406). Furthermore, 3 is stored in the main game state number (step S407), and the advantageous zone lamp is turned on (step S408).

Next, as shown in FIG. 70, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the upper line in the display window W (step S409), and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S412. In step S412, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the pay line 29 in the display window W, and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S413. In step S413, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the lower line in the display window W, and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S414. In step S414, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row on the lower right line in the display window W, and if they are displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S410, and if they are not displayed in a row, the process proceeds to step S415. In step S415, it is determined whether or not three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a line slanting upward to the right in the display window W. If they are displayed, the process proceeds to step S410. If they are not displayed, the process proceeds to step S416.

If the process proceeds to step S410 (when three "red seven" symbols are displayed in a row in the display window W), 1 is stored in the wait number when the reels stop, and 0 is stored in the standby effect number (step S411), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 69. On the other hand, if the process proceeds to step S416 (when three "red seven" symbols are not displayed in a row in the display window W), 0 is stored in the wait number when the reels stop, and 1 is stored in the standby effect number (step S417), and the process proceeds to step S418 in FIG. 69. In this step S418, it is determined whether the seven number is 2 or not. Here, if the seven number is not 2, the game termination process when the AT starts is terminated and the process returns, and if the seven number is 2, 2 is added to the standby effect number (step S419), and the game termination process when the AT starts is terminated and the process returns. Upon returning from the game termination process when the AT starts, the main game state number 0 full stop process in FIG. 68 is also terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 1 full stop process, as shown in FIG. 71(A), the chance game number counter is decremented by 1 (step S431), and it is determined whether the game is a BB operation end game (a game in which the operation of the BB game ends) or not (step S432). If the game is not a BB operation end game, the process proceeds directly to step S435. If the game is a BB operation end game, 0 is stored in the chance game number counter (step S433), the chance cycle counter is decremented by 1 (step S434), and then the process proceeds to step S435. In step S435, it is determined whether the AT winning flag is 0 or not. If the AT winning flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the chance game number counter is 0 or not (step S436), and if the value of the chance game number counter is 0, it is further determined whether the value of the chance cycle counter is 0 or not (step S437). If the value of the chance cycle counter is 0, a chance mode 3 drawing is performed (step S438), and a chance mode number determination process is further performed (step S439).

Next, it is determined whether the chance mode number is 4 or not (step S441). Here, if the chance mode number is not 4, 1 is stored in the advantageous zone counter (step S441), the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the chance mode number is 4, AT winning processing is performed (step S445), and then 2 is stored in the main game state number (step S448), the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the value of the chance game number counter is not 0 in the judgment of the above step S436, and the value of the chance period counter is not 0 in the judgment of the above step S437, it proceeds to step S442 and determines whether the 1st type BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the 1st type BB winning flag is 0, the main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, it is determined whether or not the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed (step S443), and if the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed, 6 is saved in the main game state number (step S444), and if the Type 1 BB operating symbol is not displayed, the main game state number 1 full stop processing ends and returns.

If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S435 above, the process proceeds to step S446, where it is determined whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0 or not. Here, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, 2 is saved in the main game state number (step S448), main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated, and the process returns. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, game termination processing at the time of entering the AT is performed (step S447), and then main game state number 1 full stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), it is determined whether or not the type 1 BB winning flag is 0 (step S421), and if the type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process remains as is, but if the type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process performs the game end process when entering the AT (step S422), and then ends the main game state number 2, 5 full stop processing and returns.

In the main game state number 3 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. 72, first, it is determined whether the value of the bell count counter is 0 or not (step S451). Here, if the value of the bell count counter is not 0, the main game state number 3 full stop processing is terminated and returned, and if the value of the bell count counter is 0, it proceeds to step S452 to determine whether the seven number is 1 or not. Here, if the seven number is 1, it proceeds to step S452 to determine whether the value of the seven counter is 0 or not, and if the value of the seven counter is 0, it proceeds to step S454 to determine whether the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001 or not. Here, if the value of the cumulative counter is smaller than 2001, it is determined whether the value of the reach flag is 0 or not (step S455), and if the value of the reach flag is 0, an AT mode rewrite lottery is performed (step S456). Next, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 (step S457), and if the lottery result is 0, the process proceeds directly to step S459, and if the lottery result is not 0, the lottery result is saved in the AT mode number (step S458) and then the process proceeds to step S459.

In step S459, an AT cycle drawing is performed, and the result of the drawing is stored in the AT cycle counter (step S460). Furthermore, a seven table 1 drawing is performed (step S46
2), and the lottery result is stored in the seven table number (step S463). Next, the AT cycle preferential game number lottery process is performed (step S464), and then 0 is stored in the AT winning flag (step S465), 0 is stored in the seven number (step S466), and 0 is stored in the seven counter (step S467). Next, 0 is stored in the gold seven counter (step S468), 0 is stored in the seven set counter (step S469), and 0 is stored in the loop number (step S470). Next, 0 is stored in the CU rank number (step S471), 0 is stored in the reach flag (step S472), and 0 is stored in the add-on mode number (step S473). Furthermore, 0 is stored in the bell count counter (step S474), and 0 is stored in the total acquisition counter (step S475). Then, 7 is stored in the main game state number (step S476), and 2 is stored in the full stop wait number (step S477), and the main game state number 3 full stop process is terminated and returned.

On the other hand, if the seven number is not 1 in the judgment of step S452 above, or if the seven counter is not 0 in the judgment of step S453 above, proceed to step S481 in FIG. 73 to judge whether the value of the seven set counter is 7 or not. If the value of the seven set counter is not 7, proceed directly to step S484, and if the value of the seven set counter is 7, save 15 in the seven table number (step S482), save 0 in the seven set counter (step S483), and proceed to step S484. In step S484, loop CU rank set processing is performed, and then it is judged whether the seven number is 1 or not (step S485). If the seven number is not 1, it is judged whether the value of the gold seven counter is 0 or not (step S487), save 1 in the seven number (step S488), and proceed to step S489. On the other hand, if the seven number is 1, subtract 1 from the value of the seven counter (step S488), and proceed to step S489.

In step S489, it is determined whether the value of the seven counter is 0, and if the value of the seven counter is 0, it is determined whether the arrival flag is 0 (step S490). Here, if the arrival flag is 0, a seven loop lottery process (step S491) and an arrival flag process (step S492) are performed, and then the process proceeds to step S493. On the other hand, if the value of the seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S489 above, or if the arrival flag is not 0 in the determination of step S490 above, the process proceeds directly to step S493. Also, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 0 in the determination of step S487 above, the process proceeds to step S495, and it is determined whether the value of the gold seven counter is 3. Here, if the value of the gold seven counter is not 3, the process proceeds directly to step S497, and if the value of the gold seven counter is 3, 3 is saved in the standby performance number (step S496), and then the process proceeds to step S497. In step S497, the value of the Gold Seven counter is decremented by 1, and then the Gold Seven loop lottery process is executed (step S498), and then the process proceeds to step S493.

In step S493, a draw for the add-on mode is performed, and the result of the draw is stored in the add-on mode number (step S494). After that, the process proceeds to step S501 in FIG. 74, where correction counter processing is performed. Next, a draw for the number of bells change is performed (step S502), and it is determined whether the result of the draw is 0 or not (step S503). Here, if the result of the number of bells change draw is 0, a draw for number of bells 2 is performed (step S504), and the result of the draw is stored in the number of bells counter (step S505), before proceeding to step S508, and if the result of the number of bells change draw is not 0, a draw for number of bells 3 is performed (step S506), and the result of the draw is stored in the number of bells counter (step S507), before proceeding to step S508.

In step S508, the bell counter correction process is performed, and then the arrival flag process is performed (step S509). Next, 3 is stored in the lever weight number (step S510).
), and judge whether the standby effect number is 0 or not (step S511). If the standby effect number is 0, 1 is stored in the standby effect number (step S512), and the process proceeds to step S477 in FIG. 72. On the other hand, if the standby effect number is not 0, the process proceeds directly to step S477. Then, 2 is stored in the wait number when all stops, and the main game state number 3 all stop processing is terminated and the process returns.

In the main game state number 4 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. 75, the value of the AT cycle preferential game number counter is subtracted by 1 (step S521), and it is determined whether the game is a BB operation end game or not (step S522). If the game is not a BB operation end game, proceed directly to step S525, and if the game is a BB operation end game, 0 is stored in the AT cycle preferential game number counter (step S523), and the value of the AT cycle counter is further subtracted by 1 (step S524), and proceed to step S525. In step S525, it is determined whether the AT win flag is 0. If the AT win flag is 0, it is determined whether the value of the AT cycle counter is 0 (step S526), and if the value of the AT cycle counter is also 0, a draw for pullback 2 is performed (step S527). Then, it is determined whether the lottery result is 0 or not (step S528), and if the lottery result is 0, 1 is stored in the advantageous zone clear counter (step S529), and the main game state number 4 full stop processing ends and returns.

On the other hand, if the value of the AT cycle counter is not 0 in the judgment of step S526, the process proceeds to step S534, where it is judged whether or not the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0. Here, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process ends the main game state number 4 full stop processing and returns. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S535, where it is judged whether or not BB has not been established. Then, if BB has not been established, the process ends the main game state number 4 full stop processing and returns, and if BB has been established, 7 is saved in the main game state number (step S536), and the process ends the main game state number 4 full stop processing and returns.

If the AT winning flag is not 0 in the determination in step S525, the process proceeds to step S531 to determine whether the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0 or not. If the Type 1 BB winning flag is not 0, the process proceeds to step S532 to perform game ending processing when entering the AT, end the main game state number 4 full stop processing, and return. On the other hand, if the Type 1 BB winning flag is 0, the process proceeds to step S533 to save 5 in the main game state number, end the main game state number 4 full stop processing, and return. Furthermore, if the result of the pullback 2 lottery is not 0 in the determination in step S528, the process proceeds to step S530 to perform AT winning processing, and then save 5 in the main game state number (step S533), end the main game state number 4 full stop processing, and return.

In the main game state number 6 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. 76 (A), it is determined whether or not BB has been established (step S541). If BB has not been established, the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns, whereas if BB has been established, 1 is saved in the main game state number (step S542), after which the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns.

In the main game state number 7 full stop processing, as shown in FIG. 76 (B), it is determined whether or not BB has been established (step S551). If BB has not been established, the main game state number 7 full stop processing ends and returns, whereas if BB has been established, 4 is saved as the main game state number (step S552), after which the main game state number 6 full stop processing ends and returns.

After the execution of each full stop process for the main game state numbers 0 to 7, the process proceeds to step S373 in Fig. 66. Here, 0 is stored in the instruction number, the section type number management game end process is ended, and a return is made. Upon return from the section type number management game end process, the process proceeds to step S8 in Fig. 50(B) and advantageous zone clear counter management process is performed.

In the favorable zone clear counter management process, as shown in FIG. 77, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is subtracted by 1 (step S561), and it is determined whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0 from before the current subtraction (step S562). If the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 before the current subtraction, proceed to step S565, and determine whether the value of the favorable zone clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction. If the value of the favorable zone clear counter has become 0 as a result of the current subtraction, proceed directly to step S566. On the other hand, if the value of the favorable zone clear counter is not 0 after the current subtraction, proceed to step S567, and determine whether a replay operation pattern has been displayed in the game. If a replay operation pattern has been displayed in the game, proceed directly to step S569, and if not, add the value obtained by subtracting the number of bets from the number of game medals paid out in the game to the net increase counter (step S568), and then proceed to step S569.

In step S569, it is determined whether the value of the net increase counter is 2401 or more, and if the value of the net increase counter is below 2401, the process proceeds to step S566, and if the value is 2401 or more, the process ends the favorable zone clear counter management process and returns. In step S566, 0 is stored in all memory areas that store data values that affect the performance related to the instruction function, and the process proceeds to step S563. On the other hand, if the value of the favorable zone clear counter is 0 before the current subtraction as determined in step S562 above, the process proceeds directly to step S563. In step S563, it is determined whether the zone type number is 0, and if the zone type number is 0, the process ends the favorable zone clear counter management process and returns. On the other hand, if the zone type number is not 0, 1500 is stored in the favorable zone clear counter (step S564), and the process ends the favorable zone clear counter management process and returns.

<Timer interrupt processing>
Next, the timer interrupt process will be described. In this embodiment, the processes of reading each game operation signal outputted according to the game operation such as the betting operation performed by the player, detecting (checking) the signal level, transmitting each control command, controlling the driving of the reel, etc. are performed by the timer interrupt process which is performed at a preset fixed time (for example, 2.235 milliseconds). In this timer interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 78, first, the interrupt initial process (saving the register, inhibiting the interrupt, etc.) is performed (step MT11), and then it is determined whether or not a power cut is detected (step MT12). Here, if a power cut is detected, the power cut process is performed (step MT25). In the power cut process, the save of the register, the saving of the stack pointer, the saving of the interrupt state, etc. are performed. In addition, the holding of the information on the hand determination result and the information on the game state (including the information on the AT) stored in a predetermined memory area, the calculation and storage of the checksum, etc. are also performed.

On the other hand, if a power outage has not been detected, the interrupt counter value is updated (decremented by "1") (step MT13), and then a timer measurement is performed (step MT14). This timer measurement involves subtracting or adding to the timer value of any timer set in the game progress control process described above. Next, the input port is read (step MT15). When reading the input port, the signal levels of each game operation signal input to the input port are read and stored, and the signal levels are determined.

Next, a reel drive control process is performed to control the drive of the reels 3a to 3c (acceleration, deceleration, constant speed maintenance, stop maintenance, etc.) (step MT16). In this reel drive control process, the reel drive pulse output counter value indicating the timing to switch the output phase (excitation phase) of the stepping motor is updated according to the reel drive state (stop, reel rotation waiting, accelerating, constant speed, decelerating, etc.), and reel drive pulse data for driving the stepping motor is acquired, updated, output, etc. In the next step MT17, it is determined whether the reel drive control process has been performed for all reels, and if not, the process returns to step MT16 and the reel drive control process is performed again. On the other hand, if the reel drive control process has been performed for all reels, a port output process is performed to perform excitation output for the reels, hoppers, blockers, etc. (step MT18), and further a control command transmission process is performed to transmit the control command stored in the control command buffer (CB) (step MT19).

Next, the process proceeds to step MT20, where the outer end signal (external signal) data stored in a specified memory area is read out and the outer end signal is output. Next, an LED display is performed to cause the above-mentioned display lamp to execute a specified display (step MT21). In this LED display, for example, the following display is executed on the payout number display lamp 46j. That is, if no error (excluding E-system errors) has occurred, the payout number "0-9" is displayed based on the number of game medals paid out, or a numerical value "1-6" is displayed based on a set value. Furthermore, when an announcement of the push order is made, the display mode of the instruction number "=1" to "=6" is displayed. Furthermore, if an error (excluding E-system errors) has occurred, an error display is executed based on the value of the error number.

Next, proceed to step MT22 and perform error management. In this error management, first, an error check is performed. In this error check, it is determined whether an H0 error has occurred, whether a CE error has occurred, whether a CP error has occurred, whether a CH error has occurred, whether a C0 error has occurred, whether a C1 error has occurred, whether an E6 error has occurred, and whether an E7 error has occurred. Furthermore, if an E6 error or an E7 error occurs, an error is displayed on the payout number display lamp 46j, and the game is stopped. In addition, if an E-system error occurs, the error can be recovered by executing the above-mentioned setting change processing. After this error check, if an error occurs, the output request set processing at the time of error detection is performed to send error information to the sub-control means 200. After executing this error management processing, a processing is performed to update the random numbers used for role determination, etc. (step MT23), and then an interrupt return processing (register recovery, interrupt permission, etc.) is performed (step MT24), and the interrupt is returned.

Although the first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment and can be modified as appropriate. For example, in the correction counter of the first embodiment, a first threshold and a second threshold (first threshold < second threshold) may be set, and the probability that the number of games played before the next AT is started is higher when one AT ends with the correction counter value exceeding the second threshold than when one AT ends with the correction counter value exceeding the first threshold but not the second threshold. This makes it possible to create a wave of change in the number of balls (number of game medals acquired) within the range of 2400, which is the upper limit at the end of one favorable zone, and to suppress excessive acquisition of game medals.

In the first embodiment described above, the image transition (switching) in the ending performance is performed along a specific flow (branch) of image transition patterns that correspond to changes in a specified variable (e.g., the number of game medals won). In contrast to this, multiple image transition patterns corresponding to changes in multiple variables may be prepared, such as an image transition pattern corresponding to a change in one variable (e.g., the number of games in an advantageous zone) and an image transition pattern corresponding to a change in another variable (e.g., the number of game medals won), and the branching manner of the image transition pattern executed may change significantly depending on the change in each variable. This makes it possible to diversify the image transition patterns in the ending performance.

In the first embodiment described above, a suggestive effect using a design illumination lamp controlled by the sub-control means is performed in the design display area DA1 to notify the player to complete a predetermined pattern combination (such as "red seven, red seven, red seven") during the advantageous zone. In contrast to this, a predetermined display may be performed on a display controlled by the main control means, such as the main push order display (payout number display lamp 46j), to notify the player to complete a predetermined pattern combination. This ensures that the player has an opportunity to complete a predetermined pattern combination even if the sub-control means is unable to perform a suggestive effect due to a malfunction such as a breakdown, allowing the player to play with peace of mind.

[Second embodiment]
The slot machine according to the second embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "slot machine of the second embodiment") will be described below with additional reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. The following mainly describes the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the second embodiment. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to application to the slot machine of the second embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The slot machine of the second embodiment has a basic configuration that is common or similar to that of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, each control process such as the role determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the second embodiment in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents.

<Stop switch unit>
As shown in FIG. 79, the slot machine of the second embodiment includes a stop switch unit 500. The stop switch unit 500 includes three stop switches 510, 520, and 530, and a stop switch panel 540. The stop switch 510 includes a stop switch cover 512 having a circular shape when viewed from the front, and a stop switch lamp 514 (illustration of the lamp itself is omitted) including an LED or the like built into the stop switch 510. The stop switch lamp 514 is configured to be able to change the lighting mode or lighting color (the color visible through the stop switch cover 512) depending on the game state, the progress of the game, and the like. The stop switch cover 512 is configured to be able to be pressed by a player. The stop switch cover 512 is also configured to be made of a material having translucency, and is configured to be able to visually check the lighting mode or lighting color of the stop switch lamp 514 by a player, a game store staff, and the like.

The stop switches 520 and 530 are configured similarly to the stop switch 510. That is, the stop switch 520 is configured with a stop switch cover 522 and a stop switch lamp 524, and the stop switch 530 is configured with a stop switch cover 532 and a stop switch lamp 534. The stop switches 510, 520, and 530 have the same functions as the stop switches 26a, 26b, and 26c in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment. That is, the stop switch 510 is operated to stop the left reel, the stop switch 520 is operated to stop the center reel, and the stop switch 530 is operated to stop the right reel. The illumination of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 is controlled by the sub-control means (sub-control board), but may be controlled by the main control means (main control board).

The stop switch panel 540 is made of a plate-like member having circular openings in areas corresponding to the stop switches 510, 520, and 530, and is arranged so as to cover the front part of the stop switch unit 500 (the area around each of the stop switches 510, 520, and 530). The stop switch panel 540 is made of, for example, a non-translucent or low-translucent material, and is given a predetermined color (for example, purple, but may be another color). Note that the stop switch panel 540 may be made of a translucent material, and a lamp (also referred to as a "panel lamp") that lights up and is visible through the stop switch panel 540 may be arranged on the back side of the stop switch panel 540.

As described above, the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 are configured to be able to light up in different lighting modes or colors depending on the game state, game progress, and the like. Conventionally, when a game is played in an abnormal state different from normal, such as the slot machine described in JP 2015-8873 A, a specific indicator (e.g., a bet button lamp) is lit up in a different color from normal to notify of the abnormal state, but in this embodiment, the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 are configured to light up in different lighting modes or colors depending on whether the second type slot machine is in a normal state or an abnormal state.

The abnormal state indicated by the stop switch lamps 514, 524, 534 does not refer to an error state in which the game cannot proceed normally, but rather, for example, to a state in which the game can be played but is not set to a specified state (for example, a state in which the optimal or most advantageous settings for playing the game are set, or a state in which the design maximizes the probability of awarding game value, etc.). On the other hand, a normal state refers to a state in which the game is set to a specified state and the game can proceed normally.

For example, in gaming establishments, the set values and game states may be set to a predetermined state, but may not be set to the predetermined state due to forgetting to set them, etc. For this reason, it is preferable to be able to notify gaming establishment staff of whether or not there is an abnormal state, such as not being set to the predetermined state, but in the case of the slot machine described in the aforementioned JP2015-8873A, it is difficult to tell that the light is intended to notify of an abnormal state, and there is a risk that a reliable notification cannot be made. On the other hand, since gameplay can be played normally even in such an abnormal state, there is little need to notify players of the abnormal state.

In this embodiment, the lighting state of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534 is changed depending on whether the state is normal or abnormal, so that the abnormal state is notified in a way that is easy for game store staff to understand but difficult for players to notice (so that they do not feel uncomfortable).

<Stop switch lamp lighting status and color>
80 to 83 show examples of transitions in the lighting patterns (lighting modes and lighting colors) of the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534, which will be described in order below. In addition, in Fig. 80 to 83, the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch refer to the stop switches 510, 520, and 530, respectively. In addition, in Fig. 80 to 83, the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp refer to the stop switch lamps 514, 524, and 534, respectively.

Figure 80 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in normal state 1. Normal state 1 refers to a gaming state that is both inside and not in AT, and is the state when the push order role is won. The gaming state inside refers to a gaming state in which the winning of a special role is carried over, such as the gaming state inside BB described in the first embodiment, and corresponds to gaming mode 7 in the first embodiment, for example. Since normal state 1 is not in AT, no notification of the push order (push navigation) is made even if the push order role is won. Here, it is assumed that the stop switches are operated in the order of the left stop switch, the middle stop switch, and the right stop switch.

In the example of the transition of the lighting pattern in normal state 1 in Fig. 80, the left stop switch lamp, center stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp are all lit in red until the start lever is operated and all reels start to spin at a constant speed (the time when operation of each stop switch becomes acceptable). Then, once all reels start to spin at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, center stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp all change from being lit in red to being lit in blue. After that, once operation of the left stop switch is accepted, from that point on (the point when the left stop switch switches from OFF to ON), the left stop switch lamp changes from being lit in blue to being lit in red.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp changes from blue to red from that point on (the point when the middle stop switch switches from OFF to ON). Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp changes from blue to red from that point on (the point when the right stop switch switches from OFF to ON). Note that while the example shown here is when the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch are operated in that order, the lighting pattern will change in a similar manner when the switches are operated in a different order.

Figure 81 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in normal state 2. Normal state 2 refers to the gaming state inside and during the AT, when the push order role is won. Normal state 1 is during the AT, so when the push order role is won, a push order notification (push navigation) is made. Here, the push order of "left, center, right" is announced, and each stop switch is operated according to the announced push order.

In the example of the transition of the lighting pattern in normal state 2 in FIG. 81, the left stop switch lamp, center stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp are all lit in red, just like in normal state 1, until the start lever is operated and all reels start to spin at a constant speed. Then, once all reels start to spin at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp changes from a lit red color to a flashing white color, and the center stop switch lamp and right stop switch lamp both change from a lit red color to a lit white color. The left stop switch lamp flashes white, urging the player to operate the left stop switch. After that, when the operation of the left stop switch is accepted, the left stop switch lamp changes from a flashing white color to an off color, and the center stop switch lamp changes from a lit red color to a flashing white color. The center stop switch lamp flashes white, urging the player to operate the center stop switch.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp changes from a flashing white light to off, and the right stop switch lamp changes from a lit white light to a flashing white light. The right stop switch lamp flashes white, prompting the player to operate the right stop switch. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp changes from a flashing white light to a lit red light, and the left stop switch lamp and the middle stop switch lamp both change from off to lit red. Note that here, an example is shown in which the "left, middle, right" push order is announced and the stop switches are operated according to the announced push order, but the lighting pattern changes in cases where a different push order is announced and the stop switches are operated according to the announced push order will also be similar to this example.

FIG. 82 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in the abnormal state 1. The abnormal state 1 is a gaming state in which the push order role is won in a non-internal and non-AT state. The non-internal gaming state refers to a gaming state in which the special role is not carried over, the special role is not won, or a bonus game is played by the establishment of a special role, and corresponds to the gaming mode 4 in the first embodiment, for example. The reason why the abnormal state 1 is considered to be an abnormal state is that, for example, a gaming state in which the internal gaming state is set to a non-internal gaming state. Since the abnormal state 1 is in a non-AT state, even if the push order role is won, the push order is not notified (push navigation). Here, it is assumed that the stop switches are operated in the order of the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp.

In the example of the lighting pattern transition in abnormal state 1 in Figure 82, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp are all off and do not light up red until the start lever is operated and all reels start spinning at a constant speed. Then, once all reels start spinning at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp all change from off to on blue. After that, when the left stop switch is operated, the left stop switch lamp changes from on blue to off without lighting up red.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp will change from a lit blue light to an off light. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp will change from a lit blue light to an off light. Note that while the example shown here is when the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch are operated in that order, the lighting pattern will change in a similar manner when the switches are operated in a different order.

In abnormal state 1, the lighting pattern changes like this. The way the lighting pattern changes is different from the way the lighting pattern changes in normal state 1 and normal state 2. However, for game store staff who are familiar with the way the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 1, it is easy to recognize (identify) that such a change has occurred, but for players who are not familiar with it, it is difficult to recognize. In addition, even if you see the way the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 1, it is unlikely to cause a sense of incongruity. This is because, for example, the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when it is in a state where it can accept operations is the same in normal state 1 and abnormal state 1 (both are lit blue). By setting the way the lighting pattern changes in abnormal state 1 as described above, it is possible to notify the fact that it is abnormal state 1 in a way that is easy for game store staff to understand and difficult for players to notice.

Figure 83 shows an example of the transition of the lighting pattern in abnormal state 2. Abnormal state 2 is a gaming state during non-AT, and refers to the state when the push order role is won and the settings need to be changed. It does not matter whether it is during non-internal or internal play. Abnormal state 2 is considered to be an abnormal state for reasons such as when a setting that should have been set to a specific value is set to a different value. Since abnormal state 2 is during non-AT, no notification of the push order (push navigation) is made even if the push order role is won. Here, it is assumed that the stop switches are operated in the order of the left stop switch lamp, the middle stop switch lamp, and the right stop switch lamp.

In the example of the lighting pattern transition in abnormal state 2 in Figure 83, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp are all lit light blue until the start lever is operated and all reels start spinning at a constant speed. Then, once all reels start spinning at a constant speed, the left stop switch lamp, middle stop switch lamp, and right stop switch lamp all change from light blue to blue. After that, when the left stop switch is operated, the left stop switch lamp changes from blue to light blue.

Next, when the operation of the middle stop switch is accepted, the middle stop switch lamp changes from blue to light blue. Finally, when the operation of the right stop switch is accepted, the right stop switch lamp changes from blue to light blue. Note that while the example shown here is one in which the left stop switch, middle stop switch, and right stop switch are operated in this order, the change in the lighting pattern when the switches are operated in a different order will be similar to this example.

In this way, the lighting pattern changes in the abnormal state 2. The way the lighting pattern changes is different from the way the lighting pattern changes in the normal state 1 and the abnormal state 1. However, for a store clerk who is familiar with the way the lighting pattern changes in the abnormal state 2, it is easy to recognize (identify) that such a change has occurred, but for a player who is not familiar with it, it is difficult to recognize. In addition, even if you see the way the lighting pattern changes in the abnormal state 2, it is difficult to feel strange. This is because, for example, the lighting pattern (lighting color) of the stop switch when it is in a state where it can accept operations is the same in the normal state 1, the abnormal state 1, and the abnormal state 2 (all of them are blue). By setting the way the lighting pattern changes in the abnormal state 2 as described above, it is possible to notify the abnormal state 2 in a way that is easy for a store clerk to understand and difficult for a player to notice.

As described above, the stop switch panel 540 is given a predetermined color. In this embodiment, the color given to the stop switch panel 540 is a color (e.g., black) that is different from the lighting color used by the stop switch lamp (including the color seen through the stop switch cover 512 and the color when the stop switch lamp is seen directly. In the above example, red, blue, white, and light blue). This prevents the color of the stop switch panel 540 from interfering with the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, making it possible to clearly see the lighting color of the stop switch lamp. In addition, when the stop switch panel 540 is made of a translucent material and a panel lamp is arranged on the back side of the stop switch panel 540, it is preferable that the lighting color of the panel lamp (the color seen through the stop switch panel 540) is a color that is different from the lighting color used by each stop switch lamp, which is the same as or similar to the lighting color of the stop switch lamp. This prevents the lighting color of the panel lamp from interfering with the visibility of the lighting color of the stop switch lamp, making it possible to clearly see the lighting color of the stop switch lamp.

In this embodiment, the stop switch lamp is used to notify whether the state is normal or abnormal, but other lighting devices may be used to notify. For example, a decorative lighting device located on the frame or panel of the front door may also be used as a lighting device to notify abnormal states, or a separate lighting device dedicated to notifying abnormal states may be provided.

[Third embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the third embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "third embodiment slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 84 to 87. Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of the third embodiment slot machine will be mainly described. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to application to the third embodiment slot machine, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The third embodiment slot machine has a basic configuration that is common or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, each control process such as the role determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the third embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents. The characteristic configuration of the second embodiment slot machine described above can also be applied to the third embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some changes to the contents.

<AT notification indicator>
The slot machine of the third embodiment is provided with an AT notification indicator 600, as shown in FIG. 84. The AT notification indicator 600 is configured with three 7-segment indicators 611, 612, and 613 capable of displaying one-digit numbers, English letters, and the like. As shown in FIG. 84(B), the 7-segment indicators 611, 612, and 613 are configured with seven segment LEDs (referred to as A-segment LED to G-segment LED) and one segment LED (referred to as H-segment LED here, but may also be referred to as DP-segment LED) capable of displaying a dot (decimal point) (a 7-segment indicator configured in this way is also referred to as an 8-segment indicator). As shown in FIG. 84(C), the A-segment LED to H-segment LED are configured to be switched between a lighted state (shown in black in the figure), a flashing state (shown in diagonal lines in the figure), and an off state (shown in white in the figure).

The AT notification indicator 600 is arranged in a predetermined area (for example, an area corresponding to the symbol display area DA1 or DA2 in the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment) on the front of the slot machine of the third embodiment (the arrangement location may be changed as appropriate). The AT notification indicator 600 is configured to be able to switch between displaying the push navigation (push order) and the remaining AT payout number according to the progress of the game during the game state during the AT (for example, corresponding to the game mode 3 described in the first embodiment). The remaining AT payout number refers to the number of game values (game medals) that can be awarded during the remaining AT period (the period from the current time during the AT until the end of one or a series of ATs. The AT notification indicator 600 is controlled by the sub-control means (sub-control board), but may be controlled by the main control means (main control board).

The AT notification display 600 notifies the push navigation by displaying the numbers (any number between 1 and 3) of the push order corresponding to the left reel, center reel, and right reel on the 7-segment displays 611, 612, and 613, respectively. For example, to notify the push order of "center, right, left," the 7-segment display 611 displays "2," the 7-segment display 612 displays "1," and the 7-segment display 613 displays "3," and to notify the push order of "right, center, left," the 7-segment display 611 displays "3," the 7-segment display 612 displays "2," and the 7-segment display 613 displays "1."

Meanwhile, the AT remaining payout number is notified by the AT notification display 600 by displaying the hundreds digit on the left 7-segment display 611, the tens digit on the central 7-segment display 612, and the ones digit on the right 7-segment display 613. For example, to notify "258" as the remaining AT payout number, the 7-segment display 611 displays "2", the 7-segment display 612 displays "5", and the 7-segment display 613 displays "8", and to notify "37", the 7-segment display 611 is turned off and displays nothing, and the 7-segment display 612 displays "3", and the 7-segment display 613 displays "7".

<Example of switching information display on AT notification display>
How the display of the push order and the display of the remaining AT payout number on the AT notification display 600 are switched according to the progress of the game during the AT game state will be described with reference to FIG. 85 and FIG. 86. FIG. 85 shows an example of the flow of progress of one game during the AT game state and the operation contents of the AT notification display 600 according to the progress of the game, and FIG. 86 shows an example of the display contents of the AT notification display 600 according to the progress of the game. The "lever", "first stop", "second stop", "third stop" and "payout" written on the left side of these figures indicate each time point of progress in one game. The "lever" indicates the timing when the operation of the start lever is accepted, and the "first stop" indicates the timing when the stop operation (first stop operation) for any one of the three reels being rotated is accepted. Similarly, the "second stop" indicates the timing when the stop operation (second stop operation) for any one of the remaining two reels being rotated is accepted, and the "third stop" indicates the timing when the stop operation (third stop operation) for the remaining one reel being rotated is accepted. In addition, "payout" indicates the timing at which the provision of game value (game medals) starts. Hereinafter, the seven-segment displays 611, 612, and 613 are also referred to as the left seven-segment display, the middle seven-segment display, and the right seven-segment display, respectively.

As shown in step SL1 of FIG. 85, at the time when the operation of the start lever is accepted, the value of the remaining AT payout number (here, 400 coins) is displayed on the AT notification indicator. Here, since the remaining AT payout number is 400 coins, the AT notification indicator lights up and displays "400" ("4" on the left 7-segment display, "0" on the middle 7-segment display, and "0" on the right 7-segment display) as shown in (A1) of FIG. 86. Next, in step SL2 of FIG. 85, a push order navigation occurs when a push order role is won. As a result, in step SL3, the display on the AT notification indicator is switched from the remaining AT payout number of "400" to a display of the lever-triggered push navigation (push navigation from the first stop operation to the third stop operation). Here, the lever-triggered push navigation is "left, center, right." Since the push navigation is "left, center, right," as shown in FIG. 86 (A2), the AT notification indicator displays "123" ("1" on the left 7-segment indicator, "2" on the middle 7-segment indicator, and "3" on the right 7-segment indicator. However, the number corresponding to the first reel to be stopped (here, the "1" displayed on the left 7-segment indicator) flashes, and the number corresponding to the second reel to be stopped (here, the "2" displayed on the middle 7-segment indicator) and the number corresponding to the third reel to be stopped (here, the "3" displayed on the right 7-segment indicator) are lit. By flashing the number corresponding to the first reel to be stopped, it is possible to easily let the player recognize that the number displayed is not the remaining AT payout number of "123," but the "left, center, right" push order, and that the reel to be stopped first is the left reel corresponding to the left 7-segment indicator that is flashing a "1."

Next, in step SL4 of FIG. 85, it is determined whether the first stop operation has been performed according to the push navigation, triggered by the acceptance of the first stop operation. If the first stop operation has been performed according to the push navigation, in step SL5, the display on the AT notification display is switched from the lever-triggered push navigation to the first stop trigger push navigation (push navigation from the second stop operation to the third stop operation). That is, as shown in (A3) of FIG. 86, the left 7-segment display of the AT notification display is turned off, the middle 7-segment display displays "2", and the right 7-segment display displays "3". However, the number corresponding to the reel to be stopped for the second time (here, "2" displayed on the middle 7-segment display) is blinked, and the number corresponding to the reel to be stopped for the third time (here, "3" displayed on the right 7-segment display) is lit. By flashing the number corresponding to the reel that should be stopped for the second time, the player can easily recognize that the displayed number is not the remaining AT payout number of "23" but the "middle right" push order, and that the reel that should be stopped for the second time is the middle reel that corresponds to the middle 7-segment display that is flashing "2."

Next, in response to the acceptance of the second stop operation, in step SL6 of FIG. 85, it is determined whether or not the second stop operation has been performed according to the push navigation. Here, if the second stop operation has been performed according to the push navigation, in step SL7, the display on the AT notification display is switched from the push navigation for the first stop trigger to the push navigation for the second stop trigger (push navigation for the third stop operation) and displayed. That is, as shown in (A4) of FIG. 86, the middle 7-segment display of the AT notification display is turned off (the left segment display is left turned off), and "3" is displayed on the right 7-segment display. However, the number corresponding to the reel to be stopped third (here, "3" displayed on the right 7-segment display) is made to flash. By flashing the number corresponding to the reel to be stopped third, it is possible to easily allow the player to recognize that the displayed number is not "3" of the AT remaining payout number but the "right" push order, and that the reel to be stopped third is the right reel corresponding to the right 7-segment display flashing "3".

Next, in response to the acceptance of the third stop operation, in step SL8 of FIG. 85, the display on the AT notification indicator is switched from the push navigation triggering the third stop to displaying the remaining AT payout number before subtraction (before payout is made). That is, as shown in (A5) of FIG. 86, the AT notification indicator lights up and displays "400" ("4" on the left 7-segment display, "0" on the middle 7-segment display, and "0" on the right 7-segment display). Then, when the game medals are paid out, in step SL9 of FIG. 85, the AT notification indicator decrements the value of the remaining AT payout number after subtraction (after payout is completed) from the value before subtraction. That is, as shown in (A6) and (A7) of FIG. 86, the "400" before subtraction displayed on the AT notification display is updated by decrementing the display by one each time to "399", "398", "397", ..., "391", "390", and then the "389" after subtraction is displayed ("3" on the left 7-segment display, "8" on the middle 7-segment display, and "9" on the right 7-segment display). However, in this example, the payout number is set to "11". By displaying the decrement in this way, the player can have the sensation that game medals are being paid out one by one, and that the remaining AT payout number is decreasing by one with each payout.

On the other hand, in step SL4 of FIG. 85, if it is determined that the first stop operation was not performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification indicator is switched to the display of the remaining AT payout number after subtraction from the lever-triggered push navigation and is displayed immediately (decrement display is not performed and it is displayed immediately). That is, as shown in (A8) of FIG. 86, immediately after the first stop is performed, the AT notification indicator displays "389" ("3" on the left 7-segment indicator, "8" on the middle 7-segment indicator, and "9" on the right 7-segment indicator). Similarly, in step SL6 of FIG. 85, if it is determined that the second stop operation was not performed according to the push navigation, the display on the AT notification indicator is switched to the display of the remaining AT payout number after subtraction from the first stop-triggered push navigation and is displayed immediately. That is, as shown in (A9) of FIG. 86, immediately after the first stop is performed, the AT notification indicator displays "389". In this way, if the stop operation is performed without following the push navigation, the display of the push navigation is stopped and the AT remaining payout number is displayed, and the AT remaining payout number after subtraction is immediately displayed, making it possible for the player to recognize that the stop operation was performed without following the push navigation and that the AT remaining payout number has been reduced as a result. Also, since the AT remaining payout number after subtraction is displayed before all the reels stop (before the stop pattern is determined), it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that a payout is performed because the stop pattern is determined, and that the AT remaining payout number is displayed with a subtraction as a result.

As a specific example, the control contents of the display on the AT notification display when the winning-A1 condition device (see FIG. 14) in the first embodiment is obtained will be described. The winning-A1 condition device corresponds to a push order role in which, if the push order is correct, a bell minor role is established and a predetermined number of game medals (15 in the first embodiment, but 11 in this embodiment) are paid out, while even if the push order is incorrect, a 1-coin role is established and one game medal may be paid out. When such a push order role is won, as described above, the display on the AT notification display is switched to the display of the AT remaining payout number after subtraction from the push navigation at the stage when the push order is incorrect and is confirmed, and is displayed immediately ("400" → "389"). After that, even if a 1-coin role is established and only one game medal is paid out, the display contents of the AT remaining payout number are not updated. That is, the display of the remaining AT payout number after subtraction "389" is not updated to "399" (=400-1), which is the value obtained by subtracting the actual number of coins paid out "1" from the remaining AT payout number before subtraction "400". On the other hand, if the display of the remaining AT payout number after subtraction is updated to "399" when a one-coin role is established due to an incorrect push order, the player may intentionally establish a one-coin role by pushing the buttons incorrectly, thereby suppressing the decrease in the remaining AT payout number and allowing the AT game state to continue for a long time. Therefore, when the push order is incorrect even if push navigation is performed, the remaining AT payout number is uniformly subtracted by "11" regardless of whether a one-coin role is established or not, thereby preventing the player from intentionally extending the period of the AT game state.

<Display of information on the AT notification display when power is restored after a power outage>
The information displayed on the AT notification display 600 during the progress of the game and its display mode are managed by the sub-control means. If a power outage occurs during the progress of the game, the sub-control means stores the information that was displayed or was about to be displayed on the AT notification display 600 at that time, and redisplays it when the power is restored. Below, how the push order and the AT remaining payout number are displayed on the AT notification display 600 when the power is restored will be described with reference to FIG. 87. FIG. 87 shows an example of the display contents of the AT notification display 600 according to the timing of the power outage and the power restoration. Note that the contents displayed on the AT notification display 600 according to the progress of the game when no power outage occurs are the same as those shown in FIG. 86.

If a power outage occurs after the start lever operation is accepted but before the first stop operation is accepted, and the power is restored, the above-mentioned lever trigger push navigation is displayed on the AT notification display as shown in FIG. 87 (A). If a power outage occurs after the first stop operation is accepted but before the second stop operation is accepted, and the power is restored, the content displayed differs depending on whether the first stop operation matched the push navigation. In other words, if the first stop operation matched the push navigation, the above-mentioned first stop trigger push navigation is displayed on the AT notification display as shown in FIG. 87 (B1). On the other hand, if the first stop operation did not match the push navigation, the AT notification display displays the remaining AT payout number after the above-mentioned subtraction as shown in FIG. 87 (B2).

If a power outage occurs after the second stop operation is accepted but before the third stop operation is accepted, and the power is restored, the content displayed will differ depending on whether or not the order of the stop operations up to that point (the first stop operation and the second stop operation) matched the press navigation. In other words, if the order of the stop operations up to that point matched the press navigation, the above-mentioned second stop trigger press navigation will be displayed on the AT notification display as shown in (C1) of FIG. 87. On the other hand, if the order of the stop operations up to that point did not match the press navigation, the AT notification display will display the remaining AT payout number after the above-mentioned subtraction as shown in (C2) of FIG. 87.

If a power outage occurs after the third stop operation is accepted and before the game medals are paid out, and the power is restored, the content displayed will differ depending on whether or not the order of the stop operations up to that point (from the first stop operation to the third stop operation) matched the push navigation. In other words, if the order of the stop operations up to that point matched the push navigation, the AT notification indicator will display the remaining AT payout number before the subtraction, as shown in (D1) of Figure 87. Then, depending on the subsequent payout of game medals, the above-mentioned decrement display will be performed. On the other hand, if the order of the stop operations up to that point did not match the push navigation, the AT notification indicator will display the remaining AT payout number after the above-mentioned subtraction.

When a power outage occurs during the payout of game medals and the power is restored, the AT remaining payout number after subtraction is immediately displayed on the AT notification display as shown in FIG. 87 (E). When the power is restored after a power outage, the recovery time of the main control means side and the recovery time of the sub-control means side may differ. Therefore, when a power outage occurs during the payout of game medals, the main control means side may recover first in a situation where the recovery of the sub-control means side is not yet complete, and the payout may be resumed and ended. In this case, if the above-mentioned decrement display is performed after the recovery of the sub-control means side is completed, there is a risk that the player who sees it will mistakenly believe that the payout is continuing at that point. Therefore, by displaying it immediately instead of decrementing it, such a misunderstanding by the player is prevented.

In addition, recent gaming machines are required to notify players of a large amount of information depending on the progress of the game, and some gaming machines are equipped with multiple dedicated notification devices. On the other hand, gaming machines equipped with large decorative parts or movable parts have a limited space because such parts take up a lot of space, making it difficult to secure space for the installation of the notification devices.

In contrast, the above-mentioned AT notification display 600 is capable of switching between and displaying multiple different pieces of information, namely, the push order information and the remaining AT payout information. Therefore, compared to when each piece of information is displayed by a separate display, the display space can be reduced, making it possible to save space. In addition, by using a common display, it is also possible to reduce manufacturing costs. Furthermore, the AT notification display 600 changes the display mode of information when notifying the push order and when notifying the remaining AT payout. Therefore, it is clear to the player which information is being displayed, and it is also possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding the displayed information and causing problems in the game. For example, even if the numbers used in the display of the push navigation, such as "321", "213", or "123", are displayed as the remaining AT payout number before or after subtraction, the flashing display during the push navigation is not performed, so that the player can be prevented from mistaking it for the push navigation.

The AT notification display 600 can display two types of information with different contents even if the information is similar numerical information, but it may be configured to display three or more types of information. Even in this case, when the information to be displayed includes multiple pieces of information that are easily confused, it is preferable to change the display mode of the information. Specifically, in addition to the above-mentioned push navigation and the remaining AT payout number, the information to display the AT add-on number can be mentioned. Although the push navigation blinks some information, when the AT add-on number is notified, the color or brightness of the notification may be changed, the lighting mode of the segment lamp different from the corresponding segment may be changed, or the mode of the voice notification may be changed. This allows the player to specifically (clearly) identify the current notification content. In this embodiment, the information is notified by the AT notification display 600 using a 7-segment display, but it may be configured to display multiple different pieces of information using other types of displays such as a dot matrix LED. Also, multiple different pieces of information may be displayed in the same display area in the display screen of the liquid crystal display device. Even in these cases, when the information to be displayed includes multiple pieces of information that are easily confused, it is preferable to change the display mode of the information. In addition, misinterpretation of information may be prevented by changing the lighting color or the format of the characters displayed for multiple pieces of information that are easily confused.

[Fourth embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the fourth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "fourth embodiment slot machine") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 88 to 91. Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of the fourth embodiment slot machine will be mainly described. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to application to the fourth embodiment slot machine, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The fourth embodiment slot machine has a basic configuration that is common or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, each control process such as the role determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the fourth embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents. The characteristic configurations of the second and third embodiments described above can also be applied to the fourth embodiment slot machine in the same manner or with some changes to the contents.

<Game state transition>
In the slot machine of the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 88, the main control means controls four game states (main game states) related mainly to the setting state of the AT: a normal game state in the advantageous zone, an AT game state, and a pull-back game state. The non-advantageous zone game state is a game state belonging to a non-advantageous zone (corresponding to the normal zone described in the first embodiment) and corresponds to game mode 0 described in the first embodiment. The normal game state in the advantageous zone, the AT game state, and the pull-back game state are game states belonging to an advantageous zone (similar to the advantageous zone described in the first embodiment). The normal game state in the advantageous zone corresponds to game modes 1, 2, and 6 described in the first embodiment, for example, the AT game state corresponds to game mode 3, and the pull-back game state corresponds to game modes 4, 5, and 7, for example.

If a predetermined transition condition is met while staying in a non-advantageous zone play state, the game will transition to an advantageous zone (basically a normal play state in an advantageous zone). In the normal play state in an advantageous zone, an AT lottery (described in detail later) and a charge lottery are held on the main control means side based on the role determination result, etc. When the AT lottery is won (AT win), this triggers a transition to the AT play state. When the charge lottery is won, the charge number (also called the "AT stock number") is added. The charge number is related to the set number of games in the AT play state, and the higher the charge number, the higher the possibility of resetting the AT play state more frequently, which is advantageous for the player. In the AT play state, a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games) is set as one set, and when the push order role is won, a push navigation is executed. In the AT play state, a charge release lottery is held on the main control means side based on the role determination result, etc. When the charge release lottery is won, the remaining number of games in the currently set AT game state is consumed, and then the AT game state is reset to a predetermined number of games (the charge number is subtracted by 1 when resetting). In another embodiment, when the charge release lottery is won in the AT game state, the AT game state may be reset to a predetermined number of games from the next game regardless of the remaining number of games in the currently set AT game state, or the AT game state may be continued by adding (adding) a predetermined number of games to the remaining number of games in the currently set AT game state. If the set number of games is consumed in the AT game state and the AT game state is not reset, the game state is transitioned to a pull-back game state. In the pull-back game state, a pull-back lottery is held, and if the pull-back lottery is won, the game state is transitioned to the AT game state as a result. In addition, when the charge number is 1 or more, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 40 games) is consumed in the pull-back game state without winning the pull-back lottery, the game state may be transitioned to the AT game state. In that case, the charge number is subtracted by 1 when transitioning to the AT game state.

In this embodiment, as in the first embodiment, a favorable zone clear counter is provided to keep track of the number of games that have been played consecutively in the favorable zone, and the value of this favorable zone clear counter is set to "1500" when transitioning from the normal zone to the favorable zone. The value of the favorable zone clear counter is decremented by 1 each time a game is played in the favorable zone, and when the counter value reaches "0", a forced transition to the normal zone occurs. Furthermore, if a transition is made from the favorable zone to the normal zone before the value of the favorable zone clear counter reaches "0", the value of the favorable zone clear counter is cleared (set to "0"), and when a transition is made again from the normal zone to the favorable zone, the value of the favorable zone clear counter is reset to "1500".

It also has an MY counter that counts the number of game medals acquired (the difference in number of medals) during the advantageous zone. This MY counter sets its counter value to "0" at the start of the advantageous zone (it may also be set to "0" at the end of the advantageous zone), and updates the counter value for each game and game result thereafter. In updating, if the difference in number of medals falls below 0, the counter value is corrected to "0", and if the difference in number of medals is a positive value, it is accumulated and updated as it is (such correction may not be performed). Then, when the accumulated difference in number exceeds 2400 medals, the advantageous zone ends and the game moves to a non-advantageous zone (non-advantageous zone game state). In addition, this MY counter is functionally the same as the net increase counter of the first embodiment.

Furthermore, an AT number counter is also provided as a counter that performs counting related to the number of game medals acquired (number of medals difference) during the favorable zone. This AT number counter is a counter that counts the number of game medals that can be acquired during one favorable zone (expected number of medals acquired, expected number of medals that can be acquired), which is calculated by adding values such as the AT stock number (number of charges) to the value of the MY counter. When the value of the AT number counter (expected number of medals acquired) exceeds a predetermined value (2100), this may be used as a trigger to end the favorable zone at a predetermined timing (for example, the timing of the end of the ending game state described later) and move to a non-favorable zone. Note that this AT number counter is functionally the same as the correction counter of the first embodiment. These favorable zone clear counter, MY counter, and AT number counter are controlled and managed by the main control means.

During normal gameplay in the favorable zone, when the charge lottery is won and the charge number is updated, an effect (also called a "charge suggestion effect") suggesting that the charge number has been updated (added) may be executed by the sub-control means. Whether or not to execute the charge suggestion effect is determined by a charge suggestion occurrence lottery. This charge suggestion occurrence lottery is executed by the sub-control means based on the role determination result in the game in which the charge number was updated, the updated charge number, and the charge suggestion mode (details will be described later). The charge suggestion mode is a mode related to the expectation (probability) of the charge suggestion effect being executed, and is set to charge suggestion mode = 1, 2, or 3 (the higher the mode number, the higher the expectation). Which charge suggestion mode is set is determined by a charge suggestion mode lottery. This charge suggestion mode lottery is executed by the sub-control means, for example, at a predetermined timing (for example, the time when the third stop operation is accepted or any timing from the favorable zone flag management all stop processing to the favorable zone clear counter processing) in the game that has transitioned from the favorable zone (assuming the Xth favorable zone) to the non-favorable zone gameplay state. The charge suggestion mode selected by the charge suggestion mode lottery affects the probability of a charge suggestion effect occurring in the normal game state within the advantageous zone (the (X+1)th advantageous zone normal game state) of the advantageous zone (the (X+1)th advantageous zone) to which the player transitions after passing through this non-advantageous zone game state (details described below). The charge suggestion mode set at the end of the Xth advantageous zone is maintained in the (X+1)th advantageous zone. Then, a new charge suggestion mode is set by the charge suggestion mode lottery at the end of the (X+1)th advantageous zone.

As an effect similar to the charge suggestion effect, an effect suggesting the current setting value of the gaming machine (also referred to as a "setting value suggestion effect") may be performed. When performing such a setting value suggestion effect, the probability of the setting value suggestion effect being performed and the accuracy of the suggested content may be set to vary depending on the charge suggestion mode (another suggestion mode may be set). For example, the probability of a setting value suggestion effect with a high accuracy of suggested content being performed may be set to be higher the larger the charge suggestion mode number, or conversely, the probability of a setting value suggestion effect with a high accuracy of suggested content being performed may be set to be higher the smaller the charge suggestion mode number. Also, the larger the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that the setting value suggestion effect will be performed, including both low and high probability suggestion effects, but the smaller the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that the effect will be performed when the suggestion effect has a high probability. Conversely, the smaller the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that the setting value suggestion effect will be performed, including both low and high probability suggestion effects, but the larger the charge suggestion mode number, the higher the probability that the effect will be performed when the suggestion effect has a high probability.

The AT lottery performed by the main control means, and the charge suggestion mode lottery and charge suggestion occurrence lottery performed by the sub-control means will be described below with specific examples. In the charge suggestion mode lottery shown in FIG. 89(A), the probability of winning is set to be different when the target difference number is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (in this example, "1000", but can be changed as appropriate) and when it is less than the predetermined number. The target difference number refers to the difference number of sheets acquired at a predetermined time when one advantageous zone ends. The predetermined time can be set appropriately, for example, when the advantageous zone ends, when the AT game state ends if an AT game state is set only once in the advantageous zone, when the last AT game state ends if an AT game state is set multiple times in the advantageous zone, or when the difference number in the advantageous zone becomes maximum.

In the charge suggestion mode lottery, one of the selection numbers 1 (set charge suggestion mode = 1), 2 (set charge suggestion mode = 2), and 3 (set charge suggestion mode = 3) is selected. The number of pieces assigned to each selection number is as shown in FIG. 89 (A). In the charge suggestion mode lottery, the total number of pieces is set to "16384". In this way, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, when the target difference number in the current favorable zone is 1000 or more, the probability of setting the charge suggestion mode = 1 is low and the probability of setting the charge suggestion mode = 3 is high. The charge suggestion mode (selection number) set by the result of the charge suggestion mode lottery is configured to be stored in the sub-control means without being cleared even after the favorable zone ends and to be retained in the next favorable zone. In addition, the target difference number is cleared in the main control means when the favorable zone ends, but it may be configured to be stored in the sub-control means even after the favorable zone ends and retained in the next favorable zone without being cleared.

In the AT lottery shown in FIG. 89(B), the probability of winning is set to differ depending on the trigger role selected by the role determination result and the number of charges. The trigger role 1 and trigger role 2 in the figure correspond to, for example, so-called rare roles (watermelon minor roles in the first embodiment), and can be set arbitrarily. In addition, although the number of charges = 1 to 4 is described in the figure, the number of charges = 5 or more may also be set. In the AT lottery, either the selection number 0 (AT non-win) or the selection number 1 (AT win) is selected. The number of placements assigned to each selection number is as shown in FIG. 89(B). In addition, in the AT lottery, the total value of the placements is set to "65536". In this way, in the AT lottery, the probability of winning the AT basically increases as the number of charges increases, but when the number of charges = 0, the probability of winning the AT is set to be higher than when the number of charges = 1 or 2. In addition, when there is a specific number of charges (the number of charges = 3 in the figure), the probability of winning the AT is set to be significantly higher.

In the charge suggestion occurrence lottery shown in FIG. 90, the winning probability is set to differ depending on the updated value of the charge suggestion mode, the role selected by the role determination result, and the number of charges. In this example, the roles are divided into trigger role 1 and other roles, but more trigger roles may be set. Also, the winning probability may be different between trigger role 1 and other roles. Furthermore, in the figure, the number of charges is set to 1 to 4, but the number of charges may be set to 5 or more. In the charge suggestion occurrence lottery, either selection number 0 (no suggestion) or selection number 1 (suggestion) is selected. The number of placements assigned to each selection number is as shown in FIG. 90 (A) to (C). In addition, in the charge suggestion occurrence lottery, the total number of placements is set to "16384". In this way, in the charge suggestion occurrence lottery, the probability of a charge suggestion performance increases as the value of the charge suggestion mode increases and the number of charges increases. In particular, the probability of a charge suggestion performance is set to be quite high when a specific number of charges (in this example, the number of charges = 3) is set.

By setting the lottery probability for each lottery as described above, the following effects can be obtained. First, in the charge suggestion mode lottery, the probability of setting the charge suggestion mode = 3 is high when the target difference number is 1000 or more. When the charge suggestion mode = 3 is set, the probability of winning the charge suggestion occurrence lottery increases, so the possibility of a charge suggestion performance being performed when the charge number is updated also increases. A player who has a target difference number of 1000 or more, i.e., who has been given a lot of game value, generally has a high desire to continue playing. Therefore, when the charge suggestion performance is performed, it is known that the charge number is 1 or more, and this is expected to further increase the desire to continue playing.

In addition, in conventional gaming machines, the effects executed after the end of the advantageous zone were uniform, making it difficult for players to have a sense of expectation about moving back to the advantageous zone. For this reason, for example, if a player wins a target difference of 1000 or more in the advantageous zone, some players are satisfied with that and try to stop playing after the advantageous zone ends. Even for such players, it is expected that the motivation to continue playing will increase when the charge suggestion effect is performed. On the other hand, if the charge suggestion effect is not performed even if the player continues playing for a while after the advantageous zone ends, it is highly likely that the charge number = 0. However, when the charge number = 0, the probability of winning the AT is high, so it is expected that the motivation to continue playing in the hope of winning the AT will increase. In addition, when the charge number is updated to 3, which makes the probability of winning the AT very high, the probability of the charge suggestion effect also increases. Therefore, the performance mode of the charge suggestion effect performed when the charge number is updated to 3 may be a performance mode specific to the charge number = 3. By doing so, it is expected that players who see the unique charge suggestion effect will be more motivated to continue playing, considering that they have multiple charges and are in a state where it is easy to win the AT.

In addition, in each of the above lotteries, the winning probability may be set taking other conditions into consideration. For example, the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means and the charge suggestion occurrence lottery performed by the sub-control means may be set according to the performance group number and condition device group number managed by the main control means. In addition, a flag for managing the ease of winning the charge lottery (also called a "charge winning probability flag") may be set in the main control means, and the lottery probability of the AT lottery performed by the main control means and the charge suggestion occurrence lottery performed by the sub-control means may be set according to the state of this charge winning probability flag (for example, flag = 0: low probability state; 1: high probability state).

≪Ending game state≫
In the fourth type of slot machine, when a predetermined condition (also called "ending condition") is established in the AT game state, this triggers a transition to a special game state (also called "ending game state"). An example of such a transition from the AT game state to the ending game state is shown in FIG. 91. FIG. 91 shows an example in which the ending condition is established when the AT game state set at 20G ("G" means game) has 12G remaining (when 8G has been consumed after the setting), and the ending game state is set from the next game. The ending condition can be, for example, the above-mentioned AT number counter exceeding a predetermined value (e.g., "2100") or the number of consumed games after the transition to the advantageous zone exceeding a specific value (e.g., 1300).

On the other hand, the sub-control means executes an effect (also referred to as an "AT suggestion effect") corresponding to the AT game state during the AT game state. The state in which this AT suggestion effect is executed is hereinafter referred to as an "AT suggestion effect state". When the AT game state in the main control means is consumed for all of the set number of games (20G), the period of the AT suggestion effect state in the sub-control means coincides with the period of the AT game state. However, if the AT game state is shifted to the ending game state before the set number of games in the AT game state is consumed, the AT suggestion effect state is maintained and the AT suggestion effect is executed during the ending game state (see FIG. 91). Then, when a predetermined condition (also referred to as an "AT suggestion effect end condition") is established, an effect (also referred to as an "ending suggestion effect") corresponding to the ending game state is executed. The state in which this ending suggestion effect is executed is hereinafter referred to as an "ending suggestion effect state". The AT suggestion effect end condition can be, for example, that the number of games initially set as the set number of games in the AT game state is consumed.

In addition, at a predetermined timing of the game when one (one set) of the AT game state in the main control means and the AT suggestion presentation state in the sub-control means end (for example, a predetermined timing after the acceptance of the third stop operation, such as after the winning judgment (after the stop pattern judgment) or when the third stop operation is accepted), a freeze (also called an "AT end suggestion freeze") to suggest that the AT game state will end is set by the main control means. On the other hand, when the main control means has transitioned to an ending game state but the sub-control means is in an AT suggestion presentation state, the AT end suggestion freeze is also set by the main control means at a predetermined timing of the game when the AT suggestion presentation state in the sub-control means ends (for example, when the third stop operation is accepted). Therefore, depending on whether or not the AT end suggestion freeze is executed, it is not possible to determine whether the AT game state in the main control means and the AT suggestion presentation state in the sub-control means have ended simultaneously, or whether the main control means has already transitioned to an ending game state and only the AT suggestion presentation state in the sub-control means has ended. When the main control means performs an AT end indication freeze, the sub-control means may also perform an indication that the AT game state will end (also referred to as an "AT end indication indication"). In this embodiment, the AT indication indication, AT end indication, ending indication, and ending transition indication are performed using an image display device (corresponding to the image display device 11 described in the first embodiment). These indications may also be performed using a display device different from the image display device.

In this way, even if the main control means transitions to an ending game state in the middle of an AT game state, the sub-control means maintains the AT suggestion presentation state and performs an AT suggestion presentation, giving the player the impression that the AT game state is continuing. Therefore, even if the AT game state transitions to an ending game state in the middle of an AT game state, the player will not know this, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling like he has lost out. Also, when a continuous presentation is being performed by the sub-control means as an AT suggestion presentation, the main control means may transition from the AT game state to the ending game state. In such a case, if the sub-control means stops the continuous presentation and executes the ending presentation, the player will not be able to see the result of the continuous presentation and may feel like he has lost out, but by continuing the continuous presentation, it is possible to prevent this from happening.

In the AT game state, the main control means may perform a lottery (also referred to as "AT-time add-on lottery") to determine whether or not to add on to the number of AT games, triggered by the winning of a rare role or the like. In addition, if the AT-time add-on lottery is won, the sub-control means may perform a lottery (also referred to as "AT-time add-on notification lottery") to determine whether or not to notify the player of the fact, and if the lottery is won, the sub-control means may execute an add-on notification effect. On the other hand, in the ending game state, the main control means may perform a lottery (also referred to as "limit-time add-on lottery") to determine whether or not to add on to the number of AT games, triggered by the winning of a rare role or the like. In addition, if the limit-time add-on lottery is won, the sub-control means may perform a lottery (also referred to as "limit-time add-on notification lottery") to determine whether or not to notify the player of the fact, and if the lottery is won, the sub-control means may execute an add-on notification effect. By making it possible to add on to the AT even in the ending game state, it is possible to enhance the playability during the ending game state. On the other hand, if the rare combination is not added in the ending game state even if the rare combination is won, the player may feel that he has lost out (the rare combination is wasted), which may lead to a decrease in motivation to play. In addition to the addition of the number of AT games, a special bonus may be provided in which a specific character can appear on the image display screen or a specific performance can be performed when a rare combination is won in the ending game state. Alternatively, the charge suggestion mode = 3 may be set more easily when a rare combination is won in the ending game state.

The probability that an additional notification effect is executed in a state where the main control means is in an ending game state but the sub-control means is in an AT suggestion display state (also referred to as "AT game state 1") (= probability of winning the limit additional lottery x probability of winning the limit additional notification lottery) is preferably set to be equal to the probability that an additional notification effect is executed in a state where the main control means is in an AT game state and the sub-control means is in an AT suggestion display state (also referred to as "AT game state 2") (= probability of winning the AT additional lottery x probability of winning the AT additional notification lottery). By doing so, there is no difference in the frequency of occurrence of additional notification effects between AT game state 1 and AT game state 2, so it is possible to prevent the AT game state from being determined to be 1 based on the frequency of occurrence of additional notification effects.

In addition, in both AT game state 1 and AT game state 2, a presentation suggesting that the number of AT games may be increased (also referred to as an "addition suggestion presentation") may be executed by the sub-control means in response to the winning of a rare role or the like. In this case, it is preferable to set the frequency at which the addition suggestion presentation occurs in AT game state 1 to be equal to the frequency at which the addition suggestion presentation occurs in AT game state 2. Furthermore, if multiple types of addition suggestion presentations with different presentation modes (presentation contents) are to occur in AT game state 2, it is preferable to set all types of addition suggestion presentations to occur in AT game state 1 as well as the frequency at which each type of addition suggestion presentation occurs to be equal in AT game state 1 and AT game state 2. By doing so, there is no difference in the frequency at which the addition suggestion presentation occurs between AT game state 1 and AT game state 2, so it is possible to prevent the determination that the AT game state is 1 based on the frequency at which the addition suggestion presentation occurs.

In addition, in a state where the main control means is in an ending game state and the sub-control means is in an ending suggestion presentation state (also referred to as "AT game state 3"), the sub-control means may perform a dedicated add-on notification presentation or add-on suggestion presentation that is not performed in AT game state 1 or AT game state 2. By doing so, when the main control means is in an ending game state, the manner of the add-on notification presentation or add-on suggestion presentation can be changed according to the state of the sub-control means. In addition, by having an add-on notification presentation or add-on suggestion presentation dedicated to AT game state 3, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the motivation of the player in AT game state 3. In this embodiment, a state where the main control means is in an AT game state and the sub-control means is in an ending suggestion presentation state does not occur. This makes it possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding that the game state has been changed to an ending game state when in fact the game state is AT.

<Game progress control process>
The game progress control process among the control processes performed by the main control means of the slot machine of the fourth embodiment will be described below with additional reference to Figures 92 to 98. In the following description, main game state 0 corresponds to the non-advantageous zone game state described above, main game state 1 and main game state 2 correspond to the normal game state in the advantageous zone described above, main game state 3, main game state 4 and main game state 5 correspond to the AT game state described above, and main game state 6 and main game state 7 correspond to the pullback game state described above. Also, the state in which the limit reaching number is set to 2 in main game state 5 corresponds to the ending game state described above.

The game progress control process is a process that is repeatedly executed during a game, as described in the first embodiment, and as shown in FIG. 92, first, the lever control process is performed (step SK1). The contents of this lever control process are the same as part of the contents of the game start standby process described in the first embodiment. After the lever control process is completed, the process proceeds to step SK2, where an internal lottery is performed. After the internal lottery is completed, the performance group number set process is performed (step SK3). The contents of this performance group number set process are the same as part of the contents of the group number set process described in the first embodiment. Next, the process proceeds to step SK4, where an advantageous zone display LED lighting process is performed. In this advantageous zone display LED lighting process, a control is performed to light up the zone indicator to notify that the player is in an advantageous zone. After the advantageous zone display LED lighting process is completed, an advantageous zone flag management lever process is performed (step SK5). In this advantageous zone flag management lever process, the lever process for each game state described later is performed as one process.

After the advantageous zone flag management lever process is completed, a reel stop process is performed (step SK6). In this reel stop process, a control process is performed to stop each reel based on the result of the internal lottery and the push order and push position by the player. Next, an advantageous zone flag management full stop process is performed (step SK7). This advantageous zone flag management full stop process will be described later. After the advantageous zone flag management full stop process is completed, a payout process (a process of paying out game medals) is performed (step SK8), and then a count process (a process of updating the values of various counters) is performed (step SK9). After the count process is completed, the process proceeds to step SK10 and an advantageous zone clear counter process is performed. The contents of this advantageous zone clear counter process are the same as those of the advantageous zone clear counter process described in the first embodiment.

In the lever processing for each game state performed in the advantageous zone flag management lever processing in step SK5 above, as shown in FIG. 93, first, it is determined whether the advantageous zone flag is greater than 0 (whether it is an advantageous zone or a non-advantageous zone) (step SK21). Here, if the advantageous zone flag is greater than 0 (step SK21; YES), the process proceeds to step SK22 and performs instruction generation processing. In this instruction generation processing, preparation processing for performing push navigation is performed. After the instruction generation processing is completed, the AT number counter update processing described below is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SK24. On the other hand, in step SK21, if the advantageous zone flag is not greater than 0 (step SK21; NO), the processes in steps SK22 and SK23 above are not performed, and the process proceeds to step SK24.

In step SK24, the main game state number is determined, and depending on the main game state number, if the main game state number is 0, main game state 0 lever processing is performed (step S64), if the main game state number is 1, main game state 1 lever processing is performed (step SK25), and if the main game state number is 1 or 2, main game state 1 and 2 lever processing is performed (step SK26). If the main game state number is 3 or 4, main game state 3 and 4 lever processing is performed (step SK27), and if the main game state number is 5, main game state 5 lever processing (described later) is performed (step SK28). Furthermore, if the main game state number is 6, main game state 6 lever processing is performed (step SK29), and if the main game state number is 7, main game state 7 lever processing is performed (step SK30).

In the AT number counter update process performed in step SK23, as shown in FIG. 94, first, the value of the MY counter is stored in the AT number counter (step SK41). Next, it is determined whether the instruction number is greater than 0 (whether or not push navigation is performed) (step SK42). If the instruction number is not greater than 0 (step SK42; NO), it proceeds to step SK43 and determines whether or not the performance group number is N (N is a predetermined number) (whether or not the push order role has been won). If the performance group number is N (step SK43; YES), it proceeds to step SK44, and if the performance group number is not N (step SK43; NO), it proceeds to step SK45. On the other hand, if the instruction number is greater than 0 in step SK42 (step SK42; YES), it proceeds directly to step SK44.

In step SK44, F (the number of payouts when the push order combination is established) is added to the AT number counter, and then the process proceeds to step SK45. In step SK45, it is determined whether the main game state number is greater than 2. If the main game state number is greater than 2 (step SK45; YES), the process proceeds to step SK46 to determine whether the limit reached number is 0. If the limit reached number is 0 (step SK46; YES), the process proceeds to step SK47 to determine whether the advantageous zone stay G number counter is 1. The advantageous zone stay G number counter, like the advantageous zone clear counter, is a counter that manages the number of games that have continuously stayed in the advantageous zone.

In step SK47, if the AT stay G number counter is 1 (step SK47; YES), proceed to step SK49. If the AT stay G number counter is not 1 (step SK47; NO), proceed to step SK48 to determine whether the AT number counter is 2100 or more. Here, if the AT number counter is 2100 or more (step SK48; YES), proceed to step SK49. In step SK49, save 1 in the limit arrival number, then end the AT number counter update process and return. On the other hand, if the main game state number is not greater than 2 in step SK45 (step SK45; NO), if the limit arrival number is not 0 in step SK46 (step SK46; NO), or if the AT number counter is not 2100 or more in step SK48 (step SK48; NO), no further processing is performed, and the AT number counter update process ends and returns.

In the main game state 5 lever processing performed in step SK28 of FIG. 93, as shown in FIG. 95, first, it is determined whether the limit reaching number is not 2 (step SK61). If the limit reaching number is not 2 (step SK61; YES), the process proceeds to step SK62, where the main game state 3 and 4 lever processing is performed, and then the main game state 5 lever processing is terminated and returned. On the other hand, if the lever processing limit reaching number is 2 (step SK61; NO), the process proceeds to step SK63, where it is determined whether the condition device group B number is m (m is a predetermined value). If the condition device group B number is m (step SK63; YES), a limit-time addition lottery is performed, and it is determined whether the winning number is 0 (non-winning) (winning) (step SK65). If the winning number is not 0 (step SK65; NO), the process proceeds to step SK66, where 200 is added to the ending G number counter (a counter that manages the set number of games in the ending game state). On the other hand, if the condition device group B number is not m in step SK63 (step SK63; NO), or if the winning number is 0 in step SK65 (step SK65; YES), proceed directly to step SK67.

In step SK67, it is determined whether the AT number counter exceeds 2400. If the AT number counter exceeds 2400 (step SK67; YES), the process proceeds to step SK69. If the AT number counter does not exceed 2400 (step SK67; NO), the process proceeds to step SK68. In step SK68, it is determined whether the favorable zone clear counter is 1. If the favorable zone clear counter is not 1 (step SK68; NO), the main game state 5 lever processing ends and the process returns. If the favorable zone clear counter is 1 (step SK68; YES), the process proceeds to step SK69. In step SK69, 1 is saved in the ending G number counter. After that, 1 is saved in the limit end flag (step SK70), and the main game state 5 lever processing ends and the process returns.

In the advantageous zone flag management full stop process performed in step SK7 of FIG. 92, as shown in FIG. 96, first, a full stop process for each game state is performed (step SK81). In this full stop process for each game state, the main game state 5 full stop process described later is performed as one process. After the full stop process for each game state is completed, it is determined whether the limit arrival number is 1 (step SK82). Here, if the limit arrival number is 1 (step SK82; YES), the process proceeds to step SK83 and performs the limit determination process described later. After that, the full stop process for each game state is completed and the process returns. On the other hand, if the limit arrival number is not 1 in the above step SK82 (step SK82; NO), the full stop process for each game state is completed and the process returns.

In the main game state 5 full stop processing performed in the advantageous zone flag management full stop processing of step SK81 in FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 97, first, the wait reservation counter (a counter for managing the execution timing of the above-mentioned ending transition suggestion freeze) is decremented by 1 (step SK101). Next, it is determined whether the wait reservation counter after the decrement is 0 or not (step SK102). Here, if the wait reservation counter after the decrement is 0 (step SK102; YES), proceed to step SK103 and save 5 in the main game state number. Then, save p (a predetermined value) in the game start standby performance number (a number for managing the type of standby performance at the start of the game) (step SK104), and proceed to step SK105. On the other hand, if the wait reservation counter after the decrement is not 0 in the above step SK102 (step SK102; NO), proceed to step SK105 without performing the processing of the above steps SK103 and SK104.

In step SK105, the ending G number counter is decremented by 1. Then, it is determined whether the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106). If the ending G number counter is 0 (step SK106; YES), the process proceeds to step SK107 to determine whether the limit reaching number is 2. If the limit reaching number is 2 (step SK107; YES), the process proceeds to step SK108, where 1 is saved in the favorable zone clear counter, and then the process proceeds to step SK110. On the other hand, if the limit reaching number is not 2 in step SK107 (step SK107; NO), the process proceeds to step SK109, where a state transition process (a process for transitioning the game state) is performed, and then the process proceeds to step SK110. Also, if the ending G number counter is not 0 in step SK106 (step SK106; NO), the process proceeds directly to step SK110. In step SK110, a clear process is performed when the game is completely stopped during the AT (a process that clears certain data used during the AT), and the main game state 5 complete stop process ends.

In the limit determination process performed in step SK83 of FIG. 96, as shown in FIG. 98, first, 1 is added to the limit reaching number (step SK121). Next, it is determined whether the main game state number is any of 3 to 5 (step SK122). Here, if the main game state number is any of 3 to 5 (step SK122; YES), the process proceeds to step SK123, and the value of the ATG number counter is saved in the ending G number counter. The ATG number counter is a counter that manages the number of games played during the AT, and is set to, for example, "20" when the AT is set (including resetting), and thereafter, 1 is subtracted each time a game is played during the AT.

Then, the remainder obtained by dividing the value of the ending G number counter by 20 is stored in the wait reservation counter (step SK124). Then, it is determined whether the wait reservation counter is 0 or not (step SK124). If the wait reservation counter is 0 (step SK125; YES), the process proceeds to step SK126, where q (a predetermined value) is stored in the end-of-game wait performance number (a number for managing the type of wait performance at the end of the game) (step SK104), and the process proceeds to step SK107. On the other hand, if the wait reservation counter is not 0 in step SK125 (step SK125; NO), the process proceeds to step SK128. Also, if the main game state number is not one of 3 to 5 in step SK122 (step SK122; NO), the process proceeds directly to step SK127.

In step SK127, 5 is saved as the main game state number, and after saving, the process proceeds to step SK128. In step SK128, an ending G number lottery (a lottery to determine the number of games set for the ending game state) is performed. Next, the lottery result (number of games) corresponding to the winning number in the ending G number lottery is obtained (step SK129). Then, the lottery result is added to the value obtained by multiplying the value of the AT stock counter (counter that manages the above-mentioned charge number) by 20 (step SK130). Next, the addition result in step SK130 is added to the ending G number counter (step SK131), and 5 is saved as the main game state number (step SK132). Then, unnecessary variables, etc. are cleared (step SK133), the limit determination process ends, and the process returns.

[Fifth embodiment]
Hereinafter, the slot machine according to the fifth embodiment (hereinafter also referred to as the "slot machine of the fifth embodiment") will be described with additional reference to FIGS. 99 to 118. Hereinafter, the characteristic parts of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment will be mainly described. The characteristic parts described below are not limited to application to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment, but can be similarly applied to other embodiments. The slot machine of the fifth embodiment has a basic configuration that is common or similar to the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment described above, and a description thereof will be omitted. In addition, each control process such as the role determination process and the reel control process described in the slot machine 1 can be applied to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment in the same manner or with some changes to the process contents. The characteristic configurations of the slot machines of the second to fourth embodiments described above can also be applied to the slot machine of the fifth embodiment in the same manner or with some changes to the contents.

<Basic configuration>
Before describing the characteristic parts, the basic configuration of the slot machine of the fifth embodiment (the configuration particularly relevant to the description of the characteristic parts) will be briefly described. Although not shown, the slot machine of the fifth embodiment includes three reels (corresponding to the reels 3a to 3c described above), a start lever (corresponding to the start lever 25 described above) operated when starting the rotation of all the reels, three stop switches (corresponding to the stop switches 26a to 26c described above) on the left, center, and right sides that accept a stop operation for stopping the rotation of each reel individually, and a sub-button that is operated when playing a game for performance or displaying gaming machine information. The slot machine of the fifth embodiment also includes three control boards (corresponding to the main control board 60, the sub-main control board 70A, and the sub-sub control board 70B described above) as main control boards. The control related to the operation reception of the start lever and the stop switch is performed by the main control board, and the control related to the operation reception of the sub-button is performed by the sub-main control board or the sub-sub control board.

Each stop switch has a button-like operation acceptance section that retracts when the player presses it with their hand and returns to its original state due to spring force or the like when the player releases their hand. When this operation acceptance section is pressed (pushed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit close and the switch changes from an OFF state to an ON state, and when the pressing operation is released (hand is released), the contacts open and the switch changes from an ON state to an OFF state. Each time each stop switch validly accepts a stop operation and switches from an OFF state to an ON state, a control command (first, second, and third stop acceptance command) including information indicating that the stop operation has been accepted is sent from the main control board (main control means) to the sub-main control board (sub-main control means). By receiving these stop acceptance commands, the sub-main control board can identify that each stop switch has validly accepted a stop operation (first, second, and third stop operation).

In addition, after each stop switch accepts a stop operation effectively, when the stop operation is released and each stop switch switches from the on state to the off state, a control command (stop operation release command) including information indicating that the accepted stop operation has been released is transmitted from the main control board to the sub-main control board. Specifically, a control command including information indicating that the first stop operation has been released (referred to as the "first stop operation release command"), a control command including information indicating that the second stop operation has been released (referred to as the "second stop operation release command"), and a control command including information indicating that the third stop operation has been released (referred to as the "third stop operation release command") are transmitted. By receiving these stop operation release commands, the sub-main control board can identify that the stop operation accepted effectively by each stop switch has been released (the player's hand has been removed from the stop switch). Note that the first and second stop operation release commands may not be transmitted, and only the third stop operation release command may be transmitted.

In addition, when the operation of the start lever is validly accepted, various control commands (collectively referred to as "lever operation acceptance commands") equivalent to the instruction number command and performance group number command in the slot machine 1 are sent from the main control board to the sub-main control board. By receiving this lever operation acceptance command, the sub-main control board can identify that the operation of the start lever has been validly accepted (that the start lever has been operated validly).

The sub-button has, for example, a button-shaped operation receiving portion that retracts when pressed by the player's hand and returns to its original state due to a spring force or the like when the player releases his/her hand, and a cross-shaped operation receiving portion with an arrow. When these operation receiving portions are pressed (pressed by hand), the contacts of the electric circuit are closed and the state is switched from OFF to ON, and when the pressing operation is released (released), the contacts are opened and the state is switched from ON to OFF. When the sub-button is operated effectively, a predetermined performance process corresponding to the operation may be executed by the sub-control board (sub-control means). Also, a performance process may be executed to prompt the player to operate the sub-button. Furthermore, by operating the sub-button in a predetermined procedure, it is possible to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the brightness of the screen of the image display portion and the volume of the speaker. Below, several characteristic parts of the slot machine of the fifth form will be explained one by one.

<Display Effects>
The slot machine of the fifth form has an image display section DP (see Figs. 99 to 108, etc.) corresponding to the image display screen 11a of the image display device 11 in the slot machine 1, and various display effects are executed in this image display section DP. The slot machine of the fifth form also has an audio output section (not shown) corresponding to the speakers 15a, 15b, 44a, and 44b in the slot machine 1, and the audio output section outputs audio for effects corresponding to each display effect. Examples of display effects executed in the slot machine of the fifth form include conversation effects (also called "dialogue effects"), subtitle effects (also called "telop effects"), expectation effects (also called "object effects"), GET effects, scene switching effects, and blackout effects.

Here, subtitle effects are effects that display text information like subtitles in movies. One gaming machine that performs this type of effect is described in Patent No. 5765060, which sets a counter to a predetermined value when the subtitles begin to be displayed, decrements the counter at predetermined intervals, and hides the subtitles when the counter value reaches 0.

The scene switching effect is an effect of switching the scene of the video displayed according to the progress of the game. For example, as described in JP 2013-249024 A, a gaming machine that performs such an effect has a function of switching to another scene immediately when a switching instruction is received after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of displaying a certain scene, and switching to another scene after the predetermined time has elapsed when a switching instruction is received before the predetermined time has elapsed.

The blackout effect is a type of effect in which, when a story-like moving image is displayed over multiple plays (also called a "continuous play"), the display screen of the continuous play becomes darker and visibility appears reduced when the final scene of the continuous play shows an unfavorable game result for the player. An example of a gaming machine that performs this type of effect is described in JP2018-43014A.

In conventional gaming machines that perform the various effects described above, for example, the timing at which the display starts in a subtitle effect or the timing at which the scene switches in a scene switching effect can be poor, which can lead to players being unable to recognize the displayed content or to a slowdown in the tempo of the game, resulting in a loss of interest in the game. Also, in blackout effects, the visibility of the entire display screen can be reduced, which can make it difficult for players to see other information displayed on the display screen and reduce interest in the game. Therefore, in this embodiment, various measures have been taken to prevent a loss of interest in the game in these various effects.

<Conversation Production>
The conversation performance is, for example, a performance in which people, animals, plants, robots, monsters (whether real or imaginary) and the like (collectively referred to as "characters") set as image characters of a gaming machine converse, and predetermined lines uttered by each character are displayed on an image display unit such as a liquid crystal panel, and sound is output from an audio output unit such as a speaker. The conversation performance may play a role of informing the player of content unrelated to the game result, such as introducing the character to the player, explaining the content regarding the game method, or explaining the content regarding the model and specifications of the gaming machine, or may play a role of informing the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the expectation of an advantageous game. An advantageous game refers to a game that is more advantageous to the player than usual (for example, a game during AT (including ART) or a bonus game in a slot machine, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko gaming machine, a probability-varying game, or a time-saving game, and is hereinafter also referred to as "advantageous game"). The expectation of granting an advantageous game refers to the expectation (reliability, certainty) of obtaining a game result (such as winning an AT in a slot machine, winning an AT add-on, winning an add-on with many AT add-ons, winning a bonus, winning an advantageous bonus, winning a rare role, winning a jackpot in a pachinko game machine, winning a chance jackpot (a jackpot more advantageous than a jackpot without a chance jackpot), winning a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with many balls that are paid out), etc.) that has a high probability of executing an advantageous game or allowing the execution of an advantageous game (including the case where it is 100%). In the conversation performance, a predetermined display (also called a "conversation performance display") for the conversation performance is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. Note that the display is not limited to a two-dimensional (flat) image display, but also includes a three-dimensional (stereoscopic) display such as a hologram. Note that the conversation performance may be a mode in which two or more characters talk to each other, or a mode in which one character talks to the player. In short, at the very least, the requirements for dialogue presentation are met if there is a character image and dialogue text that corresponds to the character image.

A conversation production display is a display related to the remarks of each character in a conversation between multiple characters, and includes a display of the character and a display that can be identified as a character. A character display is, specifically, for example, a display of a picture (picture) showing the appearance (appearance, mainly the face) of the character who is speaking (also referred to as a "character image display"). On the other hand, a display that can be identified as a character is, specifically, for example, a display of characters showing the content of the character's remarks (also referred to as a "line display" in the conversation production display). In addition to the character image display and the line display, a display that can identify the name of the character is usually included in the conversation production display. A display that can identify the name of the character is, specifically, for example, a display of characters showing the name of the character who is speaking (also referred to as a "character name display"). A conversation production display is configured to include a character image display, a line display, and a character name display, but a conversation production display that does not include a character name display and is composed of a character image display and a line display may be provided. As specific examples of conversation performance displays, a first conversation performance display KD1 is shown in FIG. 99(A), and a second conversation performance display KD2 is shown in FIG. 99(B).

The first conversation performance display KD1 is composed of a character picture display KG1 that displays the appearance of character CH1, a character name display KN1 that displays the name of character CH1 ("Kenji"), and a line display KS1 that displays the lines of character CH1 ("It's a nice day today, isn't it?"). In the line display KS1, a frame-shaped image (also called an "area image") KW1 that indicates a certain range is displayed together with the lines to make it easier to understand the range of one line, to make it easier to understand which character is speaking, and to make the lines stand out. Similarly, the second conversation performance display KD2 is composed of a character picture display KG2 that displays the appearance of character CH2, which is different from character CH1, a character name display KN2 that displays the name of character CH2 ("Pamela"), and a line display KS2 that displays the lines of character CH2 ("You're so carefree"). In the line display KS2, the area image KW2 is also displayed.

In the first conversation performance display KD1, the character image display KG1, the character name display KN1, the dialogue display KS1, and the range image KW1 are displayed in a predetermined area of the image display unit DP at a predetermined identical timing during one game as each display component constituting the first conversation performance display KD1. Similarly, in the second conversation performance display KD2, the character image display KG2, the character name display KN2, the dialogue display KS2, and the range image KW2 are displayed in another predetermined area of the image display unit DP (e.g., an area that does not overlap with the area where the first conversation image KG1 is displayed) at another predetermined identical timing during one game as each display component constituting the second conversation performance display KD2. As a modification example, for example, in the first conversation performance display KD1, the character image display KG1 and the character name display KN1 are displayed first, and then (e.g., 0.2 seconds later), the dialogue display KS1 is displayed together with the range image KW1, and the display timing between the display components may be slightly different. This also applies to the second conversation performance display KD2.

Regarding the timing at which the conversation performance display is displayed, any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a predetermined switch (e.g., a bet switch, a start lever, a stop switch, etc., collectively referred to as a "main side switch") controlled by the main control means can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the conversation performance display. For example, during one game, the first conversation performance display KD1 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing (the same timing as the lever operation reception or a timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the lever operation reception) after the start lever accepts the operation (also referred to as the "lever operation reception time"), triggered by the valid acceptance of the operation of the start lever. Also, during the same one game, the second conversation performance display KD2 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing (the same timing as the first stop operation reception or a timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the first stop operation reception) after the first stop operation is validly accepted (the first stop operation reception time). In addition, when the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 are displayed at the timing of the acceptance of the third stop operation, the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 displayed on the image display unit DP are erased when the operation of the bet switch to start the next game or the operation of the start lever is accepted, and when the operation of the bet switch to start the next game or the operation of the start lever is accepted and the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 are erased, if the voice of the lines output from the voice output unit has not yet been output, the first conversation performance display KD1 to the second conversation performance display KD2 on the image display unit DP are erased, but the voice of the lines may be output to the end. However, if the operation of the start lever for the next game selects a performance that the player wants to pay attention to, such as a rare role announcement or freeze, or a new conversation performance, the voice of the lines is stopped from being output at the timing after the operation of the start lever is accepted. By configuring in this way, even a player who wants the game to progress quickly can understand the contents of the presentation. It goes without saying that the sound of the dialogue may be erased together with erasing the first conversation presentation display KD1 through the second conversation presentation display KD2 on the image display unit DP.

The timing at which the conversation presentation display is displayed can be set to any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a sub-button controlled by the sub-control means. For example, during one game, an image that prompts the player to operate the sub-button (for example, an image that combines an image of the sub-button with the word "PUSH") is displayed on the image display unit DP. Then, in response to the display, the first conversation presentation display KD1 or the second conversation presentation display KD2 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing (the same timing as the sub-button operation or a predetermined time after the sub-button operation) after the sub-button is operated (also referred to as "sub-button operation time"), triggered by the sub-button being effectively operated (including cases where the sub-button is effectively operated by a single operation and cases where the sub-button is effectively operated by a predetermined number of consecutive operations). Furthermore, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the timing at which the conversation display is displayed can be set to, for example, the point at which a predetermined amount of time has elapsed since the game ball entered the starting hole (also referred to as "entering the starting hole").

During one game, the conversation performance display may be displayed in a case where none, only one, or multiple conversation performance displays are displayed. The difference in the number of conversation performance displays displayed during one game may not be related to the game result, or the game result may differ depending on the number. For example, the expectation of an advantageous game may be higher when two or more conversation performance displays are displayed than when only one conversation performance display is displayed during one game. Whether or not to display the conversation performance display, the type of conversation performance display to be displayed (for example, the type of dialogue in the dialogue display), the number, and the display timing are determined based on, for example, the game state (for example, whether or not it is in an advantageous zone), the result of the internal lottery (for example, whether or not a rare role has been won), and other lottery results such as the AT lottery and the AT addition lottery (or may be determined based on the satisfaction of any other predetermined condition). When multiple conversation performance displays are displayed, at most one conversation performance display is displayed per display trigger.

For example, in a case where the first conversation performance display KD1 and the second conversation performance display KD2 are displayed during one game, if the first conversation performance display KD1 is displayed as a result of the operation of the start lever, the second conversation performance display KD2 will be displayed after one of the three stop switches has effectively accepted the first stop operation. In other words, the second conversation performance display KD2 will not be displayed before the first stop operation is effectively accepted (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed). This makes it possible to increase the interest of the game by, for example, making the expectation of an advantageous game different depending on which trigger caused the conversation performance display to be displayed. Also, by allowing up to one display per display trigger, it is possible to prevent the player from mistaking the trigger for the conversation performance display to be displayed and from confusing the multiple displayed conversation performance displays.

Three or more conversation production displays may be displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. For example, after the first conversation production display KD1 is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever, and the second conversation production display KD2 is displayed in response to the reception of the first stop operation, during the same game, a third conversation production display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the reception of the second stop operation (the same timing as the reception of the second stop operation or a timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the second stop operation) in response to one of the remaining two stop switches effectively receiving the second stop operation, and further, a fourth conversation production display (not shown) is displayed at a predetermined timing after the reception of the third stop operation (the same timing as the reception of the third stop operation or a timing at which a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the third stop operation) in response to the remaining one stop switch effectively receiving the third stop operation. The character in the third conversation production display and the character in the fourth conversation production display may be different characters from the character CH1 and the character CH2, or may be the same character.

When multiple conversation production displays are displayed on the image display unit DP during one game, the conversation production display displayed first continues to be displayed without being erased (hidden) from the image display unit DP even if the conversation production display displayed later is displayed. For example, in the above example, the first conversation production display KD1 displayed first continues to be displayed as it is even if the second conversation production display KD2 is displayed, and then, even if the third conversation production display is displayed, the first and second conversation production displays KD1 and KD2 are not hidden and continue to be displayed as they are. Furthermore, even if the fourth conversation production display is displayed after that, the first to third conversation production displays are not hidden and are displayed at that time. In this way, by making the conversation production display displayed first continue to be displayed even if the conversation production display displayed later is displayed, multiple conversation production displays can be displayed simultaneously (so that the display periods of each conversation production display overlap each other) on the image display unit DP during one game. This makes it possible to obtain a production effect in which the image display unit DP looks lively by using multiple conversation production displays. In addition, in cases where the player is likely to feel bored due to a game state (e.g., during a non-advantageous period) in which the player is unlikely to obtain a favorable game result, by displaying multiple conversation performance displays throughout one game, it is possible to draw the player's attention to those conversation performance displays and reduce the player's sense of boredom. Also, the expectation of receiving an advantageous game may differ depending on the trigger at which the conversation performance display is displayed, in which case the player can be made interested in the timing of the display of the conversation performance, making it possible to increase the player's interest in the game.

In the conversation presentation display, the content of the character's lines (for example, the content of the line display KS1 in the first conversation presentation display KD1 or the content of the line display KS2 in the second conversation presentation display KD2) may be set to have no relation to the game result regardless of the content, or the game result may differ depending on the line content. For example, in a case where the content of the line display KS2 is "You're so carefree" (see Figure 99 (B)) or "That's true" (see Figure 100), it may be set so that neither case has any effect on the game result, or it may be set so that the latter case has a higher expectation of granting a more advantageous game than the former case. Also, the line content may be changed when a sub-button is operated. In addition, the case where the dialogue content changes as a result of the sub button being operated may include a case where the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue display starts) as a result of the sub button being operated, and a case where the dialogue content changes as a result of the sub button being operated after the dialogue is displayed. In the case where the dialogue content changes as a result of the sub button being operated after the dialogue is displayed (the dialogue voice is also output at the same time), the operation of the sub button (operation acceptance) may be enabled before the dialogue voice has ended, or the operation of the sub button may be enabled after the dialogue voice has ended. In the case where the operation of the sub button is enabled before the dialogue voice has ended, if the sub button is operated in the middle of the dialogue voice, the dialogue being output is interrupted and a new line is output, which is a specification that is preferred by players who want to know the result of the game quickly. In addition, in the case where the operation of the sub button is enabled after the dialogue voice has ended, the dialogue is not interrupted, which is a specification that is preferred by players who want to enjoy the presentation.

The characters displayed in the dialogue display in the conversation performance display may always be of the same font, size, and color, or the font, size, color, etc. may vary depending on the game situation and the timing of the display of the conversation performance display. The expectation of an advantageous game may differ depending on the font, size, color, etc. For example, in addition to a mode in which the outer line (contour) of the character or the area inside the outer line, or both, are normal colors (e.g., black or white), the dialogue display may be displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue dialogue display") and in red (also referred to as "red dialogue display"), and in that case, the expectation of an advantageous game may be higher with the red dialogue display than with the blue dialogue display.

As an example, FIG. 101(A) shows an example of blue dialogue display for the character Kenji's line "It's a nice day today," with the area inside the outline of the text in blue, and red dialogue display for the character Pamela's line "That's true, isn't it?" with the outline of the text in red (with the area inside the outline in white). In this example, the size of the text in the red dialogue display is made larger than the size of the text in the blue dialogue display, and the difference in size also suggests to the player that the red dialogue display has a higher expectation of awarding a more advantageous game. In the red dialogue display, not only the text size of the dialogue display, but also the size of the character in the character picture display and the text size of the character name display may be made larger. In other words, in the red dialogue display, one or two or all of the text size of the dialogue display, the text size of the character name display, and the size of the character may be made larger than those in the blue dialogue display (only the color of the text, etc. may be changed, and the text size, etc. may be the same). In addition, when multiple conversation performance displays are displayed during one game, the text of the dialogue displayed in the first conversation performance display (e.g., the first conversation performance display KD1) may be of one size or font, and the text of the dialogue displayed in the second or subsequent conversation performance displays (e.g., the first conversation performance display KD1) may be of multiple different sizes or fonts.

When multiple dialogue display displays with different expectations for providing advantageous play, such as blue dialogue display and red dialogue display, are displayed during one game, the dialogue display with the higher expectation is displayed later (it is also possible to provide a case where it is displayed first). Therefore, when multiple dialogue display displays are displayed during one game, the first dialogue display (e.g., the first dialogue display KD1) is likely to display dialogue displays in normal colors or dialogue displays in colors with low expectation, and the second or subsequent dialogue display (e.g., the second dialogue display KD2) is likely to display dialogue displays in colors with high expectation. In the case of blue dialogue display and red dialogue display, for example, the blue dialogue display is displayed upon receipt of the operation of the start lever, and the red dialogue display is displayed upon receipt of the first stop operation. It is also possible to provide a case where the red dialogue display with a relatively high expectation is displayed so as to overlap the blue dialogue display with a relatively low expectation. When the blue dialogue display is displayed overlapping, the red dialogue display may hide part or all of the characters in the blue dialogue display (see FIG. 100(B)), or the red dialogue display may be overlapped so as not to hide the characters in the blue dialogue display (see FIG. 101(A)). In addition, when the second conversation production display KD2 is displayed after the first conversation production display KD1, the color indicating the expectation level of the second conversation production display KD2 will not be displayed in a color lower than the color indicating the expectation level of the first conversation production display KD1. This is also applied when the third conversation production display or the fourth conversation production display is displayed, and the expectation level of the later conversation production will not be lower than that displayed in the previous conversation production. This prevents the degree of expectation from becoming difficult to understand when a red dialogue display with high expectation is displayed first in the first conversation production display KD1, and then a blue dialogue display with low expectation is displayed in the second conversation production display KD2. In addition, displaying a normal dialogue display in the second conversation performance display KD2 after displaying a red dialogue display in the first conversation performance display KD1 does not cause confusion for the player, so there is no problem. In addition, when a conversation performance occurs before and after a reach performance in a pachinko game machine, the expectation level of the conversation performance display displayed after the reach performance may be lower than the expectation level of the conversation performance display displayed before the reach performance. This is because the expectation level increases stepwise because the reach performance is sandwiched in between. For example, before the reach performance, the player is interested in whether or not it will be a reach, so if the red dialogue display of the conversation performance appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will be a reach. In contrast, after the reach performance, the player is interested in whether or not it will be a jackpot, so if the blue dialogue display of the conversation performance appears at this stage, the player expects whether or not it will be a jackpot. Since the targets of expectation are different in this way, it is possible to make the performance configuration easy to understand even if the expectation level drops before and after the reach performance. In addition, the characters displayed in the conversation performances before and after the reach performance may be the same character, or the same character may be displayed in a different manner (for example, with a different costume or facial expression), or may be different characters.

The colors of the characters (colors other than the normal colors) in the dialogue display are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue dialogue display and the red dialogue display, a green dialogue display in which the characters are green, a pattern dialogue display in which the characters are a specific pattern (for example, a pattern that symbolizes the gaming machine manufacturer), and a rainbow dialogue display in which the characters are rainbow colored may be provided. The expectation of a favorable game may increase in the order of blue dialogue display < green dialogue display < red dialogue display < pattern dialogue display < rainbow dialogue display. In this case, the dialogue display with the highest expectation (rainbow dialogue display in this example) may be a confirmation presentation with a 100% expectation (for example, indicating AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.).

The dialogue display in the dialogue presentation is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning is incomprehensible, such as characters in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing shapes and symbols (▽, ●, *). When dialogue display containing characters whose meaning is incomprehensible is displayed, the expectation of being awarded an advantageous game may be higher than when dialogue display composed of characters whose meaning is understandable is displayed. Furthermore, the character string (sentence) in the dialogue display may be displayed on a single line (see FIG. 99), or may be broken down into two or more lines (including cases where the character string is composed of two or more sentences) (see FIG. 100).

The range image KW1 in the first conversation performance display KD1 and the range image KW2 in the second conversation performance display KD2 are both in the shape of a so-called speech bubble, but the shape of the range image is not limited to this shape and can be any shape. The shape of the range image may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation performance display. Furthermore, the difference in the shape of the range image may differ the expectation level for the game result, etc. For example, there are cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of a speech bubble and cases where the range image is displayed in the shape of an arrow, and the expectation level for granting a favorable game may be higher in the latter case than in the former case. Note that such range images may not be displayed, and the characters of the dialogue display may be displayed in an exposed state (without being surrounded by a frame, etc.).

The color and pattern of the area inside the outline of the range image may always be the same, or may differ depending on the game situation and the timing of the display of the conversation performance display. The expectation of granting an advantageous game may differ depending on the color and pattern of the area inside the outline. For example, in a case where the area inside the outline of the range image is displayed in blue (also included in blue dialogue display) and red (also included in red dialogue display) in addition to the normal color, the expectation of granting an advantageous game may be higher in the red mode than in the blue mode.

As an example, FIG. 100(A) shows an example of the dialogue display of the character Kenji in which the area inside the outline of the range image is blue, and the dialogue display of the character Pamela in which the area inside the outline of the range image is red. Note that the color of the area inside the outline of the range image is not limited to blue and red. For example, the area inside the outline of the range image may be green (also included in the green dialogue display), a specific pattern (also included in the pattern dialogue display), or rainbow colored (also included in the rainbow dialogue display). Also, in the example of FIG. 100(A), a case may be provided in which the red dialogue display is displayed so as to overlap the blue dialogue display.

The character image display in the conversation performance display may always be the same for the same character, or may be different for the same character depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation performance display. The expectation of granting an advantageous game move may differ depending on the mode of the character image display. For example, in a case where the character image KG1 in the first conversation performance display KD1 is displayed in a mode in which it is displayed with a hat and a mode in which it is displayed without a hat, the expectation of granting an advantageous game move may be higher in the mode in which it is displayed with a hat than in the mode in which it is not worn.

When a conversation performance display is displayed on the image display section DP, a different type of performance display (another image) may be displayed on the same image display section DP. In such a case, the conversation performance display and the other performance display can be rendered on different layers using a layer function installed in the graphic software used to create the image. For example, when an image (also called a "background image") consisting of a moving image or still image is displayed so as to occupy almost the entire area of the screen of the image display section DP, if it is desired to display a conversation performance display so as to overlap a part of the background image, the conversation performance display can be rendered on a layer on the near side (the front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is rendered. In this way, even if the conversation performance display is displayed overlapping the background image, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the conversation performance display. Note that when multiple conversation performance displays are displayed, each conversation performance display may be rendered on a separate layer.

When an error occurs while the conversation production display is displayed on the image display unit DP, an error notification display for notifying the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display unit DP. In this case, the error notification display is displayed on a layer closer to the user than the layer on which the conversation production display is displayed, and is displayed so as to overlap the conversation production display. As an example, FIG. 101(B) shows an example in which an HP error notification display for notifying the occurrence of an HP error is displayed so as to overlap the conversation production display. In this example, the dialogue display of the conversation production display is hidden by the HP error notification display, and the content cannot be seen. In this way, when the conversation production display and the error notification display are displayed simultaneously on the image display unit DP, the error notification display is displayed so as to overlap the dialogue display of the conversation production display, and the content of the dialogue display becomes invisible (it is also possible to provide a case in which the error notification display is displayed so that the content of the dialogue display can be seen). Examples of cases where an error notification display is performed include when various errors occur as described in the description of the slot machine 1 of the first embodiment, as well as when a communication error or a door open error occurs, and in the case of a pachinko game machine, when a left hit warning or a bottom tray full error occurs. In addition, although it is not an error, there is a reel rotation stop suggestion image as a notification effect for a player in a slot machine. This is an effect in which "Please stop the reels" is displayed on the image display unit after a predetermined time (for example, one minute) of reel rotation has elapsed. Even when the reel rotation stop suggestion image is displayed, it is displayed in front of the conversation effect display (on the layer on the front side), so the conversation effect display is difficult to see (it may not be entirely visible or only a part of it may be invisible). Therefore, the text "Please stop the reels" is displayed clearly, so that the attention of the player is effectively drawn. The reel rotation stop suggestion image may be erased when a stop operation is accepted for one of the multiple reels that are rotating, or when a stop operation is accepted for all reels. Also, when a volume change image is displayed by accepting a button for changing the volume during a game (while the reels are spinning in the case of a slot machine, or while the volume is changing in the case of a pachinko machine), the volume change image is displayed in front of the conversation performance display. The volume change image is a meter display that shows the volume level, and the display ends when a confirmation operation is performed after the volume is changed or when time has passed, and the conversation performance display becomes visible again.

When an assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, a conversation effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP. As an example, FIG. 102 shows a state in which a conversation effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (particularly a push order navigation effect display that notifies the push order) is displayed on the image display unit DP. In this example, as shown in FIG. 102(A), when a push navigation effect display that notifies the "center left and right" push order from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display unit DP, a conversation effect display of the character Kenji is displayed. At this time, Kenji's conversation effect display is displayed in an area above the display area of the push navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the push navigation effect display. Also, as shown in FIG. 102(B), when a push navigation effect display that notifies the "left and right" push order from the second stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the image display unit DP after the first stop operation is accepted, a conversation effect display of the character Pamela is displayed. At this time, Pamela's conversation performance display is displayed in an area above the display area of the press navigation performance display, so as not to overlap with the press navigation performance display.

In this way, when the conversation performance display is displayed on the image display unit DP while the assist performance is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation performance display is displayed so as not to overlap with the push navigation performance display. More specifically, the dialogue display and the character name display in the conversation performance display are displayed without overlapping with the push navigation performance display, while a part of the character image display (for example, the character's torso or hand part) may be displayed overlapping with the push navigation performance display. In that case, for example, the conversation performance display is rendered on the layer on the back side (the rear side away from the player), and the push navigation performance display is rendered on the layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation performance display. Note that a case may be provided in which the dialogue display and a part of the character name display in the conversation performance display are displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation performance display. Even in that case, it is preferable to render, for example, the conversation performance display on the layer on the back side, and the push navigation performance display on the layer on the front side, thereby ensuring the visibility of the push navigation performance display. In addition, the dialogue displayed in the conversational presentation shown in Figures 102(A) and (B) ("It seems like it's best to press the buttons according to the push order navigation," "Follow the navigation") are examples of cases where the content of the dialogue displayed in the conversational presentation is about how to play. In addition to this, the content about how to play can be a variety of other things, such as "It seems like it's hot if you pull a watermelon during the specialized zone," "Push from the left during normal play," "Follow the navigation during AT," and "If a UFO appears somewhere in the background image during normal play, it's your chance."

When the conversation production display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the conversation production sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The conversation production sound is basically the same as the dialogue content of the character in the conversation production display. For example, if the content of the dialogue display KS1 in the first conversation production display KD1 is "It's a nice day today," the corresponding conversation production sound will be "It's nice weather today." In contrast, a case may be provided in which a sound with a content different from the dialogue content of the character in the conversation production display is output as the conversation production sound. For example, if the content of the dialogue display KS1 is incomprehensible, such as "※↓●//っをg◇＃," a conversation production sound with an understandable content, "It's nice weather today," may be output. In addition, when the dialogue content in the conversation production display and the content of the conversation production sound are different, the expectation of granting advantageous play may be increased compared to when the two contents are the same.

<Subtitle Production>
Subtitle effects (also called "telop effects") are effects in which, for example, a character appearing in a background image (moving image) makes a statement (which may be a statement during a conversation with another character or a monologue), and the text indicating the content of the statement is displayed like a telop that appears on a screen during a television broadcast or a subtitle in a movie. Subtitle effects mainly serve to inform the player of content related to the game, such as suggesting the progress of the game, but may also serve to inform the player of content unrelated to the game. In the subtitle effect, a subtitle effect display for the subtitle effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. Also, the subtitle effect may serve to inform the player of content related to the game result, such as suggesting the expectation of the granting of an advantageous game. An advantageous game refers to a game that is more advantageous to a player than usual (for example, a game during the AT (including during the ART) or a bonus game in a slot machine, a game during a jackpot in a pachinko game machine, a probability-varying game, or a time-saving game (collectively referred to as "advantageous game"). The expectation of granting an advantageous game refers to the expectation (reliability, probability) of performing an advantageous game or obtaining a game result that increases the probability (including 100%) of allowing the performance of an advantageous game (for example, an AT win in a slot machine, an AT add-on win, an add-on win with a large number of AT add-ons, a bonus win, an advantageous bonus win, a rare role win, a jackpot win in a pachinko game machine, a chance jackpot (a jackpot that is more advantageous than a jackpot without a chance jackpot), a 16-round jackpot (a jackpot with a large number of balls that are paid out in a jackpot), etc.). In the subtitle production, a subtitle production display for the subtitle production is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing.

The subtitle effect display is a display related to the remarks of a character appearing in a background image, and is composed of a display that can be identified as text. A display that can be identified as text is, for example, a display of text (also called a "telop display") that shows the content of the character's remarks (corresponding to the lines in a conversation effect display). Note that when the subtitle effect display is displayed, the character does not necessarily have to be displayed in the background image. In short, the requirements for the subtitle effect display are met if text is displayed on the background image. The subtitle effect display is displayed on a layer that is closer to the player than the layer on which the background image is displayed. Therefore, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on the background image, the visibility of the subtitle effect display (especially the telop display) is sufficiently ensured. As an example of the subtitle effect display, a first subtitle effect display JD1 is shown in FIG. 103 (A), and a second subtitle effect display JD2 is shown in FIG. 103 (B).

The first subtitle performance display JD1 is configured to include a caption display JT1 that shows the contents of a statement made by the character CH1 ("It's fine weather, so it looks like a good chance!") appearing in one scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. In this way, the first subtitle performance display JD1 is configured to include the caption display JT1, and does not include a display showing the name of the character CH1 ("Kenji") (referred to as a "character name display" as in the conversation performance display). The second subtitle performance display JD2 is configured to include a caption display JT2 that shows another statement made by the character CH1 ("The weather is looking ominous!") appearing in another scene in the background image HG1 displayed on the image display unit DP during the same one game. In this way, the second subtitle performance display JD2 is configured to include the caption display JT2, and does not include a character name display (it is also possible to provide a subtitle performance display that includes a character name display). Note that the character's name may be displayed as part of the contents of the statement in the caption display. In this case, the display of the name is considered to be different from the character name display.

Regarding the timing at which the subtitle effect display is displayed, any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a specific switch controlled by the main control means side, such as a bet switch, a start lever, or a stop switch, can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the subtitle effect display. For example, during one game, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a specific timing (simultaneous with the lever operation reception or a specific time has passed since the lever operation reception) after the start lever has effectively received the operation (the time of lever operation reception) triggered by the effective reception of the operation of the start lever. Also, during the same one game, the second subtitle effect display JD2 may be displayed on the image display unit DP at a specific timing (simultaneous with the first stop operation reception or a specific time has passed since the first stop operation reception) after the first stop operation has effectively received (the time of first stop operation reception) triggered by the effective reception of the first stop operation by any of the three stop switches. In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the timing at which the subtitle display is displayed can be set to, for example, the point when a predetermined time has passed since the game ball enters the start hole (also referred to as ``entering the start hole'' or ``start of the fluctuation''), any point in time when the SP reach effect is displayed after the reach is established, the point when a predetermined time has passed since the large prize hole is opened (also referred to as ``opening of the large prize hole'' or ``start of the jackpot''), or the point when a predetermined time has passed since the game ball enters the large prize hole (also referred to as ``entering the large prize hole'').

During one game, there may be no subtitle display, only one subtitle display, or multiple subtitle displays. Whether or not to display a subtitle display, the type of subtitle display to be displayed (e.g., the type of subtitle display content), the number of subtitle displays, and the display timing are determined based on, for example, the game state (e.g., whether or not the game is in a favorable zone), the result of an internal lottery (e.g., whether or not a rare role has been won), and other lottery results such as an AT lottery or an AT addition lottery (or may be determined based on the satisfaction of any other predetermined condition). Note that even if the result of the internal lottery is the same, a subtitle display is more likely to be displayed during a favorable zone than during a non-favorable zone. When multiple subtitle display displays are displayed, multiple subtitle display displays may be displayed per display trigger. For example, in a case where a first subtitle performance display JD1 and a second subtitle performance display JD2 are displayed during one game, the first subtitle performance display JD1 may be displayed in response to the acceptance of a start lever operation, and the second subtitle performance display JD2 may be displayed before any of the three stop switches effectively accepts the first stop operation (it is also possible to allow only one to be displayed per display trigger).

Three or more subtitle effect displays may be displayed on the image display unit DP during one game. For example, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed in response to the operation of the start lever, and the second subtitle effect display JD2 may be displayed in response to the reception of a first stop operation. Then, during the same game, a third subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing (simultaneous with the reception of the second stop operation or a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the second stop operation) after the second stop operation is effectively received (when the second stop operation is received) in response to one of the remaining two stop switches effectively receiving the second stop operation, and a fourth subtitle effect display (not shown) may be displayed at a predetermined timing (simultaneous with the reception of the third stop operation or a predetermined time has passed since the reception of the third stop operation) after the third stop operation is effectively received (when the third stop operation is received) in response to the remaining one stop switch effectively receiving the third stop operation.

In addition, when comparing the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the start lever operation (including the cases of 0% and 100%, the same applies below) with the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation, the percentage of cases where the subtitle effect display is triggered by the acceptance of the third stop operation is relatively higher. This is in consideration of the psychology of the player who wants to concentrate on operating the stop switch after operating the start lever, and by relatively increasing the percentage of times the subtitle effect display is displayed after the third stop operation, it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the subtitle effect display. Also, when the background image is a one-shot effect (an effect that starts and ends during one game), the subtitle effect display is rarely triggered by the acceptance of the first or second stop operation, but when the background image is a continuous effect (an effect that continues over multiple games), the subtitle effect display is more often triggered by the acceptance of the first or second stop operation. For example, when the background image is a one-shot effect and the subtitle effect display is displayed (case H1),
Comparing the case where the subtitle effect display is displayed when the background image is a continuous effect (called case H2), the rate at which the subtitle effect display is displayed in response to the acceptance of the first stop operation is relatively higher in case H2 than in case H1. This is because the continuous effect plays the role of notifying a player of a predetermined game result (such as winning the AT) of high interest to the player, and the content of the effect is often advanced with each acceptance of a stop operation to draw attention to the content of the effect, so that it is easy to provide an opportunity to display the subtitle effect display in response to the progress of the continuous effect in response to the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation. By displaying the subtitle effect display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the content of the continuous effect (the progress of the effect).

When multiple subtitle performance displays are displayed on the image display unit DP during one game, the subtitle performance display displayed first is erased (hidden) from the image display unit DP at the time the subtitle performance display displayed later is displayed. In other words, the subtitle performance display displayed first is erased from the image display unit DP before the subtitle performance display displayed later is displayed (including at approximately the same time). For example, in the above example, the first subtitle performance display JD1 displayed first is hidden before the second subtitle performance display JD2 is displayed, the second subtitle performance display JD2 is hidden before the third subtitle performance display is displayed, and the third subtitle performance display is hidden before the fourth subtitle performance display is displayed. In this way, by making the first subtitle performance display hidden before the subtitle performance display displayed later is displayed, it is possible to perform subtitle performance while appropriately switching the subtitle performance display in accordance with the progress of the game and the background image. Therefore, it is possible to execute a subtitle performance with a good tempo that is consistent with the progress of the game and the background image.

The subtitle performance display may be hidden when a predetermined time has elapsed after it has been displayed, or when a predetermined switch is operated, or when the next subtitle performance display is displayed. For example, a subtitle performance display displayed in response to the operation of the start lever may be hidden when any of the first to third stop operations is accepted, or when a predetermined time (e.g., 3 seconds) has elapsed since the start of the display regardless of the acceptance of the stop operation, or when the next subtitle performance display is displayed even before the first stop operation is accepted, the subtitle performance display may be hidden immediately before the display of the subtitle display performance. As a specific example, in a case in which the first subtitle performance display JD1 is displayed in response to the operation of the start lever and the second subtitle performance display JD2 is displayed in response to the acceptance of the third stop operation, the first subtitle performance display JD1 may be hidden first after the third stop operation is accepted, and then the second subtitle performance display may be displayed.

The subtitle effect display may be displayed according to the movement of a character appearing in a background image (e.g., the movement of the mouth, eyes, or hands). For example, in a case where the background image HG1 (moving image) starts to be displayed simultaneously with the lever operation, and a predetermined time (e.g., one second) has elapsed since the start, there is a scene (called scene A) in which the character CH1 in the background image HG1 moves his mouth, the first subtitle effect display JD1 may be displayed in accordance with scene A. In order to match the timing of scene A with the display timing of the first subtitle effect display JD1, the following method may be adopted. As a premise, in response to the result of an internal lottery or the like performed on the main control means side when the lever operation is accepted, the sub-main control means selects whether or not to execute the background image and subtitle effect display and the display contents, and as a result, it is decided to display the background image HG1 and the first subtitle effect display JD1.

In this case, the sub-main control means first transmits a command (called command A) for transmitting the result of the determination to the sub-sub control means. The sub-sub control means, which receives command A, reads out the image file of the background image HG1 and starts displaying the background image HG1 on the image display unit DP, and also reads out the image file of the first subtitle effect display JD1 and starts displaying the first subtitle effect display JD1 on the image display unit DP.
The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed on the image display unit DP in accordance with the timing of scene A (for example, determined by the number of frames until scene A, the frame rate, etc.). A counter for timing may be set, and the timing of scene A may be measured by this counter. The counter may be set by the sub-main control means or by the sub-sub control means. When the counter is set by the sub-main control means, it may be set when command A is transmitted, or the sub-sub control means may transmit a command (called command B) to the sub-main control means when it reads the image file of the background image HG1, and may set the command B at the timing when the sub-main control means receives it. Then, when a predetermined time is reached after the counter is set, a command (called command C) for transmitting the time arrival is transmitted to the sub-sub control means, and the sub-sub control means displays the first subtitle effect display JD1 on the image display unit DP at the timing when it receives this command C. The subtitle effect display is depicted on a layer on the near side (the front side closer to the player) than the layer on which the background image is depicted. In this way, even if the subtitle effect display is displayed superimposed on a background image, it is possible to ensure sufficient visibility of the subtitle effect display (especially the telop display).

In the subtitle display, the contents of the telop display (for example, the contents of the telop display JT1 in the first subtitle display JD1 and the contents of the telop display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2) may be set to have no relation to the game result regardless of the contents, or the expectation of the advantageous game may differ depending on the contents of the telop display. For example, in a case where the contents of the telop display JT2 are "The weather is getting ominous!" (see FIG. 103(B)) and "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!" (see FIG. 104(B)), the expectation of the advantageous game may be set to have no effect on the expectation of the advantageous game in either case, or the expectation of the advantageous game may be set to be higher in the latter case than in the former case. In addition, the contents of the telop display may be changed when the sub button is operated. Note that there are conversational and subtitle effects as effects in which the display contents change in response to the operation of the sub button, and the conversational effects change the display contents in response to the operation of the sub button relatively more often than the subtitle effects. In addition, in a pachinko game machine, a conversation performance and a subtitle performance may be displayed during one variation, and in this configuration, the expectation level of the conversation performance and the subtitle performance may not be related. For example, the conversation performance is displayed in red dialogue, but the subtitle performance is displayed in blue text. In particular, when a conversation performance is displayed before a reach performance and a subtitle performance is displayed after a reach performance, the expectation level is different, so this is more preferable. In addition, a mode in which the expectation level increases such as the first subtitle performance display JD1 being white text and the second subtitle performance display JD2 being red text may be considered. Furthermore, a mode in which the expectation level decreases such as the second subtitle performance display JD2 being red text and the third subtitle performance display being white text may be considered. This mode is suitable for use as a subtitle performance when the background image is in a mode in which a failure is displayed. For example, when a performance is being performed to determine whether or not a favorable bonus will be awarded (such as a bonus win or AT win in the case of a slot machine, or a performance to determine whether or not a reach will be reached or a jackpot will be awarded in the case of a pachinko machine), if a subtitle performance (such as the text "Let's go!") is displayed in red to heighten the sense of anticipation, and then, if the subtitle performance (such as the text "You lost") in a scene indicating that the performance to determine whether or not the favorable bonus will be awarded was a miss is also displayed in red, it will be difficult to tell whether the miss was due to a miss or a comeback, so the text "You lost" is displayed in white.

Furthermore, the characters of the telop display in the subtitle effect display may always be of the same font (or style), size (or dimension), and color, or may be different in font, size, color, or the like depending on the game situation or the display timing of the subtitle effect display. The degree of expectation of an advantageous game may differ depending on the font, size, color, or the like. For example, as the telop display, in addition to a mode in which the color of either or both of the outer line (contour line) of the characters and the area inside the outer line is a normal color (black or white), a mode in which the characters are displayed in blue (also referred to as a "blue telop display") and a mode in which the characters are displayed in red (also referred to as a "red telop display") may be provided, and in this case, the degree of expectation of an advantageous game may be higher with the red telop display than with the blue telop display.

As an example, Fig. 104 (A) and (B) show an example of a blue caption display for caption display JT1 "It's a good day, so it looks like we have a chance!", with the area inside the outline of the characters in blue, and a red caption display for caption display JT2 "It's a perfect sunny day!!", with the area inside the outline of the characters in red. In this example, the size of the characters in the red caption display is made larger than the size of the characters in the blue caption display, and the font of the characters in the red caption display is changed, and these differences also suggest to the player that the red caption display has a higher expectation of awarding a more advantageous game. Note that when multiple caption display effects are displayed during one game, the characters in the caption display in the first caption display may be of one size and font, and the characters in the caption display in the second and subsequent caption display may be of multiple sizes and fonts. When multiple subtitle effects with different expectations for providing advantageous play, such as blue and red subtitle effects, are displayed during one game, the subtitle effect with the higher expectation may be displayed later.

The colors of the characters, etc. in the telop display (colors other than the normal colors) are not limited to blue and red. For example, in addition to the blue telop display and the red telop display, a green telop display in which the characters, etc. are green and a rainbow telop display in which the characters, etc. are rainbow-colored may be provided. The expectation of a favorable game may increase in the order of blue telop display < green telop display < red telop display < rainbow telop display. In this case, the telop display with the highest expectation (rainbow telop display in this example) may be a confirmation performance with a 100% expectation (for example, indicating AT confirmation, bonus confirmation, jackpot confirmation, etc.). Note that in the case of a telop display displayed in a specific scene of the background image, the characters, etc. may not be displayed in a specific color. For example, when a telop display with content related to the lyrics is displayed in a scene where a character is singing on the background screen, the rainbow telop display may not be used. Furthermore, the caption display (rainbow caption display) which serves as the confirmation effect is set to be hidden when a predetermined switch or the like is operated by the player after the start of display, and is not hidden when a predetermined time has passed since the start of display. This prevents the confirmation effect from disappearing over time, which could confuse the player. Note that when a demo screen is displayed on the image display unit DP, the rainbow caption display that has been displayed up until that point may be hidden. Caption displays of other colors (for example, blue caption display) may be hidden when a predetermined time has passed since the start of display.

The caption display in the subtitle display is usually composed of words and sentences in characters that the player can understand. However, it may be composed of characters whose meaning is incomprehensible, such as characters in an ancient language, garbled characters, or characters containing figures and symbols (▽, ●, ※). When a caption display containing characters whose meaning is incomprehensible is displayed, the expectation of receiving an advantageous game may be increased compared to when a caption display made up of characters whose meaning can be understood is displayed. Furthermore, the character string (sentence) in the caption display is basically displayed in one line without line breaks, but there may be cases where the character string is broken down into two or more lines and displayed (including cases where the character string is made up of two or more sentences).

In the subtitle effect display, the characters of the telop display are often displayed in a bare state (not surrounded by a frame or the like), but may be displayed in a state surrounded by a frame or the like. As an example, FIG. 105(A) shows a state in which the characters of the telop display JT2, "The weather is getting ominous!", are surrounded by a frame (called a "background frame") JW1. The illustrated background frame JW1 has a rectangular outer border, and the area inside the outer border is decorated with a predetermined pattern. The background frame's form (the shape of the outer border and the color and pattern of the area inside the outer border) is not limited to such a form and can be any form (including a form without an outer border). The form of the background frame may always be the same, or may be different depending on the game situation or the display timing of the conversation effect display. The degree of expectation of an advantageous game may be different depending on the difference in the form of the background frame. For example, in addition to a mode in which the area inside the outer line of the background frame is displayed in a normal color, there may also be a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also included in blue caption display) and a mode in which it is displayed in red (also included in red caption display), so that the expectation of awarding a more advantageous game is higher when it is displayed in red than when it is displayed in blue.

When an error occurs while the subtitle performance display is displayed on the image display unit DP, an error notification display to notify the occurrence of the error may be displayed on the image display unit DP. In this case, the error notification display is displayed on a layer closer to the layer on which the subtitle performance display is displayed, but is displayed so as not to overlap with the subtitle performance display. As an example, FIG. 105(B) shows an example in which an HP error notification display to notify the occurrence of an HP error is displayed in an area on the image display unit DP above the area in which the subtitle performance display JD2 is displayed so as not to overlap with the subtitle performance display JD2. In this way, when the subtitle performance display and the error notification display are displayed simultaneously on the image display unit DP, the error notification display is displayed without overlapping with the subtitle performance display (however, the background image (which may include characters) may overlap with the error notification display and at least a part of it may not be clearly visible), ensuring the visibility of the contents of the telop display (it is also possible to provide a case in which at least a part of the telop display is hidden by the error notification display). The types of errors when the error notification display is performed are the same as those described in the explanation of the conversation performance. Depending on the type of error, an error may be displayed on the entire screen (such as a PAM error or an error on the sub control side), so in this case the caption display may not be visible. Also, even if the above-mentioned reel spinning suggestion image is displayed, it does not overlap with the subtitle effect, so the visibility of the subtitle effect is guaranteed (however, the background image (which may include characters) may overlap with the error notification display and at least a part of it may not be clearly visible). Since the reel spinning suggestion image is not an error, the video image related to the subtitle effect continues to be executed. Therefore, if the text part of the subtitle effect is not visible, it is difficult to understand the progress of the effect. With this configuration, it is possible to alert the player while allowing them to understand the content of the effect. Also, even if a volume change image is displayed due to the volume change button being accepted during play (while the reels are spinning in the case of a slot machine, or while the volume is changing in the case of a pachinko game machine), the text part of the subtitle effect is visible.

When an assist effect is displayed on the image display unit DP, a subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP. As an example, FIG. 106(A) shows a state in which a subtitle effect display is displayed when a push navigation effect display (push order navigation effect display) is displayed on the image display unit DP. In this example, when a push navigation effect display that notifies the push order of "center left and right" from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is displayed in the lower area of the screen of the image display unit DP, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed. The first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed so as to overlap with the push navigation effect display in the lower area of the screen, which is in the same position as the area in which the push navigation effect display is displayed. At this time, the first subtitle effect display JD1 is displayed and displayed on a layer that is further back (rearward away from the player) than the layer in which the push navigation effect display is displayed. Therefore, while some of the characters of the caption display JT1 are hidden and cannot be seen by the push navigation effect display, the visibility of the push navigation effect display, which is of great interest to the player, is ensured. The subtitle effect display may be displayed in a different area from the display area of the press navigation effect display so as not to overlap with the press navigation effect display (however, the background image (which may include characters) may overlap with the press navigation effect display and at least a part of it may not be clearly visible). The subtitle effect display may not be displayed when the press navigation effect display is displayed. In particular, when the subtitle display effect is displayed in response to the receipt of the third stop operation, it is preferable to display the subtitle effect display after the press navigation effect display is hidden. This allows the player to concentrate on operating the stop switch while paying attention to the navigation content while the press navigation effect display is displayed, and to pay attention to the subtitle effect display after the operation is completed and the press navigation effect display is hidden. The press navigation effect display has multiple types of modes, such as a mode that notifies the press order of "center left right" in addition to a mode that notifies the press order of "left center right" and a mode that notifies the press order of "right center left".

When the subtitle display is displayed on the image display unit DP, the subtitle display sound is output from the sound output unit in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The subtitle display sound is basically the same as the content of the subtitle display in the subtitle display. For example, if the content of the subtitle display JT2 in the second subtitle display JD2 is "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", the corresponding subtitle display sound will be "It's a perfect sunny day". In contrast, a case may be provided in which a sound with a content different from the content of the subtitle display in the subtitle display is output as the subtitle display sound. For example, as shown in FIG. 106(B), if the content of the subtitle display JT2 is garbled and incomprehensible, such as "▲/%*p・n↑→?a≫!na", a subtitle display sound with a different understandable content, "It's a perfect sunny day", may be output. And, when the content of the subtitle display in the subtitle display and the content of the subtitle display sound are different, the expectation of granting an advantageous game may be increased compared to when the two contents are the same. In addition, when the caption display is incomprehensible such as garbled characters, the expectation level may be increased compared to when the caption display is incomprehensible. In addition, when the caption display is incomprehensible such as garbled characters, the size, font, color, etc. of the characters of the caption display are displayed in a manner that the expectation level of the advantageous game is low. In this way, by displaying the caption effect in a manner that the characters are garbled but the expectation level is low, it becomes unclear whether the expectation level is high or low, and the player who sees it can feel a sense of incongruity. Then, it is possible to give a surprise to a player who has the impression that the expectation level is low from such a caption effect display due to the gap with the actual high expectation level. In addition, when a caption display with incomprehensible content is displayed, a case may be provided in which the garbled characters are eliminated and the display content is changed to one that can be understood by operating a sub button. In addition, a typo effect may be installed in an effect such as a caption display with garbled characters. For example, if the content of the caption display JT2 in the second subtitle performance display JD2 is normally "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", in the typo performance, the content of the caption display JT2 in the second subtitle performance display JD2 becomes "It's a perfect sunny day in Japan!!", and "壁" is displayed as "壁". In this case, too, while raising the expectation level compared to a normal caption display, the size, font, color, etc. of the characters in the caption display are displayed in a manner that lowers the expectation level of providing an advantageous game, making it possible to provide a surprise due to the gap with the actual high expectation level.

As described above, the conversation production display and the subtitle production display are similar in that both include the display of characters related to the remarks of the characters. As a production display in which characters are displayed, there are some that display the title characters of a certain production such as a continuous production when the production starts, and some that display characters in a production (cut-in production) in which an image unrelated to the previous flow is inserted into a background image. However, these production displays differ from the conversation production display and the subtitle production display in that the content of the displayed characters is not directly related to the remarks of the characters. When comparing the conversation production display and the subtitle production display, the conversation production display has more types of modes (colors and sizes of characters, etc.) that suggest differences in the expectation of granting advantageous games than the subtitle production display. In addition, the conversation production display is displayed in the upper area of the screen of the image display unit DP than the subtitle production display. As a general tendency, the conversation production display is relatively more often displayed in response to the acceptance of a start lever operation, and the subtitle production display is relatively more often displayed in response to the acceptance of a third stop operation. For example, when there are 80 types of conversational performance displays and 70 types of subtitle performance displays, approximately 75% of the 80 types of conversational performance displays are displayed upon receipt of the start lever operation, and approximately 80% of the 70 types of subtitle performance displays are displayed upon receipt of the third stop operation. Also, the number of characters of the subtitle display in the subtitle performance display is relatively larger than the number of characters of the dialogue display in the conversational performance display. For example, if the average number of characters of each dialogue display in the 80 types of conversational performance displays is N, the average number of characters of each subtitle display in the 70 types of subtitle performance displays is about 1.5×N. The conversational performance displays are relatively often displayed during normal (normal game state) such as during non-AT, and the subtitle performance displays are relatively often displayed during continuous performance execution or freeze. For example, approximately 70% of the 80 types of conversational performance displays are displayed during normal, and approximately 75% of the 70 types of subtitle performance displays are displayed during continuous performance execution or freeze.

＜Expectation production＞
The expectation presentation is a presentation that suggests to the player the expectation of an advantageous game. In the expectation presentation, an expectation presentation display for the expectation presentation is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The expectation presentation display is, for example, a display whose display mode can be changed according to the expectation of an advantageous game, and is configured to include a display object (also called an "object") having a predetermined form. As an example of an expectation presentation display, an expectation presentation display OD1 is shown in FIG. 107.

The expectation level performance display OD1 includes a heart-shaped object OJ1 displayed in a predetermined area of the image display section DP. The object OJ1 has different display modes depending on the expectation level of granting advantageous play. Specifically, the color of the area inside the outline of the object OJ1 changes depending on the expectation level. In this example, in addition to the mode in which the color of the area inside the outline of the object OJ1 is a normal color (for example, white), there are a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in yellow (also referred to as "yellow object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in green (also referred to as "green object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in red (also referred to as "red object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in blue (also referred to as "blue object display"), a mode in which it is displayed in a specific pattern (also referred to as "pattern object display"), and a mode in which it is displayed in rainbow colors (also referred to as "rainbow object display"). The expectation level of granting advantageous play is set to increase in the order of blue object display < yellow object display < green object display < red object display < pattern object display < rainbow object display. Furthermore, in the case of the expectation effect display that produces the highest expectation (in this example, a rainbow object display), it is set as a confirmation effect with a 100% expectation (for example, indicating a confirmed AT, a confirmed bonus, a confirmed jackpot, etc.).

Regarding the timing at which the expectation effect display is displayed, any timing triggered (display trigger) by the operation of a specific switch controlled by the main control means, such as a bet switch, start lever, or stop switch, can be appropriately set as the display timing (display start timing) of the expectation effect display. For example, a specific timing after the lever operation is accepted, a specific timing after the first stop operation is accepted, a specific timing after the second stop operation is accepted, or a specific timing after the third stop operation is accepted can be set as the display timing of the expectation effect display. In addition, in the case of a pachinko game machine, the timing at which a specific time has passed since the ball entered the start hole, the timing at which a specific time has passed since the large prize hole was opened, or the timing at which a specific time has passed since the ball entered the large prize hole can be set as the display timing of the expectation effect display.

FIG. 107 illustrates an example in which the expectation level production display OD1 and the second subtitle production display JD2 are simultaneously displayed on the image display unit DP. In this way, the expectation level production display and the subtitle production display may be displayed on the image display unit DP at the same time, or may be displayed separately so that the display times do not overlap. Comparing the expectation level production display and the subtitle production display, the expectation level production display has a greater number of stages (e.g., the number of colors) indicating the difference in expectation level than the subtitle production display. This is because the subtitle production display also has a function of increasing the understanding of the progress of the game by the contents of its subtitle display, and therefore, compared to the expectation level production display whose main purpose is to notify the difference in expectation level, the number of stages indicating the difference in expectation level may be smaller. In addition, the rainbow object display of the expectation level production display and the rainbow subtitle display of the subtitle production display are common in that they both represent a fixed production, but in the case of other colors, the expectation level is not necessarily the same even if the colors are the same. For example, comparing the blue object display of the expectation level production display and the blue subtitle display of the subtitle production display, the blue subtitle display is set to suggest a higher expectation level than the blue object display. The expectation level effect display and the telop display may be superimposed, in which case the telop display is displayed in front (on the front layer). Also, when the expectation level effect display and the telop display are superimposed, it is difficult to tell if they are the same color, so they may be displayed in a manner that avoids using the same color.

In addition, as a general trend, the difference in color of the expectation performance display is often related to the difference in the result of the internal lottery (winning role) (for example, a red object display corresponds to a rare role winning), and the difference in color in the subtitle performance display and the conversation performance display is often related to the expectation of winning in a lottery other than the internal lottery, such as an AT win or a big win. The shape of the object in the subtitle performance display is not limited to the heart shape shown as an example, but can be various shapes. For example, in addition to the heart shape, a balloon-shaped object may be provided. In addition, as another embodiment, a chair-shaped object and a desk-shaped object, or a bottle-shaped object and a cup-shaped object may be provided. In addition, compared to the types of objects in the expectation performance display (types due to differences in shape), there are more types of telop displays in the subtitle performance display (types due to differences in the content of the telop). This is because, as described above, the subtitle performance display also has the function of increasing the understanding of the progress of the game, etc., depending on the content of the telop display. By increasing the types of telop displays, it is possible to explain various game situations. In the case of FIG. 107, there is no embodiment in which the color of the characters, etc. in the subtitle performance display is a specific pattern, but such an embodiment may be provided. However, even if the characters in the caption are patterned, there is a risk that the player will not be able to see that they are a pattern because the size of the characters is small. Therefore, if a pattern is used for the characters in the subtitle effect display, an expectation effect display with the same pattern may be displayed on the image display unit DP together with the subtitle effect display.

<GET Production>
The GET effect is an effect that indicates to the player that game value (game medals) will be awarded when a push order role such as a bell minor role is achieved during, for example, an announcement game during an AT (a game in which push navigation is executed). In the GET effect, a GET effect display for the GET effect is displayed on the image display unit DP at a predetermined timing. The GET effect display is a display for appealing to the player that game value will be awarded. As an example of a GET effect display, a GET effect display GD1 is shown in Figures 108 (D) and (E).

The GET effect display GD1 is composed of an image of the word "GET!" and is displayed in a specified area of the image display section DP (in this example, it is an area in the approximate center of the screen, but this can be changed as appropriate). When the GET effect display is displayed on the image display section DP, a GET effect sound is output from the sound output section in synchronization with the display timing (display start timing). The GET effect sound is a sound for appealing to the player that game value has been awarded, and is, for example, a sound saying "get", which has the same content as the word "GET!" in the GET effect display GD1 (the content of the sound may be different from the content of the words).

The execution timing of the GET effect (GET effect display GD1 and GET effect sound) will be described with reference to Figs. 108 and 109.
When the press navigation performance display ND1, which indicates the pressing order, is displayed on the image display unit DP, if a first stop operation is accepted according to the press navigation performance display ND1, the press navigation performance display ND1 changes to a state informing the "left and right" pressing order and is displayed on the image display unit DP, as shown in FIG. 108(B). Here, if a second stop operation is accepted according to the press navigation performance display ND1, the press navigation performance display ND1 changes to a state informing the "right" pressing order and is displayed on the image display unit DP, as shown in FIG. 108(C). Furthermore, if a third stop operation is accepted (triggered by pressing the operation part of the stop switch (the right stop switch in this example) which accepted the third stop operation, and switching the stop switch from the off state to the on state), the press navigation performance display ND1 is made non-displayed.

After the push navigation display ND1 is hidden, the game value is awarded (the game medals are paid out by the hopper and the credits are added) and the GET display is executed. In detail, the awarding of the game value, the output of the GET display sound, and the display of the GET display start when the third stop operation is released (the operation part of the stop switch that accepted the third stop operation is released and the stop switch switches from the on state to the off state). In FIG. 109, these start timings are approximately simultaneous, but the start timings of each may be slightly shifted. The GET display sound that has started to be output ends before the awarding of the game value ends. After the output of the GET display sound ends, the awarding of the game value ends, and the GET display is hidden after the awarding of the game value ends. In this way, by delaying the timing at which the display of the GET effect display ends compared to the timing at which the output of the GET effect sound ends and the timing at which the awarding of the game value ends, the player can focus his or her attention on the fact that game value will be awarded by hearing the GET effect sound, and can also confirm once again that game value has been awarded by looking at the GET effect display after hearing the GET effect sound and after the game value has been awarded, which can give the player a sense of elation.

In a game in which a GET effect is performed, a subtitle effect display may be displayed on the image display unit DP upon receipt of a third stop operation. FIG. 108(E) shows an example in which a second subtitle effect display JD2 (telop display JT2) is displayed in an area on the lower side of the screen of the image display unit DP from the area in which the GET effect display GD1 is displayed, without overlapping with the GET effect display GD1. It is preferable that the subtitle effect display to be displayed upon receipt of a third stop operation is displayed at the time when the GET effect display is hidden, that is, the display of the subtitle effect display is started before the time when the GET effect display is hidden. By doing so, the player's interest can be immediately directed to the subtitle effect display at the time when the GET effect display is hidden. In the example of FIG. 109, the display start timing of the subtitle effect display is set to be located between the end of the game value provision and the time when the GET effect display is hidden, but this is not limited to this. For example, the display of the subtitle effect display may be started at any timing within the period from when the third stop operation is accepted to when the GET effect display is not displayed (also referred to as the "subtitle effect display start suitable period"), or at a predetermined timing before the third stop operation is accepted. As described above, the press navigation effect display is all erased upon the acceptance of the third stop operation, the GET effect display is not yet displayed upon the acceptance of the third stop operation, and the subtitle effect display is started to be displayed upon the acceptance of the third stop operation or at a time point earlier than that, or after the display of the GET effect display has started. The subtitle effect display that has been started to be displayed upon the acceptance of the third stop operation or at a time point earlier than that continues to be displayed after the acceptance of the third stop operation, but the press navigation effect display is all erased upon the acceptance of the third stop operation, so that the subtitle effect display is not hidden by the press navigation effect display and can be clearly seen. In addition, the release of the third stop operation is triggered to display the GET effect display, but this GET effect display is originally displayed at a position that does not overlap with the subtitle effect display and disappears over time, so that the subtitle effect display is easily visible even after the GET effect display is displayed. Therefore, even if a push navigation effect display is displayed or a congratulatory effect display (including a GET effect display) for improving the satisfaction of the player is displayed, the player can understand the contents of the caption display of the subtitle effect display.

<Scene switching>
The scene switching performance is a display performance consisting of multiple scenes that may be switched when the start lever or the stop switch is operated (for example, displayed on the image display unit DP). Each scene is composed of a progression performance in which the display content changes over time, and a cyclic performance that can be displayed after the progression performance ends and in which the same display content is repeated. The progression performance is mainly composed of moving images, and the cyclic images are composed of moving images or still images. The scene switching performance may be composed as a single performance or as a continuous performance. As an example of the scene switching performance, a first scene switching performance is shown in FIG. 110(A), and a second scene switching performance is shown in FIG. 110(B).

As shown in FIG. 110(A), the first scene switching performance is composed of four scenes, from the first scene to the fourth scene. The first scene is composed of a progression performance P1 and a cyclic performance L1, the second scene is composed of a progression performance P2 and a cyclic performance L2, the third scene is composed of a progression performance P3 and a cyclic performance L3, and the fourth scene is composed of a progression performance P4 and a cyclic performance L4. In the first scene switching performance, the display of the progression performance P1 of the first scene begins in response to the acceptance of the operation of the start lever. If a predetermined time (time T1) elapses after the start of the display of the progression performance P1 without the first stop operation being accepted, the display of the progression performance P1 ends at that point and the display of the cyclic performance L1 begins. This cyclic performance L1 continues to be displayed until the first stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the first stop operation is validly accepted, that acceptance triggers a switch from the first scene to the second scene, and the display of the progress presentation P2 for the second scene begins. Note that if the first stop operation is validly accepted after the display of the progress presentation P1 for the first scene has begun and before time T1 has elapsed, the loop presentation L1 is not displayed, the scene switches from the first scene to the second scene, and the display of the progress presentation P2 for the second scene begins. If a predetermined time (time T2) elapses after the display of the progress presentation P2 begins without the second stop operation being accepted, at that point the display of the progress presentation P2 ends and the display of the loop presentation L2 begins. This loop presentation L2 continues to be displayed until the second stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the second stop operation is validly accepted, the acceptance triggers a switch from the second scene to the third scene, and the display of the third scene's progress presentation P3 begins. Note that if the second stop operation is validly accepted after the display of the second scene's progress presentation P2 has begun and before time T2 has elapsed, the second scene switches to the third scene without displaying the circular presentation L2, and the display of the third scene's progress presentation P3 begins. If a predetermined time (time T3) elapses after the display of the progress presentation P3 begins without the third stop operation being accepted, at that point the display of the progress presentation P3 ends and the display of the circular presentation L3 begins. This circular presentation L3 continues to be displayed until the third stop operation is accepted.

After that, when the third stop operation is validly accepted, the scene switches from the third to the fourth scene, and the display of the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene begins. If the third stop operation is validly accepted before the time T3 has elapsed after the display of the progress effect P3 of the third scene has begun, the scene switches from the third to the fourth scene without displaying the cyclic effect L3, and the progress effect P4 of the fourth scene begins to be displayed. If a predetermined time (time T4) elapses after the display of the progress effect P4 begins without a bet operation, lever operation, settlement operation, etc. for the next game (collectively referred to as the "next game operation") being accepted, the display of the progress effect P4 ends at that time and the display of the cyclic effect L4 begins. This cyclic effect L4 continues to be displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may end when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display begins).

In the first scene switching performance, comparing the display continuation time (time T2) of the progress performance P2 of the second scene that is switched by the acceptance of the first stop operation, the display continuation time (time T3) of the progress performance P3 of the third scene that is switched by the acceptance of the second stop operation, and the display continuation time (time T4) of the progress performance P4 of the fourth scene that is switched by the acceptance of the third stop operation, the time T4 is set relatively longer than the times T2 and T3. This is because after the first stop operation or the second stop operation, it is difficult for the player to pay attention to the content of the progress performance because he or she is concentrating on performing the next stop operation, whereas after the third stop operation, the stop operation is completed, so the player has more time to pay attention to the content of the progress performance. In other words, by setting the time of the progress performance after the third stop operation relatively longer, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the content of the progress performance after the third stop operation and improve the enjoyment of the game. Furthermore, by relatively lengthening the duration of the progression presentation after the third stop operation, it becomes easier to suggest game results, etc., in the progression presentation after the third stop. This tendency is not limited to a specific scene change presentation, but is a tendency that extends to all of the multiple types of scene change presentations. For example, if there are a total of 50 types of scene change presentations performed during continuous presentations and a total of 10 types of scene change presentations performed during single presentations, then the overall tendency (average value) of these 60 types of scene change presentations is that time T4 is set relatively longer than times T2 and T3.

In addition, in the first scene switching performance, the first scene is switched to the second scene regardless of which of the three stop switches on the left, center, and right sides accepts the first stop operation. Similarly, the second scene is switched to the third scene regardless of which stop switch accepts the second stop operation, and the third scene is switched to the fourth scene regardless of which stop switch accepts the third stop operation. By doing so, the control process in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, each time a stop operation is accepted, the first, second, and third stop acceptance commands are transmitted from the main control means to the sub-control means, and the sub-control means can know that the first, second, and third stop operations have been accepted by those commands. The first, second, and third stop acceptance commands also contain information about which stop switch has been operated. However, in the first scene switching performance, the scene can be switched without referring to that information, as long as it is known which stop acceptance command is issued during one game. Therefore, it is possible to omit referring to information about which stop switch has been operated, thereby simplifying the process for scene switching. Furthermore, regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches while playing the game, the scene can be switched at the appropriate timing, making it easier to ensure consistency between the progress of the game and the presentation content. Note that the sub-control means can determine which stop acceptance command it is from the number of stop commands received, as long as it knows that it is a stop acceptance command, so there is no particular need for information indicating which stop operation acceptance it is. Therefore, it is possible to omit the information indicating which stop operation acceptance it is from the information included in each stop command, in which case it is possible to reduce the amount of information in the stop acceptance command and also to reduce the memory storage capacity.

As shown in FIG. 110(B), the second scene switching performance is composed of two scenes, from the first scene to the second scene. The first scene is composed of the progress performance P11 and the cyclic performance L11, and the second scene is composed of the progress performance P12 and the cyclic performance L12. In the second scene switching performance, the display of the progress performance P11 of the first scene is started in response to the acceptance of the operation of the start lever. After the display of the progress performance P11 starts, when a predetermined time (time T11) elapses until the third stop operation is accepted, the display of the progress performance P11 ends at the time of the lapse, and the cyclic performance L11 is started. This cyclic performance L11 continues to be displayed until the third stop operation is accepted. In addition, in the second scene switching performance, the scene is not switched in response to the acceptance of the first stop operation or the second stop operation.

After the display of the cyclic effect L11 starts, if the third stop operation is accepted validly after the first and second stop operations are accepted, the acceptance triggers a switch from the first scene to the second scene, and the display of the progress effect P12 of the second scene starts. Note that if the third stop operation is accepted validly before time T11 has elapsed after the display of the progress effect P11 of the first scene has started, the cyclic effect L11 is not displayed, the first scene is switched to the second scene, and the display of the progress effect P12 of the second scene starts. If a predetermined time (time T12) has elapsed without the next game operation being accepted after the display of the progress effect P12 starts, the display of the progress effect P12 ends at that point, and the display of the cyclic effect L12 starts. This cyclic effect L12 continues to be displayed until the next game operation is accepted (it may also end when a predetermined time has elapsed after the display starts).

In the second scene switching performance, the first scene will not be switched to the second scene even if the first stop operation is received by any of the three stop switches (left, center, and right). Similarly, the first scene will not be switched to the second scene even if the second stop operation is received by any of the stop switches. On the other hand, when the third stop operation is received, the first scene will be switched to the second scene regardless of which stop switch receives the third stop operation. For example, when the middle stop switch receives the first or second stop operation, the scene cannot be switched to the second scene, but when the middle stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene can be switched to the second scene. Also, when the middle stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene is switched to the second scene, and when the left stop switch or the right stop switch receives the third stop operation, the scene can also be switched to the second scene. By doing so, the control process in the sub-control means can be simplified. That is, since the scene can be switched without referring to information about which stop switch was operated, which is included in the first, second, and third stop acceptance commands sent from the main control means to the sub-control means each time a stop operation is accepted, the process for switching scenes can be simplified. Also, since the scene can be switched at the appropriate timing regardless of the order in which the player operates the three stop switches while playing the game, it becomes easier to ensure consistency between the progress of the game and the presentation content.

As described above, in the second scene switching performance, even if the first stop operation or the second stop operation is accepted, the scene does not change as a result. In this embodiment, there are other scene switching performances besides the first or second scene switching performances, but as a general trend, in the scene switching performance, when comparing the case where the scene changes as a result of the acceptance of the third stop operation with the case where the scene changes as a result of the acceptance of the first or second stop operation, the rate of scene switching is relatively higher in the case where the scene changes as a result of the acceptance of the third stop operation than in the case where the scene changes as a result of the acceptance of the first or second stop operation (the former case can be set to 0% and the latter case to 100%). This is because after the first or second stop operation, the player is focused on performing the next stop operation and it is difficult to pay attention to the content of the progression performance, whereas after the third stop operation, the stop operation is completed, so the player has more time to pay attention to the content of the progression performance. In other words, by setting the proportion of cases where the scene changes as a result of the third stop operation relatively high, it is possible to increase the player's interest in the content of the progression presentation after the third stop operation and to improve the enjoyment of the game. Also, by setting the proportion of cases where the scene changes as a result of the third stop operation relatively high, it becomes easier to suggest the game result in the progression presentation after the third stop.

＜Blackout effect＞
The blackout effect is a display effect that makes the display appear less visible. The blackout effect is executed, for example, when a predetermined effect display suggests a game result that is unfavorable to the player (for example, no AT win, no bonus win, no AT top-up win, no big win in pachinko gaming machines, etc.). The blackout effect is often executed when the final scene of a continuous effect is displayed, but it can also be executed in a single effect. An example of the blackout effect is shown in FIG. 111.

Figure 111 (A) shows the display state of the image display unit DP just before the blackout effect is executed. In this example, the image display unit DP displays a final scene display RD1 showing the final scene of the continuous effect, a subtitle effect display JD3 having a caption display JT3 with the content "Will it be a storm tomorrow?", a first area RY1 showing the number of games remaining in the AT ("23G remaining"), and a second area RY2 showing the name of the game state ("decisive battle stage"). The continuous effect, for example, displays a moving image showing the content that the character CH1 challenges something over multiple games. In addition, the final scene display RD1 expresses the character CH1 who failed the challenge with his head down, which suggests that the game result was unfavorable to the player. In addition, sound is output at the start of the final scene display RD1, but the output of the sound may be configured to end when the blackout effect is performed for the final scene display RD1. In such a configuration, the absence of sound can clearly indicate to the player that it is over. Needless to say, if an error occurs in this state, an error sound will be output.

Figure 111 (B) shows the display state of the image display unit DP when the blackout effect is executed. In the blackout effect of this example, the final scene display RD1 is displayed so as to become dark overall and reduce visibility. The visibility of the subtitle effect display JD3 is also reduced. On the other hand, the first area RY1 and the second area RY2 maintain their original brightness and do not reduce visibility. By doing so, it is possible to impress on the player that a game result that is unfavorable to the player has been obtained, while ensuring visibility of information regarding the subsequent game, making it possible to clearly inform the player of the content. The areas in the image display unit DP in which visibility is not reduced even during the blackout effect (also referred to as "non-blackout areas") are not limited to the first area RY1 or the second area RY2. In the case of slot machines, the non-darkened areas can be the areas that display the number of credits, the area that displays the number of bets, the area that displays the number of games played, the area that displays the amount of game value acquired, the area that displays sub-effects such as mini-games, etc. In the case of pachinko machines, the non-darkened areas can be the areas that display the reserved display, the area that displays variable symbols (so-called mini symbols) that are different from the decorative symbols, the area that displays the reserved number, the area that shows the variable reserved icon, etc. Note that the mini symbol is also called the second decoration symbol, and is a decoration symbol that is always displayed even if the first decoration symbol disappears due to a reach effect, etc., and is a symbol that indicates the progress of the game, allowing the player to always understand the progress of the game.

In addition, if a predetermined time has passed after the blackout effect has been executed without the next game operation being performed, the visibility of the final scene display RD1 may be further reduced (for example, made darker). This allows the player to distinguish between blackouts as a result of consecutive effects and blackouts due to no progress in the game, without mistaking them. Note that instead of reducing visibility in two stages, visibility may be reduced gradually over time.

A layer structure may be used to reduce the visibility of the display during the blackout effect. For example, a first layer depicting a final scene display RD1 is arranged on the far side, a second layer depicting a subtitle effect display JD3 is arranged on the near side, and a first region RY is arranged on the far side.
A third layer (the layer depicting the first region RY1 and the layer depicting the second region RY2 may be separate) is placed to depict the first region RY1 and the second region RY2. Then, during blackout performance, a fourth layer is placed between the second and third layers, and a process is performed to reduce the brightness of the entire region of the fourth layer, thereby decreasing the visibility of the final scene display RD1 and the subtitle performance display JD3 while maintaining the visibility of the first region RY1 and the second region RY2.

Rather than lowering the brightness of the fourth layer, the visibility may be reduced by increasing the opacity of the fourth layer or depicting a large number of thin lines or fine patterns in the fourth layer. Rather than using layers, the visibility may be reduced by applying a blurring process such as a mosaic to the image of the final scene display RD1. Visibility may also be reduced by reducing the brightness of the backlight of the image display unit DP. In this case, it is possible to reduce power consumption by reducing the brightness of the backlight. Also, in the example of FIG. 111(B), the subtitle display JD3 with reduced visibility is displayed as is, but it may be hidden during the blackout effect.

If the player obtains a favorable game result during the continuous performance (for example, an AT win, a bonus win, an AT additional win, or a jackpot in the case of a pachinko machine), a display suggesting that a favorable game result has been obtained (also called a "success display") is often displayed in the final scene of the continuous performance, and in this case, a blackout effect is not performed. On the other hand, even if a favorable game result has been obtained, a display suggesting that an unfavorable game result has been obtained (also called a "failure display") may be displayed once, and then a display suggesting that a favorable game result was actually obtained (also called a "revival display") may be displayed. In this case, the blackout effect may be executed while the failure display is displayed. If a blackout effect is executed while a failure display is displayed and a revival display is then displayed, the blackout effect is terminated before the revival display is displayed. This allows the revival display to be displayed after ensuring visibility, making it possible for the player to clearly recognize that a favorable game result has been obtained.

Now, referring to FIG. 112, we will explain the change in the presentation image as the game progresses when a failure display is performed with a blackout presentation. The presentation example shown in FIG. 112 shows the process from the final scene display RD1 displayed on the image display unit DP when the player performs the third stop operation to the failure display.

Figure 112(A) shows an effect image displayed on the image display unit DP when the player presses the stop switch to perform the third stop operation (or, more specifically, when the player does not release his finger from the pressed stop switch), and is the same effect image as that in Figure 111(A). Therefore, in this figure, the same components as in Figure 111 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations are omitted. Also, in Figure 112(A), the character string written within the dashed line indicated by the reference symbol CV (Will it be a storm tomorrow?) is not displayed on the image display unit DP, but is a written representation of the content output by audio. Hereinafter, the character string sandwiched between two straight lines in Figure 112 indicates the content of the dialogue or sound effect output by audio.

As mentioned above, at the stage in Figure 112 (A), the stop switch is pressed (in other words, the finger is not released from the stop switch), and the player is unable to determine whether to move to a failure display or a success display. Therefore, the caption display JT3 in Figure 112 (A) is not limited to normal colors (black or white), but may be displayed in a color (blue, green, red, etc.) of text that increases the expectation of receiving an advantageous play. However, it is preferable not to use special colors such as rainbow colors that are used for a 100% confirmation effect when a move to a failure display is planned.

In the state shown in FIG. 112(A), when the player releases his/her finger from the stop switch that performed the third stop operation, the display on the image display unit DP switches to a failure display or a success display. FIG. 112(B) shows an example of a failure display, in which the image display unit DP displays the character CH1 being blown away by a strong wind and disappearing off the screen, and an audio scream of "Waaaaaaahh ...

In this way, by not displaying the text color of the caption display JT4 included in the image in which the blackout effect is executed in a text color that increases the expectation of receiving an advantageous game, the player's expectations are not betrayed and the reliability of the high expectation represented by the text color is avoided from being undermined.

In the situation shown in FIG. 112(B), when the output of the scream "Waaaaaaahhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhhh and the sound effect "GOOOOOOOOOOOOOO" is finished, as shown in FIG. 112(C), a blackout effect similar to that in FIG. 111(B) is performed. That is, an effect is performed to reduce the visibility of the screen, except for the first area RY1 and the second area RY2, which are non-blackout areas. Here, for example, if a blackout effect is performed before the voice of the line is finished, the subtitle of the line becomes difficult to see before the character finishes speaking the line, making it difficult for the player to match the line he hears with the line he sees, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Therefore, by clearly displaying the subtitle display JT4 of the line until the character finishes outputting the line through its voice, it is possible to eliminate the risk of the player feeling uncomfortable as described above.

When the text of the telop display JT4 is displayed in white or black, the color of the text may not be changed even when the blackout effect is performed (it may remain white or black). When the text color is black, the text color may be changed to gray (brightness may be increased) as a method of indicating a decrease in visibility. In addition, the text color of the telop display JT4 displayed on the screen (see FIG. 112(B)) immediately before the blackout effect is performed may be limited to only one of white and black, or, for example, either white or black (whichever increases visibility) may be selected depending on the color of the display screen. However, it is desirable to reduce the number of types of text colors displayed on the screen immediately before the blackout effect is performed compared to the types of text colors that increase the expectation of an advantageous game being awarded. In addition, the timing of the blackout effect may be after the sound corresponding to the telop display JT4 is output, and for example, the sound effect (wind sound) output in the situation shown in FIG. 112(B) may continue to be output even during the blackout effect shown in FIG. 112(C).

As mentioned above, there are cases where a blackout effect is performed while the failure display is being displayed, and then a revival display is performed. In this case, the revival display may be triggered by the player operating the sub-button mentioned above (more specifically, a button-shaped operation acceptance unit (hereinafter also referred to as a "push button")). Here, the operation of the push button that triggers the revival display may be a single operation, or may be a predetermined number of consecutive presses. In this way, when the revival display is triggered by the operation of the push button, an image of the push button may be displayed on the screen shown in FIG. 111(C) to encourage the player to operate the push button. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 111(D), an image showing the operation surface of the push button (hereinafter also referred to as a "push button image") PB is displayed in the center of the screen of the image display unit DP.

This image PB of the push button is a faithful representation of the texture of the push button that is actually provided on the housing of the slot machine 1, and is displayed in a larger size than the actual push button. Even during a blackout effect, the image PB of the push button is not blacked out, so that its visibility is not reduced. In other words, by making the image PB of the push button stand out, the presence of the push button is more strongly appealed to the player, and the effect of encouraging the player to operate the push button can be enhanced.

Note that when the actual push button on the cabinet has its operating surface blinking (for example, by a light source such as an LED installed inside) to encourage the player to operate the push button, the image PB of the push button may also be displayed in a manner that makes it appear as if it is blinking (for example, alternating between light and dark). In this case, it is preferable to set the blinking of the image PB of the push button and the blinking of the actual push button so that they are not synchronized. In this embodiment, the blinking speed of the image PB of the push button is made faster than the blinking speed of the actual push button, making the image PB of the push button more noticeable than the actual push button.

In addition to displaying the push button in a blinking manner as described above, the push button image PB can be used to prompt the player to operate the actual push button by alternately switching between a state in which the push button is pressed and a state in which it is not pressed. In this case, the actual push button may be made to move up and down, for example, by providing an internal solenoid, or it may not be possible to move up and down.

In the example shown in FIG. 112, when the stop switch in which the third stop operation is performed is operated, the display in FIG. 112(A) is displayed, and when the operation is released, the display in FIG. 112(B) is displayed. However, for example, when the operation of the stop switch in which the second stop operation is performed is released, the display in FIG. 112(A) may be displayed, and when the third stop operation is performed, the display in FIG. 112(B) may be displayed. In this case, the blackout effect (see FIG. 112(C)) may be performed according to either (i) when the operation of the stop switch in which the third stop operation is performed is released, or (ii) when the audio output is completed. In addition, the blackout effect may be performed at the earlier of the above (i) and (ii), or when the revival display is not performed, the blackout effect may be performed at the above timing of (i), and when the revival display is performed, the blackout effect may be performed at the above timing of (ii). In this case, even if the blackout effect is performed at the above timing of (ii), the revival display may not be performed according to a predetermined condition (for example, based on a predetermined probability).

In addition, when comparing the advantageous game results awarded when a failure display, a blackout effect, and a revival display have been performed (or when there is no blackout effect), with the advantageous game results awarded when a success display is performed without a revival display, it may be possible to make it so that there are relatively more cases where a more advantageous game result (for example, a win in an add-on specialized zone where an AT is likely to be added, an AT win with a large number of initial games, a jackpot with a large number of rounds in pachinko gaming machines, or a probability-varying jackpot with a high jackpot probability) is awarded when there is a revival display. By doing so, it is possible to keep the player's expectations up and not be disappointed even when a failure display or blackout effect is performed.

When visibility is reduced by the blackout effect, for example, a sub button may be operated to display an adjustment screen for adjusting the light amount (brightness) of the screen or the volume of the speaker. In that case, the visibility of the adjustment screen for the light amount or the volume is ensured even during the blackout effect. In addition, when an error occurs during the blackout effect, an error notification display may be displayed to notify the occurrence of the error. In this case, the visibility of the error notification display is ensured even during the blackout effect. Note that the blackout effect can also be executed in situations other than the continuous effect. For example, the blackout effect may be triggered by the stop operation of the stop switch being performed in a push order different from the push order notified by the push navigation effect (also called a "push order failure"). In this case, the blackout effect can be executed at the time of the push order failure, whether the push order is failed in the first stop operation or the second stop operation. In that case, it is possible to set a non-blackout area in which visibility is not reduced, just like in the case of the blackout effect in the continuous effect.

<TOTAL display>
In the fifth type slot machine, when a game period advantageous to the player, such as a bonus game or AT, ends, an image indicating that the game period has ended (hereinafter referred to as an "end image") is displayed on the image display device along with the number of games played during that game period and the total number of medals won during that game period. Hereinafter, the display showing the number of games played during the game period and the total number of medals won is referred to as the "TOTAL display." Here, the trigger for displaying the TOTAL display will be explained separately for a case where the TOTAL display is triggered by the third stop operation and a case where the TOTAL display is triggered by the operation of the start lever.

(When the TOTAL display is triggered by the third stop operation)
First, referring to Fig. 113 and Fig. 114, an example of a case where TOTAL display is performed in response to a third stop operation will be described. Here, Fig. 113 and Fig. 114 show the display contents of the image display device in the final scene of the AT in which 300 games can be played, Fig. 113 shows the display contents of the image display device in the 299th game (1 game remaining), and Fig. 114 shows the display contents of the image display device in the 300th game (0 games remaining) (final game). In Fig. 113(A) and Fig. 114(A), the same components as those of the slot machine 1 shown in Fig. 1 are given the same reference numerals, and detailed explanations are omitted. Furthermore, in Fig. 113(B) to (F) and Fig. 114(B) to (F), the reference numerals for the same components as those in Fig. 113(A) and Fig. 114(A) are omitted.

First, Figure 113 (A) shows the state where the 298th play (2 games remaining) of the current AT has ended and the specified number of medals (3 medals in this case) have been inserted to play the 299th play. At this time, the number of games remaining in the AT RG is displayed on the upper left side of the screen of the image display device 11, and the difference in number of medals in that AT DN is displayed on the upper right side of the screen. In Figure 113 (A), the remaining number of games RG is displayed as "Remaining: 2G" (2 games remaining), and the difference in number of medals DN is displayed as "TOTAL: 150 medals" (difference in number of medals is 150 medals). In addition, ally character FC and enemy character EC are displayed on the screen of the image display device 11.

During the AT, if the push order role is won, a battle will take place between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC, and if the stop switch is operated in the push order notified by the push order navigation, the ally character FC will win. At this time, the winning mode of the winning push order role is formed, and a predetermined number of medals will be paid out. In this embodiment, the winning mode of the push order role is a state in which the "bell" pattern is lined up on either the upper horizontal line, the middle horizontal line, the lower horizontal line, the diagonal line rising to the right, or the diagonal line rising to the left, in which case 10 medals will be paid out. In contrast, if the stop switch is not operated in the push order notified by the push order navigation, the enemy character EC will win, and fewer medals than the above-mentioned predetermined number (for example, 1 medal) will be paid out, or a medal will be missed depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switch.

After the specified number of medals are inserted, when the start lever 25 is operated, all the reels start spinning as shown in Fig. 113(B), the remaining number of games RG is displayed as "remaining: 1G" (one game remaining), and the difference in number of medals DN is reduced by the number of medals inserted (three medals) to "TOTAL: 147 medals". Also, when the push order role is won in this game, a battle between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC starts on the screen of the image display device 11, and the push order navigation is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Here, the push order navigation of "center, right, left" is displayed in Fig. 113(B).

Then, when the player operates the center stop switch 26b for the first stop (Fig. 113 (C)) and then operates the right stop switch 26c for the second stop, an image of the enemy character EC being struck by lightning is displayed on the screen of the image display device 11 (Fig. 113 (D)). Finally, when the left stop switch 26a is operated for the third stop, an image of the friendly character FC winning is displayed on the image display device 11, and all the reels stop and bell symbols are aligned in a diagonal line going up to the right (Fig. 113 (E)). Then, when the player releases his finger from the left stop switch 26a, the medals start to be paid out and the display of the difference number DN is updated from "TOTAL: 147 medals" to "TOTAL: 157 medals". At the same time, the GET performance described above is performed, and the GET performance display is displayed on the image display device 11 (Fig. 113 (F)). Here, the display of the difference in number DN may be updated to 157 when the player releases his/her finger from the left stop switch 26a, or when the payout of medals is completed. Also, the displayed difference in number may be incremented by 1 as medals are paid out until it reaches 157.

Next, when the player inserts a specified number of medals to play the final round of the AT and operates the start lever 25, all the reels start spinning as shown in FIG. 114(A), the remaining number of games RG is displayed as "Remaining: 0G" (0 games remaining), and the difference in number DN is reduced by the number of medals inserted (3 medals) to "TOTAL: 154 medals". Furthermore, if the push order role is won in this game, a battle between ally character FC and enemy character EC begins on the screen of the image display device 11, and a push order navigation is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Here, a "left, center, right" push order navigation is displayed in FIG. 114(A).

Then, when the player operates the left stop switch 26a for the first stop (Fig. 114 (B)), and then operates the middle stop switch 26b for the second stop, an image of the enemy character EC being struck by lightning is displayed on the screen of the image display device 11 (Fig. 114 (C)). Finally, when the right stop switch 26c is operated for the third stop, an image of the friendly character FC winning is displayed on the image display device 11, and all the reels stop, resulting in a state in which bell symbols are aligned on the upper horizontal line (Fig. 114 (D)). Then, when the player releases his finger from the right stop switch 26c, the medals start to be paid out, and the display of the difference number DN is updated from "TOTAL: 154 medals" to "TOTAL: 164 medals". The GET performance described above is also performed, and the GET performance display is displayed on the image display device 11 (Fig. 114 (E)). Here, the display of the difference in number DN may be updated from 154 to 164 when the player releases his/her finger from the left stop switch 26a, or may be updated from 154 to 164 when the medal payout is complete. Also, the displayed difference in number may be increased by 1 as medals are paid out until it reaches 164.

If the bell symbols are not lined up during the final play of the AT because the stop switches 26a-26c are operated in a different order from the order notified by the push order navigation, and only one medal is paid out, the display of the difference in number of medals DN is updated from "TOTAL: 154 medals" to "TOTAL: 155 medals." If a medal is missed, the display of the difference in number of medals DN remains "TOTAL: 154 medals." The display of the difference in number of medals DN may be updated when the player releases his/her finger from the stop switch that performed the third stop operation, or when the payout of medals is completed. The displayed value of the difference in number of medals may also be increased by one each time the hopper pays out medals one by one.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the GET effect display shown in FIG. 114(E) has been performed, as shown in FIG. 114(F), first, an image of converging lines heading towards the center of the screen is displayed on the image display device 11 as the AT ending screen, and then an addiction prevention display HS (for example, messages such as "Be careful not to get addicted" and "Pachinko slots are a game that should be enjoyed in moderation") is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen, and then the TOTAL display shows the words "Continued G count: 300G" (indicating that 300 plays were made during this AT) and "TOTAL: 164 coins" (indicating that the difference in number of coins during this AT was 164 coins).

Here, the value of the difference in number DN on the GET effect display screen shown in FIG. 114(E) and the value of the difference in number in the TOTAL display shown in FIG. 114(F) are the same. Therefore, when the difference in number at the start of the final game of the AT is 154 coins, if only one medal is paid out because the stop switches 26a-26c are operated in a different press order from the press order notified by the press order navigation, the difference in number displayed in the TOTAL display will be "TOTAL: 155 coins," and it goes without saying that if a medal is missed, it will be "TOTAL: 154 coins."

In this way, in the example shown in FIG. 114, the TOTAL display is triggered by the third stop operation in the final play of the AT, and the difference included in the TOTAL display is the addition of the number of medals paid out in the final play of the AT. As a result, the number of medals won during the AT, which is of greatest interest to the player, is accurately displayed in the TOTAL display that is displayed at the end of the AT, so not only can the player feel a sense of accomplishment or superiority, but the player can also accurately and clearly show others the final number of medals won in the AT, rather than the number at an intermediate stage of the AT, by recording the TOTAL display, for example.

In addition, in FIG. 114 (F), the addiction prevention display HS is displayed before the TOTAL display, so the addiction prevention display can be reliably presented to the player, reducing the risk that the player will focus only on the TOTAL display and overlook the addiction prevention display, for example.

In the example shown in FIG. 114, the number of medals won in the final game of the AT was reflected (specifically added) to the value of the difference in number DN when the GET effect display was being performed (see FIG. 114(E)). In contrast to this, as shown in FIG. 115, the number of medals won in the final game of the AT may be reflected when the TOTAL display is performed. Here, FIG. 115 shows the display content of the image display device in the 300th game (0 games remaining) (final game) in an AT that allows 300 games to be played. Note that the display content of the image display device (particularly the value of the difference in number DN) in the 299th game (1 game remaining), one game prior, is assumed to be the same as FIG. 113.

Figure 115 (A) shows a state where the 299th play (1 game remaining) of the current AT has ended, and the specified number (3 medals) of medals have been inserted to play the 300th play. At this point, the remaining number of games RG of the AT is displayed as "Remaining: 1G", and the difference in number of medals DN is displayed as "TOTAL: 157 medals". Then, when the player operates the start lever 25 to play the final play of the AT, as shown in Figure 115 (B), all the reels start to spin, the remaining number of games RG is displayed as "Remaining: 0G" (0 games remaining), and the difference in number of medals DN is displayed as "TOTAL: 154 medals" by decreasing the number of medals inserted (3 medals). Also, when the push order role is won in this play, a battle between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC starts on the screen of the image display device 11, and the push order navigation is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Here, the push order navigation of "left, center, right" is displayed in Figure 115 (B).

Then, when the player operates the left stop switch 26a for the first stop (FIG. 115(C)), and then operates the middle stop switch 26b for the second stop, an image of the enemy character EC being struck by lightning is displayed on the screen of the image display device 11 (FIG. 115(D)). Finally, when the right stop switch 26c is operated for the third stop, an image of the friendly character FC winning is displayed on the image display device 11, and all the reels are stopped and the bell symbols are aligned on the upper horizontal line (FIG. 115(E)). Then, when the player releases his finger from the right stop switch 26c, the payout of medals begins, but the display of the difference number DN remains "TOTAL: 154" without being updated, and the AT end screen and the anti-addiction display HS are displayed, and then the TOTAL display is displayed in addition to these (FIG. 115(F)).

The TOTAL display shown in FIG. 115(F) shows "TOTAL: 164 coins", and the final difference in the number of coins in the AT is displayed with the number of medals paid out in the final game of the AT added. As for the display format of the difference in the number of coins, when the TOTAL display is first performed, the difference in the number of coins is displayed as "TOTAL: 154 coins", and then the value of the difference in the number of coins is incremented by one at a time, until it finally displays "TOTAL: 164 coins". When this increment display is performed, the displayed value of the difference in the number of coins may be increased by one according to the timing at which the hopper pays out medals one by one.

Here, if the stop switches 26a-26c are operated in a different order from the order notified by the push order navigation in the final play of the AT, the bell symbols do not line up and only one medal is paid out, the difference in the number of medals shown in the TOTAL display will be "TOTAL: 155 medals", and it goes without saying that if a medal is missed, it will remain "TOTAL: 154 medals".

Note that a GET effect (such as the GET effect display shown in FIG. 114(E)) may be displayed between the time the player releases his/her finger from the stop switch that performed the third stop operation and the time the TOTAL display is displayed. Also, in the final game of the AT, when the TOTAL display is displayed in response to the third stop operation, the TOTAL display may be displayed after the time required to pay out medals when the minor combination associated with the largest number of payouts is won (hereinafter also referred to as the "maximum payout time") has elapsed since the third stop operation. Here, for example, in the case of the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 10 to FIG. 13, the largest number of payouts associated with the minor combinations is 15 medals, so in this case the maximum payout time is the time required to pay out 15 medals.

In this configuration, it is possible to avoid the final difference in the number of medals in the AT being displayed while medals are being paid out, so the actual difference in the number of medals and the difference in the number of medals included in the TOTAL display can be more accurately matched. Also, for example, if an error (e.g., a hopper empty error) occurs in the hopper while medals are being paid out and the payout is interrupted, the state in which there is a discrepancy between the actual difference in the number of medals and the difference in the number of medals included in the TOTAL display can be shortened.

The timing of the start of counting the maximum payout time may be when the stop switch that performs the third stop operation is pressed (when the last stop switch operated changes from OFF to ON), or when the finger is released from the stop switch that performed the third stop operation (when the last stop switch operated changes from ON to OFF). Also, instead of the maximum payout time, the time required to pay out the number of medals associated with the push order role (particularly the number of medals paid out when the push order is correct) may be used.

(When the TOTAL display is triggered by operating the start lever)
Next, referring to Fig. 116, an example of a case where TOTAL display is performed in response to the operation of the start lever will be described. Here, Fig. 116 shows the display contents of the image display device in the 300th game (0 games remaining) (final game) in an AT that allows 300 games to be played. Note that the display contents (especially the value of the difference in number of coins DN) of the image display device in the 299th game (1 game remaining), one game before, are assumed to be the same as those in Fig. 113.

Figure 116 (A) shows a state in which the GET effect display has disappeared from the screen of the image display device 11 due to the passage of a predetermined time since the GET effect display was performed in the previous (299th) game (see Figure 113 (F)). At this point, the remaining number of games RG of the AT is displayed as "Remaining: 1G", and the difference in number of coins DN is displayed as "TOTAL: 157 coins". When the player inserts the specified number (3 coins) of medals to play the final game of the AT and operates the start lever 25, all the reels start to rotate, and as shown in Figure 116 (B), the screen switches to the end screen of the AT, and the addiction prevention display HS and TOTAL display are displayed. In this TOTAL display, the number of continued games is 300 games, which means the final game of the AT, and the value of the difference in number of coins is 154 coins minus the number of medals inserted (3 coins). Additionally, the TOTAL display may be displayed a predetermined time after the start lever 25 is operated, but it is preferable that the TOTAL display be displayed at the latest before the third stop operation is performed.

In addition, when a push order role is won, a push order navigation is displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 11. Here, in Figure 116 (B), a push order navigation of "left, center, right" is displayed, but the TOTAL display is displayed in a position that does not overlap the push order navigation display. In contrast, when the TOTAL display and the push order navigation display are displayed overlapping each other, it is desirable to ensure that the TOTAL display does not interfere with the display of the push order navigation (for example, displaying the push order navigation display overlapping the TOTAL display).

Let us say that the player operates the left stop switch 26a to perform the first stop operation (Fig. 116(C)), then operates the middle stop switch 26b to perform the second stop operation (Fig. 116(D)), and then operates the right stop switch 26c to perform the third stop operation, resulting in the bell symbols lining up on the top horizontal line (Fig. 116(E)). Note that the content of the TOTAL display remains unchanged from the beginning between the first stop operation and the third stop operation.

Then, when the player releases his/her finger from the right stop switch 26c, the payout of medals starts, and the value of the difference in number in the TOTAL display is updated to 164 medals, as shown in FIG. 116(F). Here, the value of the difference in number may change from 154 medals to 164 medals all at once, or may be added one by one from 154 medals to 164 medals. Also, in the final game of the AT, if the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a different push order from the push order notified by the push order navigation, the bell pattern is not aligned, and only one medal is paid out, the display of the difference in number in the TOTAL display becomes "TOTAL: 155 medals", and it goes without saying that if it is missed, it remains "TOTAL: 154 medals". Furthermore, if some small role is won when all the reels stop, a GET performance display may be performed in addition to the TOTAL display. The GET effect display at this time may be displayed overlapping the TOTAL display for a specified period of time, or may be displayed in a position that does not overlap the TOTAL display for a specified period of time.

116, the TOTAL display is triggered by the operation of the start lever in the final game of the AT, and the number of medals paid out in the final game of the AT is added to the difference included in the TOTAL display. As a result, the number of medals acquired during the AT, which is of greatest interest to the player, is accurately displayed in the TOTAL display displayed at the end of the AT, so that not only can the player feel a sense of accomplishment or superiority, but also, for example, by the player recording the TOTAL display in a photo or the like, the final number of medals acquired in the AT, rather than the number of medals at the midpoint of the AT, can be accurately and clearly shown to others.

In addition, if, when medals are paid out in the final game of the AT, the difference in the number of medals displayed in the TOTAL display is incremented by one until it reaches a value equal to the number of medals paid out, the player can see the process in which the difference in the number of medals displayed in the AT is updated, and can clearly recognize that the number of medals won in the final game of the AT is included in the difference in the number of medals displayed in the TOTAL display.

In the example shown in FIG. 116, when medals are paid out in the final game of the AT, the number of medals paid out is added to the difference in the TOTAL display, but the number of medals paid out in the final game of the AT does not have to be added to the difference in the TOTAL display. In this case, when the TOTAL display is performed in FIG. 116(B), the value of the difference in the number of medals is the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in the final game of the AT (i.e., 154 medals), but it may be a value not obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted (i.e., 157 medals). In other words, the difference in the number of medals shown by the TOTAL display may be the difference in the number of medals up to one game before the final game of the AT.

When configured in this way, the TOTAL display does not change depending on the result of the final game of the AT, so for example, when the AT ending screen displays an effect suggesting the setting value of the slot machine or a revival effect (an effect indicating that the AT has not actually ended and a new AT is about to begin), the player is less likely to be distracted by the TOTAL display and can be directed to those effects.

In particular, when the TOTAL display is triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, the difference in number displayed is the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals inserted in the final game of the AT. Even if medals are paid out thereafter, the number of medals paid out is not added to the difference in number already displayed. In this way, the difference in number determined at the time the TOTAL display is made can be displayed, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable about the content of the TOTAL display changing after the AT end screen is displayed.

Next, in the case where the TOTAL display is triggered by the operation of the start lever 25, the process from when the start lever 25 is operated to when the TOTAL display is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. 117. Here, FIG. 117 shows the display content of the image display device in the 300th game (0 games remaining) (final game) in an AT that allows 300 games to be played. Note that the display content (particularly the value of the difference in number of coins DN) of the image display device in the 299th game (1 game remaining), one game prior, is assumed to be the same as that in FIG. 113.

Figure 117 (A) shows a state in which the GET effect display has disappeared from the screen of the image display device 11 due to the passage of a predetermined time since the GET effect display was performed in the previous (299th) game (see Figure 113 (F)). At this time, the remaining number of games RG of the AT is displayed as "Remaining: 1G", and the difference in number of coins DN is displayed as "TOTAL: 157 coins". Then, when the player inserts the specified number (3 coins) of medals to play the final game of the AT and operates the start lever 25, this triggers all the reels to start spinning, and as shown in Figure 117 (B), the screen switches to the AT end screen and the addiction prevention display HS is displayed. At this time, if the push order role is won, the push order navigation is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 11. In Figure 117 (B), the push order navigation of "left, center, right" is displayed, but this push order navigation is displayed so as not to be obstructed by the AT end screen and the addiction prevention display HS.

When a predetermined time has elapsed since the display shown in FIG. 117(B) was made, the TOTAL display first displays the total number of games played during the AT ("Continuation G: 300G") (FIG. 117(C)), and then displays the difference in the number of medals during the AT at that time ("TOTAL: 154 medals") (FIG. 117(D)). Here, the difference in the number of medals displayed in FIG. 117(D) is the difference in the number of medals at the end of the previous game (157 medals) minus the number of medals inserted in the last game (3 medals). In addition, the transition from FIG. 117(B) to FIG. 117(D) may be completed until the operation of the stop switch is acceptable (at least until all reels are in a constant speed rotation state), or the operation of the stop switch may not be accepted until the display shown in FIG. 117(D) is made (for example, the "freeze at the start of reel rotation" described above).

When the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in the push order notified by the push order navigation from the state shown in Fig. 117(D), and as a result bell symbols are lined up in the upper horizontal line as shown in Fig. 117(E), when the player releases his finger from the right stop switch 26c that was operated for the third stop, the payout of medals begins and the difference in the number of medals in the TOTAL display is updated to 164 medals as shown in Fig. 117(F). Here, the difference in the number of medals may change from 154 to 164 medals all at once, or may be added one by one from 154 to 164 medals. Also, if the bell symbols do not line up because the stop switches 26a-26c are operated in a different order from the order notified by the push order navigation during the final play of the AT, and only one medal is paid out, the difference in the number of medals shown in the TOTAL display will be "TOTAL: 155 medals," and it goes without saying that if a medal is missed, it will remain "TOTAL: 154 medals."

If some minor winning combination occurs when all reels have stopped, a GET effect display may be displayed in addition to the TOTAL display. In this case, the GET effect display may be displayed for a predetermined period of time superimposed on the TOTAL display, or may be displayed for a predetermined period of time in a position that does not superimpose on the TOTAL display.

In this way, when the TOTAL display is triggered by the operation of the start lever 25 during the final play of the AT, as shown in FIG. 117(B), the addiction prevention display HS is displayed before the TOTAL display, so that the addiction prevention display can be reliably presented to the player, reducing the risk that the player will focus only on the TOTAL display and overlook the addiction prevention display, for example.

(About the effects that occur when you perform a stopping operation that differs from the notified push order navigation)
Next, referring to FIG. 118, the change in the presentation when the stop switches 26a to 26c are operated in a different push order from the notified push order navigation (hereinafter also referred to as "when the push order is wrong" will be described. First, the presentation content when the push order is wrong in a game where the TOTAL display is not performed will be described with reference to FIG. 118 (A-1) to (A-3). As a premise, it is a presentation related to the push order navigation in an AT that can be played 300 times, and FIG. 118 (A-1) shows a state in which the 298th play (2 games remaining) of the current AT has ended and the specified number (3 medals) of medals have been inserted to play the 299th play, just like FIG. 113 (A).

At this time, the remaining number of games RG is displayed as "Remaining: 2G" (2 games remaining) on the upper left side of the screen of the image display device 11, and the difference in number of coins DN during the AT is displayed as "TOTAL: 150 coins" (difference in number of coins is 150 coins) on the upper right side of the screen. Then, when the player operates the start lever 25, as shown in Figure 118 (A-2), all the reels start to spin, the remaining number of games RG is displayed as "Remaining: 1G" (1 game remaining), and the difference in number of coins DN is reduced by the number of coins inserted (3 coins) to "TOTAL: 147 coins."

When the push order role is won in this game, a battle begins between the ally character FC and the enemy character EC on the screen of the image display device 11, and a push order navigation is displayed at the bottom of the screen. Here, FIG. 118 (A-2) shows the "left, middle, right" push order navigation. Here, if the player mistakenly operates the middle stop switch 26b to perform the first stop operation, an image of the ally character FC displayed on the image display device 11 being struck by lightning is displayed, and then, similar to the blackout effect described above, the display on the image display device 11 becomes dark overall, reducing visibility (FIG. 118 (A-3)). However, the area in which the push order navigation is displayed is the non-blackout area described above, so that its visibility is not reduced.

Next, the effects that occur when the push order is incorrect in a game in which the TOTAL display is made will be described with reference to Figures 118 (B-1) to (B-3). Like Figures 116 (A) and 117 (A), Figure 118 (B-1) shows a state in which the GET effect display has disappeared from the screen of the image display device 11 as a predetermined time has passed since the GET effect display was made in the previous game (299th time) (see Figure 113 (F)). At this point, the remaining number of games in the AT, RG, is displayed as "Remaining: 1G", and the difference in number of coins, DN, is displayed as "TOTAL: 157 coins".

Then, when the player inserts the specified number of medals (three medals) to play the final round of the AT and operates the start lever 25, all the reels start to spin and, as shown in FIG. 118 (B-2), the screen switches to the end of the AT, and the TOTAL display is displayed after the addiction prevention display HS. At this time, if the push order role is won, a push order navigation is also displayed at the bottom of the screen of the image display device 11. In FIG. 118 (B-2), the push order navigation of "left, center, right" is displayed.

Here, as shown in FIG. 118 (B-3), even if the player mistakenly operates the middle stop switch 26b to perform the first stop operation, no blackout effect that reduces the visibility of the AT end screen or TOTAL display displayed on the image display device 11 will be performed. However, if an effect is being performed in which a sound effect (such as a buzzer sound) is generated to indicate that a push order has been made incorrectly, that sound effect may be generated.

In this way, in a gaming machine that executes a blackout effect when the buttons are pressed incorrectly during the AT, by not executing the blackout effect when the button is pressed incorrectly while the TOTAL display is being shown, the visibility of the TOTAL display, which shows the number of medals won during the AT and is what interests the player most at the end of the AT, is not reduced, thereby reducing the risk of reducing the sense of accomplishment or superiority that the player feels when the AT ends.

The TOTAL display shown in each of Figures 114 to 118 may be erased from the screen of the image display device 11 at any one of the following times: when an error occurs, when the settlement switch 24 is operated to start the settlement process, when the settlement process is completed, when the display transitions to a demo screen, when the menu screen is displayed, when medals are inserted to play the next game (specifically, when the 1-BET switch 22 or the MAX-BET switch 23 is operated, or when medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 21), or when the start switch 25 is operated after the specified number of medals have been inserted, or when a combination of two or more of the above-mentioned events occurs.

In addition, if the TOTAL display is erased from the screen of the image display device 11 due to the occurrence of the above-mentioned event, when the event that caused the TOTAL display to be erased is resolved, the TOTAL display before it was erased may be displayed again on the screen of the image display device 11, or the display may be switched to the presentation screen that is displayed during normal play without being displayed.

In the fifth form slot machine described above, when comparing the types of characters displayed in the conversation effects with the types of characters displayed in the demo effects (effects that are displayed when not playing and that are executed a predetermined time after play has ended; also called "standby effects"), the configuration may be such that the types of characters displayed in the conversation effects are greater. Characters that appear less frequently (so-called premium characters) may not be displayed in the demo effects, but may appear in conversation effects or other effects. This may create a situation in which an unknown character (a character that is known to exist but not known to appear) appears, and the appearance of such a character can effectively heighten anticipation. Also, the demo effects are configured not to display conversation effects or subtitle effects.

In the above-described embodiments, a slot machine (reel type gaming machine) that uses gaming medals as gaming value has been described as an example of a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied, but the present invention is not limited to this, and can be similarly applied to, for example, reel type gaming machines that use gaming balls as gaming value, reel type gaming machines that use information recorded on an electronic recording medium as gaming value, mahjong ball gaming machines, arrange ball machines, pachinko gaming machines, etc., and similar effects can be obtained. The present invention can also be similarly applied to slot machines with four or more reels, and similar effects can be obtained.

1 Slot machine 2 Front door 3a, 3b, 3c Reel 25 Start lever 26a, 26b, 26c Stop switch (first embodiment)
60 Main control board 70 Sub-control board 70A Sub-main control board 70B Sub-sub control board 100 Main control means 200 Sub-control means 200A Sub-main control means 200B Sub-sub control means 500 Stop switch unit 510, 520, 530 Stop switch (second embodiment)
512, 522, 532 Stop switch cover 514, 524, 534 Stop switch lamp 540 Stop switch panel 600 AT notification indicator 611, 612, 613 7-segment indicator W Display window DA1, DA2 Pattern display area GK1, GK2, GK3 Display design DP Image display section

Claims (1)

An image production means for producing a production using an image;
An abnormality detection means capable of detecting a plurality of types of abnormalities that impede control of a game,
the image presentation means is capable of executing a first presentation using a first image and a second presentation using a second image;
the first effect is performed by superimposing and displaying the first image on at least a part of the second image while the second effect is being performed;
The first image used in the first performance is an image having transparency that reduces the visibility of the second image over the entire area where the first image overlaps with the second image, and is composed of a first area that does not allow the second image to be viewed in the area where the first image overlaps with the second image , and a second area having transparency that allows the second image to be viewed in the area where the second image overlaps with the second image,
The first area in the first image is configured to be located at a position that does not overlap with information about an advantageous game state displayed in the second image,
when a predetermined abnormality is detected by the abnormality detection means during execution of the first performance, the image performance means displays a third image corresponding to the detected abnormality in a superimposed manner on the first image and the second image;
The third image is configured to make the display of the first image and the second image opaque in an overlapping area with the first image and the second image.

Images